Title: | 'Amazon Web Services' Storage Services |
Version: | 0.9.0 |
Description: | Interface to 'Amazon Web Services' storage services, including 'Simple Storage Service' ('S3') and more https://aws.amazon.com/. |
License: | Apache License (≥ 2.0) |
URL: | https://github.com/paws-r/paws, https://paws-r.r-universe.dev/paws.storage |
BugReports: | https://github.com/paws-r/paws/issues |
Imports: | paws.common (≥ 0.8.0) |
Suggests: | testthat |
Encoding: | UTF-8 |
RoxygenNote: | 7.3.2 |
Collate: | 'backup_service.R' 'backup_interfaces.R' 'backup_operations.R' 'dlm_service.R' 'dlm_interfaces.R' 'dlm_operations.R' 'ebs_service.R' 'ebs_interfaces.R' 'ebs_operations.R' 'efs_service.R' 'efs_interfaces.R' 'efs_operations.R' 'finspacedata_service.R' 'finspacedata_interfaces.R' 'finspacedata_operations.R' 'fsx_service.R' 'fsx_interfaces.R' 'fsx_operations.R' 'glacier_service.R' 'glacier_interfaces.R' 'glacier_operations.R' 'omics_service.R' 'omics_interfaces.R' 'omics_operations.R' 'recyclebin_service.R' 'recyclebin_interfaces.R' 'recyclebin_operations.R' 'reexports_paws.common.R' 's3_service.R' 's3_operations.R' 's3_custom.R' 's3_interfaces.R' 's3control_service.R' 's3control_interfaces.R' 's3control_operations.R' 's3outposts_service.R' 's3outposts_interfaces.R' 's3outposts_operations.R' 's3tables_service.R' 's3tables_interfaces.R' 's3tables_operations.R' 'storagegateway_service.R' 'storagegateway_interfaces.R' 'storagegateway_operations.R' |
NeedsCompilation: | no |
Packaged: | 2025-03-14 09:23:43 UTC; dyfanjones |
Author: | David Kretch [aut], Adam Banker [aut], Dyfan Jones [cre], Amazon.com, Inc. [cph] |
Maintainer: | Dyfan Jones <dyfan.r.jones@gmail.com> |
Repository: | CRAN |
Date/Publication: | 2025-03-14 17:10:02 UTC |
AWS Backup
Description
Backup
Backup is a unified backup service designed to protect Amazon Web Services services and their associated data. Backup simplifies the creation, migration, restoration, and deletion of backups, while also providing reporting and auditing.
Usage
backup(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- backup( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
cancel_legal_hold | Removes the specified legal hold on a recovery point |
create_backup_plan | Creates a backup plan using a backup plan name and backup rules |
create_backup_selection | Creates a JSON document that specifies a set of resources to assign to a backup plan |
create_backup_vault | Creates a logical container where backups are stored |
create_framework | Creates a framework with one or more controls |
create_legal_hold | Creates a legal hold on a recovery point (backup) |
create_logically_air_gapped_backup_vault | Creates a logical container to where backups may be copied |
create_report_plan | Creates a report plan |
create_restore_testing_plan | Creates a restore testing plan |
create_restore_testing_selection | This request can be sent after CreateRestoreTestingPlan request returns successfully |
delete_backup_plan | Deletes a backup plan |
delete_backup_selection | Deletes the resource selection associated with a backup plan that is specified by the SelectionId |
delete_backup_vault | Deletes the backup vault identified by its name |
delete_backup_vault_access_policy | Deletes the policy document that manages permissions on a backup vault |
delete_backup_vault_lock_configuration | Deletes Backup Vault Lock from a backup vault specified by a backup vault name |
delete_backup_vault_notifications | Deletes event notifications for the specified backup vault |
delete_framework | Deletes the framework specified by a framework name |
delete_recovery_point | Deletes the recovery point specified by a recovery point ID |
delete_report_plan | Deletes the report plan specified by a report plan name |
delete_restore_testing_plan | This request deletes the specified restore testing plan |
delete_restore_testing_selection | Input the Restore Testing Plan name and Restore Testing Selection name |
describe_backup_job | Returns backup job details for the specified BackupJobId |
describe_backup_vault | Returns metadata about a backup vault specified by its name |
describe_copy_job | Returns metadata associated with creating a copy of a resource |
describe_framework | Returns the framework details for the specified FrameworkName |
describe_global_settings | Describes whether the Amazon Web Services account is opted in to cross-account backup |
describe_protected_resource | Returns information about a saved resource, including the last time it was backed up, its Amazon Resource Name (ARN), and the Amazon Web Services service type of the saved resource |
describe_recovery_point | Returns metadata associated with a recovery point, including ID, status, encryption, and lifecycle |
describe_region_settings | Returns the current service opt-in settings for the Region |
describe_report_job | Returns the details associated with creating a report as specified by its ReportJobId |
describe_report_plan | Returns a list of all report plans for an Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Web Services Region |
describe_restore_job | Returns metadata associated with a restore job that is specified by a job ID |
disassociate_recovery_point | Deletes the specified continuous backup recovery point from Backup and releases control of that continuous backup to the source service, such as Amazon RDS |
disassociate_recovery_point_from_parent | This action to a specific child (nested) recovery point removes the relationship between the specified recovery point and its parent (composite) recovery point |
export_backup_plan_template | Returns the backup plan that is specified by the plan ID as a backup template |
get_backup_plan | Returns BackupPlan details for the specified BackupPlanId |
get_backup_plan_from_json | Returns a valid JSON document specifying a backup plan or an error |
get_backup_plan_from_template | Returns the template specified by its templateId as a backup plan |
get_backup_selection | Returns selection metadata and a document in JSON format that specifies a list of resources that are associated with a backup plan |
get_backup_vault_access_policy | Returns the access policy document that is associated with the named backup vault |
get_backup_vault_notifications | Returns event notifications for the specified backup vault |
get_legal_hold | This action returns details for a specified legal hold |
get_recovery_point_index_details | This operation returns the metadata and details specific to the backup index associated with the specified recovery point |
get_recovery_point_restore_metadata | Returns a set of metadata key-value pairs that were used to create the backup |
get_restore_job_metadata | This request returns the metadata for the specified restore job |
get_restore_testing_inferred_metadata | This request returns the minimal required set of metadata needed to start a restore job with secure default settings |
get_restore_testing_plan | Returns RestoreTestingPlan details for the specified RestoreTestingPlanName |
get_restore_testing_selection | Returns RestoreTestingSelection, which displays resources and elements of the restore testing plan |
get_supported_resource_types | Returns the Amazon Web Services resource types supported by Backup |
list_backup_jobs | Returns a list of existing backup jobs for an authenticated account for the last 30 days |
list_backup_job_summaries | This is a request for a summary of backup jobs created or running within the most recent 30 days |
list_backup_plans | Lists the active backup plans for the account |
list_backup_plan_templates | Lists the backup plan templates |
list_backup_plan_versions | Returns version metadata of your backup plans, including Amazon Resource Names (ARNs), backup plan IDs, creation and deletion dates, plan names, and version IDs |
list_backup_selections | Returns an array containing metadata of the resources associated with the target backup plan |
list_backup_vaults | Returns a list of recovery point storage containers along with information about them |
list_copy_jobs | Returns metadata about your copy jobs |
list_copy_job_summaries | This request obtains a list of copy jobs created or running within the the most recent 30 days |
list_frameworks | Returns a list of all frameworks for an Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Web Services Region |
list_indexed_recovery_points | This operation returns a list of recovery points that have an associated index, belonging to the specified account |
list_legal_holds | This action returns metadata about active and previous legal holds |
list_protected_resources | Returns an array of resources successfully backed up by Backup, including the time the resource was saved, an Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource, and a resource type |
list_protected_resources_by_backup_vault | This request lists the protected resources corresponding to each backup vault |
list_recovery_points_by_backup_vault | Returns detailed information about the recovery points stored in a backup vault |
list_recovery_points_by_legal_hold | This action returns recovery point ARNs (Amazon Resource Names) of the specified legal hold |
list_recovery_points_by_resource | The information about the recovery points of the type specified by a resource Amazon Resource Name (ARN) |
list_report_jobs | Returns details about your report jobs |
list_report_plans | Returns a list of your report plans |
list_restore_jobs | Returns a list of jobs that Backup initiated to restore a saved resource, including details about the recovery process |
list_restore_jobs_by_protected_resource | This returns restore jobs that contain the specified protected resource |
list_restore_job_summaries | This request obtains a summary of restore jobs created or running within the the most recent 30 days |
list_restore_testing_plans | Returns a list of restore testing plans |
list_restore_testing_selections | Returns a list of restore testing selections |
list_tags | Returns the tags assigned to the resource, such as a target recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault |
put_backup_vault_access_policy | Sets a resource-based policy that is used to manage access permissions on the target backup vault |
put_backup_vault_lock_configuration | Applies Backup Vault Lock to a backup vault, preventing attempts to delete any recovery point stored in or created in a backup vault |
put_backup_vault_notifications | Turns on notifications on a backup vault for the specified topic and events |
put_restore_validation_result | This request allows you to send your independent self-run restore test validation results |
start_backup_job | Starts an on-demand backup job for the specified resource |
start_copy_job | Starts a job to create a one-time copy of the specified resource |
start_report_job | Starts an on-demand report job for the specified report plan |
start_restore_job | Recovers the saved resource identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN) |
stop_backup_job | Attempts to cancel a job to create a one-time backup of a resource |
tag_resource | Assigns a set of key-value pairs to a recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN) |
untag_resource | Removes a set of key-value pairs from a recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN) |
update_backup_plan | Updates the specified backup plan |
update_framework | Updates the specified framework |
update_global_settings | Updates whether the Amazon Web Services account is opted in to cross-account backup |
update_recovery_point_index_settings | This operation updates the settings of a recovery point index |
update_recovery_point_lifecycle | Sets the transition lifecycle of a recovery point |
update_region_settings | Updates the current service opt-in settings for the Region |
update_report_plan | Updates the specified report plan |
update_restore_testing_plan | This request will send changes to your specified restore testing plan |
update_restore_testing_selection | Updates the specified restore testing selection |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- backup()
svc$cancel_legal_hold(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Removes the specified legal hold on a recovery point
Description
Removes the specified legal hold on a recovery point. This action can only be performed by a user with sufficient permissions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_cancel_legal_hold/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_cancel_legal_hold(
LegalHoldId,
CancelDescription,
RetainRecordInDays = NULL
)
Arguments
LegalHoldId |
[required] The ID of the legal hold. |
CancelDescription |
[required] A string the describes the reason for removing the legal hold. |
RetainRecordInDays |
The integer amount, in days, after which to remove legal hold. |
Creates a backup plan using a backup plan name and backup rules
Description
Creates a backup plan using a backup plan name and backup rules. A backup plan is a document that contains information that Backup uses to schedule tasks that create recovery points for resources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_backup_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_create_backup_plan(
BackupPlan,
BackupPlanTags = NULL,
CreatorRequestId = NULL
)
Arguments
BackupPlan |
[required] The body of a backup plan. Includes a |
BackupPlanTags |
The tags to assign to the backup plan. |
CreatorRequestId |
Identifies the request and allows failed requests to be retried without
the risk of running the operation twice. If the request includes a
If used, this parameter must contain 1 to 50 alphanumeric or '-_.' characters. |
Creates a JSON document that specifies a set of resources to assign to a backup plan
Description
Creates a JSON document that specifies a set of resources to assign to a backup plan. For examples, see Assigning resources programmatically.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_backup_selection/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_create_backup_selection(
BackupPlanId,
BackupSelection,
CreatorRequestId = NULL
)
Arguments
BackupPlanId |
[required] The ID of the backup plan. |
BackupSelection |
[required] The body of a request to assign a set of resources to a backup plan. |
CreatorRequestId |
A unique string that identifies the request and allows failed requests to be retried without the risk of running the operation twice. This parameter is optional. If used, this parameter must contain 1 to 50 alphanumeric or '-_.' characters. |
Creates a logical container where backups are stored
Description
Creates a logical container where backups are stored. A create_backup_vault
request includes a name, optionally one or more resource tags, an encryption key, and a request ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_backup_vault/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_create_backup_vault(
BackupVaultName,
BackupVaultTags = NULL,
EncryptionKeyArn = NULL,
CreatorRequestId = NULL
)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. They consist of letters, numbers, and hyphens. |
BackupVaultTags |
The tags to assign to the backup vault. |
EncryptionKeyArn |
The server-side encryption key that is used to protect your backups; for
example,
|
CreatorRequestId |
A unique string that identifies the request and allows failed requests to be retried without the risk of running the operation twice. This parameter is optional. If used, this parameter must contain 1 to 50 alphanumeric or '-_.' characters. |
Creates a framework with one or more controls
Description
Creates a framework with one or more controls. A framework is a collection of controls that you can use to evaluate your backup practices. By using pre-built customizable controls to define your policies, you can evaluate whether your backup practices comply with your policies and which resources are not yet in compliance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_framework/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_create_framework(
FrameworkName,
FrameworkDescription = NULL,
FrameworkControls,
IdempotencyToken = NULL,
FrameworkTags = NULL
)
Arguments
FrameworkName |
[required] The unique name of the framework. The name must be between 1 and 256 characters, starting with a letter, and consisting of letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), and underscores (_). |
FrameworkDescription |
An optional description of the framework with a maximum of 1,024 characters. |
FrameworkControls |
[required] The controls that make up the framework. Each control in the list has a name, input parameters, and scope. |
IdempotencyToken |
A customer-chosen string that you can use to distinguish between
otherwise identical calls to |
FrameworkTags |
The tags to assign to the framework. |
Creates a legal hold on a recovery point (backup)
Description
Creates a legal hold on a recovery point (backup). A legal hold is a restraint on altering or deleting a backup until an authorized user cancels the legal hold. Any actions to delete or disassociate a recovery point will fail with an error if one or more active legal holds are on the recovery point.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_legal_hold/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_create_legal_hold(
Title,
Description,
IdempotencyToken = NULL,
RecoveryPointSelection = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
Title |
[required] The title of the legal hold. |
Description |
[required] The description of the legal hold. |
IdempotencyToken |
This is a user-chosen string used to distinguish between otherwise identical calls. Retrying a successful request with the same idempotency token results in a success message with no action taken. |
RecoveryPointSelection |
The criteria to assign a set of resources, such as resource types or backup vaults. |
Tags |
Optional tags to include. A tag is a key-value pair you can use to manage, filter, and search for your resources. Allowed characters include UTF-8 letters, numbers, spaces, and the following characters: + - = . _ : /. |
Creates a logical container to where backups may be copied
Description
Creates a logical container to where backups may be copied.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_logically_air_gapped_backup_vault/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_create_logically_air_gapped_backup_vault(
BackupVaultName,
BackupVaultTags = NULL,
CreatorRequestId = NULL,
MinRetentionDays,
MaxRetentionDays
)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Logically air-gapped backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Region where they are created. |
BackupVaultTags |
The tags to assign to the vault. |
CreatorRequestId |
The ID of the creation request. This parameter is optional. If used, this parameter must contain 1 to 50 alphanumeric or '-_.' characters. |
MinRetentionDays |
[required] This setting specifies the minimum retention period that the vault retains its recovery points. The minimum value accepted is 7 days. |
MaxRetentionDays |
[required] The maximum retention period that the vault retains its recovery points. |
Creates a report plan
Description
Creates a report plan. A report plan is a document that contains information about the contents of the report and where Backup will deliver it.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_report_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_create_report_plan(
ReportPlanName,
ReportPlanDescription = NULL,
ReportDeliveryChannel,
ReportSetting,
ReportPlanTags = NULL,
IdempotencyToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ReportPlanName |
[required] The unique name of the report plan. The name must be between 1 and 256 characters, starting with a letter, and consisting of letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), and underscores (_). |
ReportPlanDescription |
An optional description of the report plan with a maximum of 1,024 characters. |
ReportDeliveryChannel |
[required] A structure that contains information about where and how to deliver your reports, specifically your Amazon S3 bucket name, S3 key prefix, and the formats of your reports. |
ReportSetting |
[required] Identifies the report template for the report. Reports are built using a report template. The report templates are:
If the report template is |
ReportPlanTags |
The tags to assign to the report plan. |
IdempotencyToken |
A customer-chosen string that you can use to distinguish between
otherwise identical calls to |
Creates a restore testing plan
Description
Creates a restore testing plan.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_restore_testing_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_create_restore_testing_plan(
CreatorRequestId = NULL,
RestoreTestingPlan,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
CreatorRequestId |
This is a unique string that identifies the request and allows failed requests to be retriedwithout the risk of running the operation twice. This parameter is optional. If used, this parameter must contain 1 to 50 alphanumeric or '-_.' characters. |
RestoreTestingPlan |
[required] A restore testing plan must contain a unique The |
Tags |
The tags to assign to the restore testing plan. |
This request can be sent after CreateRestoreTestingPlan request returns successfully
Description
This request can be sent after CreateRestoreTestingPlan request returns successfully. This is the second part of creating a resource testing plan, and it must be completed sequentially.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_restore_testing_selection/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_create_restore_testing_selection(
CreatorRequestId = NULL,
RestoreTestingPlanName,
RestoreTestingSelection
)
Arguments
CreatorRequestId |
This is an optional unique string that identifies the request and allows failed requests to be retried without the risk of running the operation twice. If used, this parameter must contain 1 to 50 alphanumeric or '-_.' characters. |
RestoreTestingPlanName |
[required] Input the restore testing plan name that was returned from the related CreateRestoreTestingPlan request. |
RestoreTestingSelection |
[required] This consists of
Each protected resource type can have one single value. A restore testing selection can include a wildcard value ("*") for
|
Deletes a backup plan
Description
Deletes a backup plan. A backup plan can only be deleted after all associated selections of resources have been deleted. Deleting a backup plan deletes the current version of a backup plan. Previous versions, if any, will still exist.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_backup_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_delete_backup_plan(BackupPlanId)
Arguments
BackupPlanId |
[required] Uniquely identifies a backup plan. |
Deletes the resource selection associated with a backup plan that is specified by the SelectionId
Description
Deletes the resource selection associated with a backup plan that is specified by the SelectionId
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_backup_selection/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_delete_backup_selection(BackupPlanId, SelectionId)
Arguments
BackupPlanId |
[required] Uniquely identifies a backup plan. |
SelectionId |
[required] Uniquely identifies the body of a request to assign a set of resources to a backup plan. |
Deletes the backup vault identified by its name
Description
Deletes the backup vault identified by its name. A vault can be deleted only if it is empty.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_backup_vault/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_delete_backup_vault(BackupVaultName)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. |
Deletes the policy document that manages permissions on a backup vault
Description
Deletes the policy document that manages permissions on a backup vault.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_backup_vault_access_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_delete_backup_vault_access_policy(BackupVaultName)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. They consist of lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens. |
Deletes Backup Vault Lock from a backup vault specified by a backup vault name
Description
Deletes Backup Vault Lock from a backup vault specified by a backup vault name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_backup_vault_lock_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_delete_backup_vault_lock_configuration(BackupVaultName)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of the backup vault from which to delete Backup Vault Lock. |
Deletes event notifications for the specified backup vault
Description
Deletes event notifications for the specified backup vault.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_backup_vault_notifications/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_delete_backup_vault_notifications(BackupVaultName)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Region where they are created. |
Deletes the framework specified by a framework name
Description
Deletes the framework specified by a framework name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_framework/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_delete_framework(FrameworkName)
Arguments
FrameworkName |
[required] The unique name of a framework. |
Deletes the recovery point specified by a recovery point ID
Description
Deletes the recovery point specified by a recovery point ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_recovery_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_delete_recovery_point(BackupVaultName, RecoveryPointArn)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. |
RecoveryPointArn |
[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a recovery point;
for example,
|
Deletes the report plan specified by a report plan name
Description
Deletes the report plan specified by a report plan name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_report_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_delete_report_plan(ReportPlanName)
Arguments
ReportPlanName |
[required] The unique name of a report plan. |
This request deletes the specified restore testing plan
Description
This request deletes the specified restore testing plan.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_restore_testing_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_delete_restore_testing_plan(RestoreTestingPlanName)
Arguments
RestoreTestingPlanName |
[required] Required unique name of the restore testing plan you wish to delete. |
Input the Restore Testing Plan name and Restore Testing Selection name
Description
Input the Restore Testing Plan name and Restore Testing Selection name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_restore_testing_selection/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_delete_restore_testing_selection(
RestoreTestingPlanName,
RestoreTestingSelectionName
)
Arguments
RestoreTestingPlanName |
[required] Required unique name of the restore testing plan that contains the restore testing selection you wish to delete. |
RestoreTestingSelectionName |
[required] Required unique name of the restore testing selection you wish to delete. |
Returns backup job details for the specified BackupJobId
Description
Returns backup job details for the specified BackupJobId
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_backup_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_describe_backup_job(BackupJobId)
Arguments
BackupJobId |
[required] Uniquely identifies a request to Backup to back up a resource. |
Returns metadata about a backup vault specified by its name
Description
Returns metadata about a backup vault specified by its name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_backup_vault/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_describe_backup_vault(BackupVaultName, BackupVaultAccountId = NULL)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. |
BackupVaultAccountId |
The account ID of the specified backup vault. |
Returns metadata associated with creating a copy of a resource
Description
Returns metadata associated with creating a copy of a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_copy_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_describe_copy_job(CopyJobId)
Arguments
CopyJobId |
[required] Uniquely identifies a copy job. |
Returns the framework details for the specified FrameworkName
Description
Returns the framework details for the specified FrameworkName
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_framework/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_describe_framework(FrameworkName)
Arguments
FrameworkName |
[required] The unique name of a framework. |
Describes whether the Amazon Web Services account is opted in to cross-account backup
Description
Describes whether the Amazon Web Services account is opted in to cross-account backup. Returns an error if the account is not a member of an Organizations organization. Example: describe-global-settings --region us-west-2
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_global_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_describe_global_settings()
Returns information about a saved resource, including the last time it was backed up, its Amazon Resource Name (ARN), and the Amazon Web Services service type of the saved resource
Description
Returns information about a saved resource, including the last time it was backed up, its Amazon Resource Name (ARN), and the Amazon Web Services service type of the saved resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_protected_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_describe_protected_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a resource. The format of the ARN depends on the resource type. |
Returns metadata associated with a recovery point, including ID, status, encryption, and lifecycle
Description
Returns metadata associated with a recovery point, including ID, status, encryption, and lifecycle.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_recovery_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_describe_recovery_point(
BackupVaultName,
RecoveryPointArn,
BackupVaultAccountId = NULL
)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. |
RecoveryPointArn |
[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a recovery point;
for example,
|
BackupVaultAccountId |
The account ID of the specified backup vault. |
Returns the current service opt-in settings for the Region
Description
Returns the current service opt-in settings for the Region. If service opt-in is enabled for a service, Backup tries to protect that service's resources in this Region, when the resource is included in an on-demand backup or scheduled backup plan. Otherwise, Backup does not try to protect that service's resources in this Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_region_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_describe_region_settings()
Returns the details associated with creating a report as specified by its ReportJobId
Description
Returns the details associated with creating a report as specified by its ReportJobId
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_report_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_describe_report_job(ReportJobId)
Arguments
ReportJobId |
[required] The identifier of the report job. A unique, randomly generated, Unicode, UTF-8 encoded string that is at most 1,024 bytes long. The report job ID cannot be edited. |
Returns a list of all report plans for an Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Returns a list of all report plans for an Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_report_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_describe_report_plan(ReportPlanName)
Arguments
ReportPlanName |
[required] The unique name of a report plan. |
Returns metadata associated with a restore job that is specified by a job ID
Description
Returns metadata associated with a restore job that is specified by a job ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_restore_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_describe_restore_job(RestoreJobId)
Arguments
RestoreJobId |
[required] Uniquely identifies the job that restores a recovery point. |
Deletes the specified continuous backup recovery point from Backup and releases control of that continuous backup to the source service, such as Amazon RDS
Description
Deletes the specified continuous backup recovery point from Backup and releases control of that continuous backup to the source service, such as Amazon RDS. The source service will continue to create and retain continuous backups using the lifecycle that you specified in your original backup plan.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_disassociate_recovery_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_disassociate_recovery_point(BackupVaultName, RecoveryPointArn)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The unique name of an Backup vault. |
RecoveryPointArn |
[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies an Backup recovery point. |
This action to a specific child (nested) recovery point removes the relationship between the specified recovery point and its parent (composite) recovery point
Description
This action to a specific child (nested) recovery point removes the relationship between the specified recovery point and its parent (composite) recovery point.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_disassociate_recovery_point_from_parent/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_disassociate_recovery_point_from_parent(
BackupVaultName,
RecoveryPointArn
)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where the child (nested) recovery point is stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. |
RecoveryPointArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the child
(nested) recovery point; for example,
|
Returns the backup plan that is specified by the plan ID as a backup template
Description
Returns the backup plan that is specified by the plan ID as a backup template.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_export_backup_plan_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_export_backup_plan_template(BackupPlanId)
Arguments
BackupPlanId |
[required] Uniquely identifies a backup plan. |
Returns BackupPlan details for the specified BackupPlanId
Description
Returns BackupPlan
details for the specified BackupPlanId
. The details are the body of a backup plan in JSON format, in addition to plan metadata.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_backup_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_get_backup_plan(BackupPlanId, VersionId = NULL)
Arguments
BackupPlanId |
[required] Uniquely identifies a backup plan. |
VersionId |
Unique, randomly generated, Unicode, UTF-8 encoded strings that are at most 1,024 bytes long. Version IDs cannot be edited. |
Returns a valid JSON document specifying a backup plan or an error
Description
Returns a valid JSON document specifying a backup plan or an error.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_backup_plan_from_json/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_get_backup_plan_from_json(BackupPlanTemplateJson)
Arguments
BackupPlanTemplateJson |
[required] A customer-supplied backup plan document in JSON format. |
Returns the template specified by its templateId as a backup plan
Description
Returns the template specified by its templateId
as a backup plan.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_backup_plan_from_template/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_get_backup_plan_from_template(BackupPlanTemplateId)
Arguments
BackupPlanTemplateId |
[required] Uniquely identifies a stored backup plan template. |
Returns selection metadata and a document in JSON format that specifies a list of resources that are associated with a backup plan
Description
Returns selection metadata and a document in JSON format that specifies a list of resources that are associated with a backup plan.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_backup_selection/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_get_backup_selection(BackupPlanId, SelectionId)
Arguments
BackupPlanId |
[required] Uniquely identifies a backup plan. |
SelectionId |
[required] Uniquely identifies the body of a request to assign a set of resources to a backup plan. |
Returns the access policy document that is associated with the named backup vault
Description
Returns the access policy document that is associated with the named backup vault.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_backup_vault_access_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_get_backup_vault_access_policy(BackupVaultName)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. |
Returns event notifications for the specified backup vault
Description
Returns event notifications for the specified backup vault.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_backup_vault_notifications/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_get_backup_vault_notifications(BackupVaultName)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. |
This action returns details for a specified legal hold
Description
This action returns details for a specified legal hold. The details are the body of a legal hold in JSON format, in addition to metadata.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_legal_hold/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_get_legal_hold(LegalHoldId)
Arguments
LegalHoldId |
[required] The ID of the legal hold. |
This operation returns the metadata and details specific to the backup index associated with the specified recovery point
Description
This operation returns the metadata and details specific to the backup index associated with the specified recovery point.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_recovery_point_index_details/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_get_recovery_point_index_details(BackupVaultName, RecoveryPointArn)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Region where they are created. Accepted characters include lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens. |
RecoveryPointArn |
[required] An ARN that uniquely identifies a recovery point; for example,
|
Returns a set of metadata key-value pairs that were used to create the backup
Description
Returns a set of metadata key-value pairs that were used to create the backup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_recovery_point_restore_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_get_recovery_point_restore_metadata(
BackupVaultName,
RecoveryPointArn,
BackupVaultAccountId = NULL
)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. |
RecoveryPointArn |
[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a recovery point;
for example,
|
BackupVaultAccountId |
The account ID of the specified backup vault. |
This request returns the metadata for the specified restore job
Description
This request returns the metadata for the specified restore job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_restore_job_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_get_restore_job_metadata(RestoreJobId)
Arguments
RestoreJobId |
[required] This is a unique identifier of a restore job within Backup. |
This request returns the minimal required set of metadata needed to start a restore job with secure default settings
Description
This request returns the minimal required set of metadata needed to start a restore job with secure default settings. BackupVaultName
and RecoveryPointArn
are required parameters. BackupVaultAccountId
is an optional parameter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_restore_testing_inferred_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_get_restore_testing_inferred_metadata(
BackupVaultAccountId = NULL,
BackupVaultName,
RecoveryPointArn
)
Arguments
BackupVaultAccountId |
The account ID of the specified backup vault. |
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web ServicesRegion where they are created. They consist of letters, numbers, and hyphens. |
RecoveryPointArn |
[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a recovery point;
for example,
|
Returns RestoreTestingPlan details for the specified RestoreTestingPlanName
Description
Returns RestoreTestingPlan
details for the specified RestoreTestingPlanName
. The details are the body of a restore testing plan in JSON format, in addition to plan metadata.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_restore_testing_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_get_restore_testing_plan(RestoreTestingPlanName)
Arguments
RestoreTestingPlanName |
[required] Required unique name of the restore testing plan. |
Returns RestoreTestingSelection, which displays resources and elements of the restore testing plan
Description
Returns RestoreTestingSelection, which displays resources and elements of the restore testing plan.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_restore_testing_selection/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_get_restore_testing_selection(
RestoreTestingPlanName,
RestoreTestingSelectionName
)
Arguments
RestoreTestingPlanName |
[required] Required unique name of the restore testing plan. |
RestoreTestingSelectionName |
[required] Required unique name of the restore testing selection. |
Returns the Amazon Web Services resource types supported by Backup
Description
Returns the Amazon Web Services resource types supported by Backup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_supported_resource_types/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_get_supported_resource_types()
This is a request for a summary of backup jobs created or running within the most recent 30 days
Description
This is a request for a summary of backup jobs created or running within the most recent 30 days. You can include parameters AccountID, State, ResourceType, MessageCategory, AggregationPeriod, MaxResults, or NextToken to filter results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_backup_job_summaries/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_backup_job_summaries(
AccountId = NULL,
State = NULL,
ResourceType = NULL,
MessageCategory = NULL,
AggregationPeriod = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
Returns the job count for the specified account. If the request is sent from a member account or an account not part of Amazon Web Services Organizations, jobs within requestor's account will be returned. Root, admin, and delegated administrator accounts can use the value ANY to return job counts from every account in the organization.
|
State |
This parameter returns the job count for jobs with the specified state. The the value ANY returns count of all states.
GET /audit/backup-job-summaries?AggregationPeriod=FOURTEEN_DAYS&State=COMPLETED GET /audit/backup-job-summaries?AggregationPeriod=FOURTEEN_DAYS&MessageCategory=SUCCESS&State=COMPLETED |
ResourceType |
Returns the job count for the specified resource type. Use request
The the value ANY returns count of all resource types.
The type of Amazon Web Services resource to be backed up; for example, an Amazon Elastic Block Store (Amazon EBS) volume or an Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) database. |
MessageCategory |
This parameter returns the job count for the specified message category. Example accepted strings include The the value ANY returns count of all message categories.
|
AggregationPeriod |
The period for the returned results.
|
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be returned. The value is an integer. Range of accepted values is from 1 to 500. |
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned resources. For
example, if a request is made to return |
Returns a list of existing backup jobs for an authenticated account for the last 30 days
Description
Returns a list of existing backup jobs for an authenticated account for the last 30 days. For a longer period of time, consider using these monitoring tools.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_backup_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_backup_jobs(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ByResourceArn = NULL,
ByState = NULL,
ByBackupVaultName = NULL,
ByCreatedBefore = NULL,
ByCreatedAfter = NULL,
ByResourceType = NULL,
ByAccountId = NULL,
ByCompleteAfter = NULL,
ByCompleteBefore = NULL,
ByParentJobId = NULL,
ByMessageCategory = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example,
if a request is made to return |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be returned. |
ByResourceArn |
Returns only backup jobs that match the specified resource Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
ByState |
Returns only backup jobs that are in the specified state.
To obtain the job count for GET /backup-jobs/?state=COMPLETED GET /backup-jobs/?messageCategory=SUCCESS&state=COMPLETED |
ByBackupVaultName |
Returns only backup jobs that will be stored in the specified backup vault. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. |
ByCreatedBefore |
Returns only backup jobs that were created before the specified date. |
ByCreatedAfter |
Returns only backup jobs that were created after the specified date. |
ByResourceType |
Returns only backup jobs for the specified resources:
|
ByAccountId |
The account ID to list the jobs from. Returns only backup jobs associated with the specified account ID. If used from an Organizations management account, passing |
ByCompleteAfter |
Returns only backup jobs completed after a date expressed in Unix format and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). |
ByCompleteBefore |
Returns only backup jobs completed before a date expressed in Unix format and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). |
ByParentJobId |
This is a filter to list child (nested) jobs based on parent job ID. |
ByMessageCategory |
This is an optional parameter that can be used to filter out jobs with a MessageCategory which matches the value you input. Example strings may include View Monitoring The wildcard () returns count of all message categories.
|
Lists the backup plan templates
Description
Lists the backup plan templates.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_backup_plan_templates/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_backup_plan_templates(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example,
if a request is made to return |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to return. |
Returns version metadata of your backup plans, including Amazon Resource Names (ARNs), backup plan IDs, creation and deletion dates, plan names, and version IDs
Description
Returns version metadata of your backup plans, including Amazon Resource Names (ARNs), backup plan IDs, creation and deletion dates, plan names, and version IDs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_backup_plan_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_backup_plan_versions(
BackupPlanId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
BackupPlanId |
[required] Uniquely identifies a backup plan. |
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example,
if a request is made to return |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be returned. |
Lists the active backup plans for the account
Description
Lists the active backup plans for the account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_backup_plans/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_backup_plans(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
IncludeDeleted = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example,
if a request is made to return |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be returned. |
IncludeDeleted |
A Boolean value with a default value of |
Returns an array containing metadata of the resources associated with the target backup plan
Description
Returns an array containing metadata of the resources associated with the target backup plan.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_backup_selections/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_backup_selections(
BackupPlanId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
BackupPlanId |
[required] Uniquely identifies a backup plan. |
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example,
if a request is made to return |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be returned. |
Returns a list of recovery point storage containers along with information about them
Description
Returns a list of recovery point storage containers along with information about them.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_backup_vaults/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_backup_vaults(
ByVaultType = NULL,
ByShared = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
ByVaultType |
This parameter will sort the list of vaults by vault type. |
ByShared |
This parameter will sort the list of vaults by shared vaults. |
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example,
if a request is made to return |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be returned. |
This request obtains a list of copy jobs created or running within the the most recent 30 days
Description
This request obtains a list of copy jobs created or running within the the most recent 30 days. You can include parameters AccountID, State, ResourceType, MessageCategory, AggregationPeriod, MaxResults, or NextToken to filter results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_copy_job_summaries/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_copy_job_summaries(
AccountId = NULL,
State = NULL,
ResourceType = NULL,
MessageCategory = NULL,
AggregationPeriod = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
Returns the job count for the specified account. If the request is sent from a member account or an account not part of Amazon Web Services Organizations, jobs within requestor's account will be returned. Root, admin, and delegated administrator accounts can use the value ANY to return job counts from every account in the organization.
|
State |
This parameter returns the job count for jobs with the specified state. The the value ANY returns count of all states.
|
ResourceType |
Returns the job count for the specified resource type. Use request
The the value ANY returns count of all resource types.
The type of Amazon Web Services resource to be backed up; for example, an Amazon Elastic Block Store (Amazon EBS) volume or an Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) database. |
MessageCategory |
This parameter returns the job count for the specified message category. Example accepted strings include The the value ANY returns count of all message categories.
|
AggregationPeriod |
The period for the returned results.
|
MaxResults |
This parameter sets the maximum number of items to be returned. The value is an integer. Range of accepted values is from 1 to 500. |
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned resources. For
example, if a request is made to return |
Returns metadata about your copy jobs
Description
Returns metadata about your copy jobs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_copy_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_copy_jobs(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ByResourceArn = NULL,
ByState = NULL,
ByCreatedBefore = NULL,
ByCreatedAfter = NULL,
ByResourceType = NULL,
ByDestinationVaultArn = NULL,
ByAccountId = NULL,
ByCompleteBefore = NULL,
ByCompleteAfter = NULL,
ByParentJobId = NULL,
ByMessageCategory = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be returned. |
ByResourceArn |
Returns only copy jobs that match the specified resource Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
ByState |
Returns only copy jobs that are in the specified state. |
ByCreatedBefore |
Returns only copy jobs that were created before the specified date. |
ByCreatedAfter |
Returns only copy jobs that were created after the specified date. |
ByResourceType |
Returns only backup jobs for the specified resources:
|
ByDestinationVaultArn |
An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a source backup
vault to copy from; for example,
|
ByAccountId |
The account ID to list the jobs from. Returns only copy jobs associated with the specified account ID. |
ByCompleteBefore |
Returns only copy jobs completed before a date expressed in Unix format and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). |
ByCompleteAfter |
Returns only copy jobs completed after a date expressed in Unix format and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). |
ByParentJobId |
This is a filter to list child (nested) jobs based on parent job ID. |
ByMessageCategory |
This is an optional parameter that can be used to filter out jobs with a MessageCategory which matches the value you input. Example strings may include View Monitoring for a list of accepted strings. The the value ANY returns count of all message categories.
|
Returns a list of all frameworks for an Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Returns a list of all frameworks for an Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_frameworks/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_frameworks(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The number of desired results from 1 to 1000. Optional. If unspecified, the query will return 1 MB of data. |
NextToken |
An identifier that was returned from the previous call to this operation, which can be used to return the next set of items in the list. |
This operation returns a list of recovery points that have an associated index, belonging to the specified account
Description
This operation returns a list of recovery points that have an associated index, belonging to the specified account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_indexed_recovery_points/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_indexed_recovery_points(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
SourceResourceArn = NULL,
CreatedBefore = NULL,
CreatedAfter = NULL,
ResourceType = NULL,
IndexStatus = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned recovery points. For example, if a request is made to return |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of resource list items to be returned. |
SourceResourceArn |
A string of the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the source resource. |
CreatedBefore |
Returns only indexed recovery points that were created before the specified date. |
CreatedAfter |
Returns only indexed recovery points that were created after the specified date. |
ResourceType |
Returns a list of indexed recovery points for the specified resource type(s). Accepted values include:
|
IndexStatus |
Include this parameter to filter the returned list by the indicated statuses. Accepted values: A recovery point with an index that has the status of |
This action returns metadata about active and previous legal holds
Description
This action returns metadata about active and previous legal holds.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_legal_holds/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_legal_holds(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned resources. For
example, if a request is made to return |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of resource list items to be returned. |
Returns an array of resources successfully backed up by Backup, including the time the resource was saved, an Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource, and a resource type
Description
Returns an array of resources successfully backed up by Backup, including the time the resource was saved, an Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource, and a resource type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_protected_resources/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_protected_resources(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example,
if a request is made to return |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be returned. |
This request lists the protected resources corresponding to each backup vault
Description
This request lists the protected resources corresponding to each backup vault.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_protected_resources_by_backup_vault/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_protected_resources_by_backup_vault(
BackupVaultName,
BackupVaultAccountId = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The list of protected resources by backup vault within the vault(s) you specify by name. |
BackupVaultAccountId |
The list of protected resources by backup vault within the vault(s) you specify by account ID. |
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example,
if a request is made to return |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be returned. |
Returns detailed information about the recovery points stored in a backup vault
Description
Returns detailed information about the recovery points stored in a backup vault.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_recovery_points_by_backup_vault/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_recovery_points_by_backup_vault(
BackupVaultName,
BackupVaultAccountId = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ByResourceArn = NULL,
ByResourceType = NULL,
ByBackupPlanId = NULL,
ByCreatedBefore = NULL,
ByCreatedAfter = NULL,
ByParentRecoveryPointArn = NULL
)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. Backup vault name might not be available when a supported service creates the backup. |
BackupVaultAccountId |
This parameter will sort the list of recovery points by account ID. |
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example,
if a request is made to return |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be returned. |
ByResourceArn |
Returns only recovery points that match the specified resource Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
ByResourceType |
Returns only recovery points that match the specified resource type(s):
|
ByBackupPlanId |
Returns only recovery points that match the specified backup plan ID. |
ByCreatedBefore |
Returns only recovery points that were created before the specified timestamp. |
ByCreatedAfter |
Returns only recovery points that were created after the specified timestamp. |
ByParentRecoveryPointArn |
This returns only recovery points that match the specified parent (composite) recovery point Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
This action returns recovery point ARNs (Amazon Resource Names) of the specified legal hold
Description
This action returns recovery point ARNs (Amazon Resource Names) of the specified legal hold.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_recovery_points_by_legal_hold/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_recovery_points_by_legal_hold(
LegalHoldId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
LegalHoldId |
[required] The ID of the legal hold. |
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned resources. For
example, if a request is made to return |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of resource list items to be returned. |
The information about the recovery points of the type specified by a resource Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
Description
The information about the recovery points of the type specified by a resource Amazon Resource Name (ARN).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_recovery_points_by_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_recovery_points_by_resource(
ResourceArn,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ManagedByAWSBackupOnly = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] An ARN that uniquely identifies a resource. The format of the ARN depends on the resource type. |
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example,
if a request is made to return |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be returned. Amazon RDS requires a value of at least 20. |
ManagedByAWSBackupOnly |
This attribute filters recovery points based on ownership. If this is set to If this is set to Type: Boolean |
Returns details about your report jobs
Description
Returns details about your report jobs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_report_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_report_jobs(
ByReportPlanName = NULL,
ByCreationBefore = NULL,
ByCreationAfter = NULL,
ByStatus = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ByReportPlanName |
Returns only report jobs with the specified report plan name. |
ByCreationBefore |
Returns only report jobs that were created before the date and time specified in Unix format and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). For example, the value 1516925490 represents Friday, January 26, 2018 12:11:30 AM. |
ByCreationAfter |
Returns only report jobs that were created after the date and time specified in Unix format and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). For example, the value 1516925490 represents Friday, January 26, 2018 12:11:30 AM. |
ByStatus |
Returns only report jobs that are in the specified status. The statuses are:
|
MaxResults |
The number of desired results from 1 to 1000. Optional. If unspecified, the query will return 1 MB of data. |
NextToken |
An identifier that was returned from the previous call to this operation, which can be used to return the next set of items in the list. |
Returns a list of your report plans
Description
Returns a list of your report plans. For detailed information about a single report plan, use describe_report_plan
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_report_plans/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_report_plans(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The number of desired results from 1 to 1000. Optional. If unspecified, the query will return 1 MB of data. |
NextToken |
An identifier that was returned from the previous call to this operation, which can be used to return the next set of items in the list. |
This request obtains a summary of restore jobs created or running within the the most recent 30 days
Description
This request obtains a summary of restore jobs created or running within the the most recent 30 days. You can include parameters AccountID, State, ResourceType, AggregationPeriod, MaxResults, or NextToken to filter results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_restore_job_summaries/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_restore_job_summaries(
AccountId = NULL,
State = NULL,
ResourceType = NULL,
AggregationPeriod = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
Returns the job count for the specified account. If the request is sent from a member account or an account not part of Amazon Web Services Organizations, jobs within requestor's account will be returned. Root, admin, and delegated administrator accounts can use the value ANY to return job counts from every account in the organization.
|
State |
This parameter returns the job count for jobs with the specified state. The the value ANY returns count of all states.
|
ResourceType |
Returns the job count for the specified resource type. Use request
The the value ANY returns count of all resource types.
The type of Amazon Web Services resource to be backed up; for example, an Amazon Elastic Block Store (Amazon EBS) volume or an Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) database. |
AggregationPeriod |
The period for the returned results.
|
MaxResults |
This parameter sets the maximum number of items to be returned. The value is an integer. Range of accepted values is from 1 to 500. |
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned resources. For
example, if a request is made to return |
Returns a list of jobs that Backup initiated to restore a saved resource, including details about the recovery process
Description
Returns a list of jobs that Backup initiated to restore a saved resource, including details about the recovery process.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_restore_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_restore_jobs(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ByAccountId = NULL,
ByResourceType = NULL,
ByCreatedBefore = NULL,
ByCreatedAfter = NULL,
ByStatus = NULL,
ByCompleteBefore = NULL,
ByCompleteAfter = NULL,
ByRestoreTestingPlanArn = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example,
if a request is made to return |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be returned. |
ByAccountId |
The account ID to list the jobs from. Returns only restore jobs associated with the specified account ID. |
ByResourceType |
Include this parameter to return only restore jobs for the specified resources:
|
ByCreatedBefore |
Returns only restore jobs that were created before the specified date. |
ByCreatedAfter |
Returns only restore jobs that were created after the specified date. |
ByStatus |
Returns only restore jobs associated with the specified job status. |
ByCompleteBefore |
Returns only copy jobs completed before a date expressed in Unix format and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). |
ByCompleteAfter |
Returns only copy jobs completed after a date expressed in Unix format and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). |
ByRestoreTestingPlanArn |
This returns only restore testing jobs that match the specified resource Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
This returns restore jobs that contain the specified protected resource
Description
This returns restore jobs that contain the specified protected resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_restore_jobs_by_protected_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_restore_jobs_by_protected_resource(
ResourceArn,
ByStatus = NULL,
ByRecoveryPointCreationDateAfter = NULL,
ByRecoveryPointCreationDateBefore = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] Returns only restore jobs that match the specified resource Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
ByStatus |
Returns only restore jobs associated with the specified job status. |
ByRecoveryPointCreationDateAfter |
Returns only restore jobs of recovery points that were created after the specified date. |
ByRecoveryPointCreationDateBefore |
Returns only restore jobs of recovery points that were created before the specified date. |
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example,
if a request ismade to return |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be returned. |
Returns a list of restore testing plans
Description
Returns a list of restore testing plans.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_restore_testing_plans/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_restore_testing_plans(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be returned. |
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example,
if a request is made to return |
Returns a list of restore testing selections
Description
Returns a list of restore testing selections. Can be filtered by MaxResults
and RestoreTestingPlanName
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_restore_testing_selections/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_restore_testing_selections(
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
RestoreTestingPlanName
)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be returned. |
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example,
if a request is made to return |
RestoreTestingPlanName |
[required] Returns restore testing selections by the specified restore testing plan name. |
Returns the tags assigned to the resource, such as a target recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault
Description
Returns the tags assigned to the resource, such as a target recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_list_tags(ResourceArn, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a resource. The
format of the ARN depends on the type of resource. Valid targets for
|
NextToken |
The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example,
if a request is made to return |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to be returned. |
Sets a resource-based policy that is used to manage access permissions on the target backup vault
Description
Sets a resource-based policy that is used to manage access permissions on the target backup vault. Requires a backup vault name and an access policy document in JSON format.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_put_backup_vault_access_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_put_backup_vault_access_policy(BackupVaultName, Policy = NULL)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. |
Policy |
The backup vault access policy document in JSON format. |
Applies Backup Vault Lock to a backup vault, preventing attempts to delete any recovery point stored in or created in a backup vault
Description
Applies Backup Vault Lock to a backup vault, preventing attempts to delete any recovery point stored in or created in a backup vault. Vault Lock also prevents attempts to update the lifecycle policy that controls the retention period of any recovery point currently stored in a backup vault. If specified, Vault Lock enforces a minimum and maximum retention period for future backup and copy jobs that target a backup vault.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_put_backup_vault_lock_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_put_backup_vault_lock_configuration(
BackupVaultName,
MinRetentionDays = NULL,
MaxRetentionDays = NULL,
ChangeableForDays = NULL
)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The Backup Vault Lock configuration that specifies the name of the backup vault it protects. |
MinRetentionDays |
The Backup Vault Lock configuration that specifies the minimum retention period that the vault retains its recovery points. This setting can be useful if, for example, your organization's policies require you to retain certain data for at least seven years (2555 days). This parameter is required when a vault lock is created through CloudFormation; otherwise, this parameter is optional. If this parameter is not specified, Vault Lock will not enforce a minimum retention period. If this parameter is specified, any backup or copy job to the vault must have a lifecycle policy with a retention period equal to or longer than the minimum retention period. If the job's retention period is shorter than that minimum retention period, then the vault fails that backup or copy job, and you should either modify your lifecycle settings or use a different vault. The shortest minimum retention period you can specify is 1 day. Recovery points already saved in the vault prior to Vault Lock are not affected. |
MaxRetentionDays |
The Backup Vault Lock configuration that specifies the maximum retention period that the vault retains its recovery points. This setting can be useful if, for example, your organization's policies require you to destroy certain data after retaining it for four years (1460 days). If this parameter is not included, Vault Lock does not enforce a maximum retention period on the recovery points in the vault. If this parameter is included without a value, Vault Lock will not enforce a maximum retention period. If this parameter is specified, any backup or copy job to the vault must have a lifecycle policy with a retention period equal to or shorter than the maximum retention period. If the job's retention period is longer than that maximum retention period, then the vault fails the backup or copy job, and you should either modify your lifecycle settings or use a different vault. The longest maximum retention period you can specify is 36500 days (approximately 100 years). Recovery points already saved in the vault prior to Vault Lock are not affected. |
ChangeableForDays |
The Backup Vault Lock configuration that specifies the number of days
before the lock date. For example, setting Backup enforces a 72-hour cooling-off period before Vault Lock takes
effect and becomes immutable. Therefore, you must set
Before the lock date, you can delete Vault Lock from the vault using
If this parameter is not specified, you can delete Vault Lock from the
vault using
|
Turns on notifications on a backup vault for the specified topic and events
Description
Turns on notifications on a backup vault for the specified topic and events.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_put_backup_vault_notifications/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_put_backup_vault_notifications(
BackupVaultName,
SNSTopicArn,
BackupVaultEvents
)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. |
SNSTopicArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that specifies the topic for a backup
vault’s events; for example,
|
BackupVaultEvents |
[required] An array of events that indicate the status of jobs to back up resources to the backup vault. For common use cases and code samples, see Using Amazon SNS to track Backup events. The following events are supported:
The list below includes both supported events and deprecated events that are no longer in use (for reference). Deprecated events do not return statuses or notifications. Refer to the list above for the supported events. |
This request allows you to send your independent self-run restore test validation results
Description
This request allows you to send your independent self-run restore test validation results. RestoreJobId
and ValidationStatus
are required. Optionally, you can input a ValidationStatusMessage
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_put_restore_validation_result/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_put_restore_validation_result(
RestoreJobId,
ValidationStatus,
ValidationStatusMessage = NULL
)
Arguments
RestoreJobId |
[required] This is a unique identifier of a restore job within Backup. |
ValidationStatus |
[required] The status of your restore validation. |
ValidationStatusMessage |
This is an optional message string you can input to describe the validation status for the restore test validation. |
Starts an on-demand backup job for the specified resource
Description
Starts an on-demand backup job for the specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_start_backup_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_start_backup_job(
BackupVaultName,
ResourceArn,
IamRoleArn,
IdempotencyToken = NULL,
StartWindowMinutes = NULL,
CompleteWindowMinutes = NULL,
Lifecycle = NULL,
RecoveryPointTags = NULL,
BackupOptions = NULL,
Index = NULL
)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. |
ResourceArn |
[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a resource. The format of the ARN depends on the resource type. |
IamRoleArn |
[required] Specifies the IAM role ARN used to create the target recovery point; for
example, |
IdempotencyToken |
A customer-chosen string that you can use to distinguish between
otherwise identical calls to
|
StartWindowMinutes |
A value in minutes after a backup is scheduled before a job will be canceled if it doesn't start successfully. This value is optional, and the default is 8 hours. If this value is included, it must be at least 60 minutes to avoid errors. This parameter has a maximum value of 100 years (52,560,000 minutes). During the start window, the backup job status remains in |
CompleteWindowMinutes |
A value in minutes during which a successfully started backup must
complete, or else Backup will cancel the job. This value is optional.
This value begins counting down from when the backup was scheduled. It
does not add additional time for Like |
Lifecycle |
The lifecycle defines when a protected resource is transitioned to cold storage and when it expires. Backup will transition and expire backups automatically according to the lifecycle that you define. Backups transitioned to cold storage must be stored in cold storage for a minimum of 90 days. Therefore, the “retention” setting must be 90 days greater than the “transition to cold after days” setting. The “transition to cold after days” setting cannot be changed after a backup has been transitioned to cold. Resource types that can transition to cold storage are listed in the Feature availability by resource table. Backup ignores this expression for other resource types. This parameter has a maximum value of 100 years (36,500 days). |
RecoveryPointTags |
The tags to assign to the resources. |
BackupOptions |
The backup option for a selected resource. This option is only available for Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) backup jobs. Valid values: Set to |
Index |
Include this parameter to enable index creation if your backup job has a resource type that supports backup indexes. Resource types that support backup indexes include:
Index can have 1 of 2 possible values, either To create a backup index for an eligible To delete a backup index, set value to |
Starts a job to create a one-time copy of the specified resource
Description
Starts a job to create a one-time copy of the specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_start_copy_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_start_copy_job(
RecoveryPointArn,
SourceBackupVaultName,
DestinationBackupVaultArn,
IamRoleArn,
IdempotencyToken = NULL,
Lifecycle = NULL
)
Arguments
RecoveryPointArn |
[required] An ARN that uniquely identifies a recovery point to use for the copy job; for example, arn:aws:backup:us-east-1:123456789012:recovery-point:1EB3B5E7-9EB0-435A-A80B-108B488B0D45. |
SourceBackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical source container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. |
DestinationBackupVaultArn |
[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a destination
backup vault to copy to; for example,
|
IamRoleArn |
[required] Specifies the IAM role ARN used to copy the target recovery point; for
example, |
IdempotencyToken |
A customer-chosen string that you can use to distinguish between
otherwise identical calls to |
Lifecycle |
Starts an on-demand report job for the specified report plan
Description
Starts an on-demand report job for the specified report plan.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_start_report_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_start_report_job(ReportPlanName, IdempotencyToken = NULL)
Arguments
ReportPlanName |
[required] The unique name of a report plan. |
IdempotencyToken |
A customer-chosen string that you can use to distinguish between
otherwise identical calls to |
Recovers the saved resource identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
Description
Recovers the saved resource identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_start_restore_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_start_restore_job(
RecoveryPointArn,
Metadata,
IamRoleArn = NULL,
IdempotencyToken = NULL,
ResourceType = NULL,
CopySourceTagsToRestoredResource = NULL
)
Arguments
RecoveryPointArn |
[required] An ARN that uniquely identifies a recovery point; for example,
|
Metadata |
[required] A set of metadata key-value pairs. You can get configuration metadata about a resource at the time it was
backed up by calling
For more information about the metadata for each resource, see the following: |
IamRoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role that Backup uses to
create the target resource; for example:
|
IdempotencyToken |
A customer-chosen string that you can use to distinguish between
otherwise identical calls to
|
ResourceType |
Starts a job to restore a recovery point for one of the following resources:
|
CopySourceTagsToRestoredResource |
This is an optional parameter. If this equals This can only be applied to backups created through Backup. |
Attempts to cancel a job to create a one-time backup of a resource
Description
Attempts to cancel a job to create a one-time backup of a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_stop_backup_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_stop_backup_job(BackupJobId)
Arguments
BackupJobId |
[required] Uniquely identifies a request to Backup to back up a resource. |
Assigns a set of key-value pairs to a recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
Description
Assigns a set of key-value pairs to a recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] An ARN that uniquely identifies a resource. The format of the ARN depends on the type of the tagged resource. ARNs that do not include |
Tags |
[required] Key-value pairs that are used to help organize your resources. You can
assign your own metadata to the resources you create. For clarity, this
is the structure to assign tags: |
Removes a set of key-value pairs from a recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
Description
Removes a set of key-value pairs from a recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeyList)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] An ARN that uniquely identifies a resource. The format of the ARN depends on the type of the tagged resource. ARNs that do not include |
TagKeyList |
[required] The keys to identify which key-value tags to remove from a resource. |
Updates the specified backup plan
Description
Updates the specified backup plan. The new version is uniquely identified by its ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_backup_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_update_backup_plan(BackupPlanId, BackupPlan)
Arguments
BackupPlanId |
[required] The ID of the backup plan. |
BackupPlan |
[required] The body of a backup plan. Includes a |
Updates the specified framework
Description
Updates the specified framework.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_framework/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_update_framework(
FrameworkName,
FrameworkDescription = NULL,
FrameworkControls = NULL,
IdempotencyToken = NULL
)
Arguments
FrameworkName |
[required] The unique name of a framework. This name is between 1 and 256 characters, starting with a letter, and consisting of letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), and underscores (_). |
FrameworkDescription |
An optional description of the framework with a maximum 1,024 characters. |
FrameworkControls |
The controls that make up the framework. Each control in the list has a name, input parameters, and scope. |
IdempotencyToken |
A customer-chosen string that you can use to distinguish between
otherwise identical calls to |
Updates whether the Amazon Web Services account is opted in to cross-account backup
Description
Updates whether the Amazon Web Services account is opted in to cross-account backup. Returns an error if the account is not an Organizations management account. Use the describe_global_settings
API to determine the current settings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_global_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_update_global_settings(GlobalSettings = NULL)
Arguments
GlobalSettings |
A value for |
This operation updates the settings of a recovery point index
Description
This operation updates the settings of a recovery point index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_recovery_point_index_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_update_recovery_point_index_settings(
BackupVaultName,
RecoveryPointArn,
IamRoleArn = NULL,
Index
)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Region where they are created. Accepted characters include lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens. |
RecoveryPointArn |
[required] An ARN that uniquely identifies a recovery point; for example,
|
IamRoleArn |
This specifies the IAM role ARN used for this operation. For example, arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/S3Access |
Index |
[required] Index can have 1 of 2 possible values, either To create a backup index for an eligible To delete a backup index, set value to |
Sets the transition lifecycle of a recovery point
Description
Sets the transition lifecycle of a recovery point.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_recovery_point_lifecycle/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_update_recovery_point_lifecycle(
BackupVaultName,
RecoveryPointArn,
Lifecycle = NULL
)
Arguments
BackupVaultName |
[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. |
RecoveryPointArn |
[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a recovery point;
for example,
|
Lifecycle |
The lifecycle defines when a protected resource is transitioned to cold storage and when it expires. Backup transitions and expires backups automatically according to the lifecycle that you define. Backups transitioned to cold storage must be stored in cold storage for a minimum of 90 days. Therefore, the “retention” setting must be 90 days greater than the “transition to cold after days” setting. The “transition to cold after days” setting cannot be changed after a backup has been transitioned to cold. |
Updates the current service opt-in settings for the Region
Description
Updates the current service opt-in settings for the Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_region_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_update_region_settings(
ResourceTypeOptInPreference = NULL,
ResourceTypeManagementPreference = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceTypeOptInPreference |
Updates the list of services along with the opt-in preferences for the Region. If resource assignments are only based on tags, then service opt-in settings are applied. If a resource type is explicitly assigned to a backup plan, such as Amazon S3, Amazon EC2, or Amazon RDS, it will be included in the backup even if the opt-in is not enabled for that particular service. If both a resource type and tags are specified in a resource assignment, the resource type specified in the backup plan takes priority over the tag condition. Service opt-in settings are disregarded in this situation. |
ResourceTypeManagementPreference |
Enables or disables full Backup management of backups for a resource type. To enable full Backup management for DynamoDB along with Backup's advanced DynamoDB backup features, follow the procedure to enable advanced DynamoDB backup programmatically. |
Updates the specified report plan
Description
Updates the specified report plan.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_report_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_update_report_plan(
ReportPlanName,
ReportPlanDescription = NULL,
ReportDeliveryChannel = NULL,
ReportSetting = NULL,
IdempotencyToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ReportPlanName |
[required] The unique name of the report plan. This name is between 1 and 256 characters, starting with a letter, and consisting of letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), and underscores (_). |
ReportPlanDescription |
An optional description of the report plan with a maximum 1,024 characters. |
ReportDeliveryChannel |
The information about where to deliver your reports, specifically your Amazon S3 bucket name, S3 key prefix, and the formats of your reports. |
ReportSetting |
The report template for the report. Reports are built using a report template. The report templates are:
If the report template is |
IdempotencyToken |
A customer-chosen string that you can use to distinguish between
otherwise identical calls to |
This request will send changes to your specified restore testing plan
Description
This request will send changes to your specified restore testing plan. RestoreTestingPlanName
cannot be updated after it is created.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_restore_testing_plan/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_update_restore_testing_plan(RestoreTestingPlan, RestoreTestingPlanName)
Arguments
RestoreTestingPlan |
[required] Specifies the body of a restore testing plan. |
RestoreTestingPlanName |
[required] The name of the restore testing plan name. |
Updates the specified restore testing selection
Description
Updates the specified restore testing selection.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_restore_testing_selection/ for full documentation.
Usage
backup_update_restore_testing_selection(
RestoreTestingPlanName,
RestoreTestingSelection,
RestoreTestingSelectionName
)
Arguments
RestoreTestingPlanName |
[required] The restore testing plan name is required to update the indicated testing plan. |
RestoreTestingSelection |
[required] To update your restore testing selection, you can use either protected
resource ARNs or conditions, but not both. That is, if your selection
has |
RestoreTestingSelectionName |
[required] The required restore testing selection name of the restore testing selection you wish to update. |
Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager
Description
With Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager, you can manage the lifecycle of your Amazon Web Services resources. You create lifecycle policies, which are used to automate operations on the specified resources.
Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager supports Amazon EBS volumes and snapshots. For information about using Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager with Amazon EBS, see Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager in the Amazon EC2 User Guide.
Usage
dlm(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- dlm( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_lifecycle_policy | Creates an Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager lifecycle policy |
delete_lifecycle_policy | Deletes the specified lifecycle policy and halts the automated operations that the policy specified |
get_lifecycle_policies | Gets summary information about all or the specified data lifecycle policies |
get_lifecycle_policy | Gets detailed information about the specified lifecycle policy |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists the tags for the specified resource |
tag_resource | Adds the specified tags to the specified resource |
untag_resource | Removes the specified tags from the specified resource |
update_lifecycle_policy | Updates the specified lifecycle policy |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- dlm()
svc$create_lifecycle_policy(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates an Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager lifecycle policy
Description
Creates an Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager lifecycle policy. Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager supports the following policy types:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dlm_create_lifecycle_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
dlm_create_lifecycle_policy(
ExecutionRoleArn,
Description,
State,
PolicyDetails = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
DefaultPolicy = NULL,
CreateInterval = NULL,
RetainInterval = NULL,
CopyTags = NULL,
ExtendDeletion = NULL,
CrossRegionCopyTargets = NULL,
Exclusions = NULL
)
Arguments
ExecutionRoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role used to run the operations specified by the lifecycle policy. |
Description |
[required] A description of the lifecycle policy. The characters ^[0-9A-Za-z _-]+$ are supported. |
State |
[required] The activation state of the lifecycle policy after creation. |
PolicyDetails |
The configuration details of the lifecycle policy. If you create a default policy, you can specify the request parameters either in the request body, or in the PolicyDetails request structure, but not both. |
Tags |
The tags to apply to the lifecycle policy during creation. |
DefaultPolicy |
[Default policies only] Specify the type of default policy to create.
|
CreateInterval |
[Default policies only] Specifies how often the policy should run and create snapshots or AMIs. The creation frequency can range from 1 to 7 days. If you do not specify a value, the default is 1. Default: 1 |
RetainInterval |
[Default policies only] Specifies how long the policy should retain snapshots or AMIs before deleting them. The retention period can range from 2 to 14 days, but it must be greater than the creation frequency to ensure that the policy retains at least 1 snapshot or AMI at any given time. If you do not specify a value, the default is 7. Default: 7 |
CopyTags |
[Default policies only] Indicates whether the policy should copy
tags from the source resource to the snapshot or AMI. If you do not
specify a value, the default is Default: false |
ExtendDeletion |
[Default policies only] Defines the snapshot or AMI retention behavior for the policy if the source volume or instance is deleted, or if the policy enters the error, disabled, or deleted state. By default (ExtendDeletion=false):
If you enable extended deletion (ExtendDeletion=true), you override both default behaviors simultaneously. If you do not specify a value, the default is Default: false |
CrossRegionCopyTargets |
[Default policies only] Specifies destination Regions for snapshot or AMI copies. You can specify up to 3 destination Regions. If you do not want to create cross-Region copies, omit this parameter. |
Exclusions |
[Default policies only] Specifies exclusion parameters for volumes or instances for which you do not want to create snapshots or AMIs. The policy will not create snapshots or AMIs for target resources that match any of the specified exclusion parameters. |
Deletes the specified lifecycle policy and halts the automated operations that the policy specified
Description
Deletes the specified lifecycle policy and halts the automated operations that the policy specified.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dlm_delete_lifecycle_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
dlm_delete_lifecycle_policy(PolicyId)
Arguments
PolicyId |
[required] The identifier of the lifecycle policy. |
Gets summary information about all or the specified data lifecycle policies
Description
Gets summary information about all or the specified data lifecycle policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dlm_get_lifecycle_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
dlm_get_lifecycle_policies(
PolicyIds = NULL,
State = NULL,
ResourceTypes = NULL,
TargetTags = NULL,
TagsToAdd = NULL,
DefaultPolicyType = NULL
)
Arguments
PolicyIds |
The identifiers of the data lifecycle policies. |
State |
The activation state. |
ResourceTypes |
The resource type. |
TargetTags |
The target tag for a policy. Tags are strings in the format |
TagsToAdd |
The tags to add to objects created by the policy. Tags are strings in the format These user-defined tags are added in addition to the Amazon Web Services-added lifecycle tags. |
DefaultPolicyType |
[Default policies only] Specifies the type of default policy to get. Specify one of the following:
|
Gets detailed information about the specified lifecycle policy
Description
Gets detailed information about the specified lifecycle policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dlm_get_lifecycle_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
dlm_get_lifecycle_policy(PolicyId)
Arguments
PolicyId |
[required] The identifier of the lifecycle policy. |
Lists the tags for the specified resource
Description
Lists the tags for the specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dlm_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
dlm_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource. |
Adds the specified tags to the specified resource
Description
Adds the specified tags to the specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dlm_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
dlm_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource. |
Tags |
[required] One or more tags. |
Removes the specified tags from the specified resource
Description
Removes the specified tags from the specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dlm_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
dlm_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource. |
TagKeys |
[required] The tag keys. |
Updates the specified lifecycle policy
Description
Updates the specified lifecycle policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dlm_update_lifecycle_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
dlm_update_lifecycle_policy(
PolicyId,
ExecutionRoleArn = NULL,
State = NULL,
Description = NULL,
PolicyDetails = NULL,
CreateInterval = NULL,
RetainInterval = NULL,
CopyTags = NULL,
ExtendDeletion = NULL,
CrossRegionCopyTargets = NULL,
Exclusions = NULL
)
Arguments
PolicyId |
[required] The identifier of the lifecycle policy. |
ExecutionRoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role used to run the operations specified by the lifecycle policy. |
State |
The desired activation state of the lifecycle policy after creation. |
Description |
A description of the lifecycle policy. |
PolicyDetails |
The configuration of the lifecycle policy. You cannot update the policy type or the resource type. |
CreateInterval |
[Default policies only] Specifies how often the policy should run and create snapshots or AMIs. The creation frequency can range from 1 to 7 days. |
RetainInterval |
[Default policies only] Specifies how long the policy should retain snapshots or AMIs before deleting them. The retention period can range from 2 to 14 days, but it must be greater than the creation frequency to ensure that the policy retains at least 1 snapshot or AMI at any given time. |
CopyTags |
[Default policies only] Indicates whether the policy should copy tags from the source resource to the snapshot or AMI. |
ExtendDeletion |
[Default policies only] Defines the snapshot or AMI retention behavior for the policy if the source volume or instance is deleted, or if the policy enters the error, disabled, or deleted state. By default (ExtendDeletion=false):
If you enable extended deletion (ExtendDeletion=true), you override both default behaviors simultaneously. Default: false |
CrossRegionCopyTargets |
[Default policies only] Specifies destination Regions for snapshot or AMI copies. You can specify up to 3 destination Regions. If you do not want to create cross-Region copies, omit this parameter. |
Exclusions |
[Default policies only] Specifies exclusion parameters for volumes or instances for which you do not want to create snapshots or AMIs. The policy will not create snapshots or AMIs for target resources that match any of the specified exclusion parameters. |
Amazon Elastic Block Store
Description
You can use the Amazon Elastic Block Store (Amazon EBS) direct APIs to create Amazon EBS snapshots, write data directly to your snapshots, read data on your snapshots, and identify the differences or changes between two snapshots. If you’re an independent software vendor (ISV) who offers backup services for Amazon EBS, the EBS direct APIs make it more efficient and cost-effective to track incremental changes on your Amazon EBS volumes through snapshots. This can be done without having to create new volumes from snapshots, and then use Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) instances to compare the differences.
You can create incremental snapshots directly from data on-premises into volumes and the cloud to use for quick disaster recovery. With the ability to write and read snapshots, you can write your on-premises data to an snapshot during a disaster. Then after recovery, you can restore it back to Amazon Web Services or on-premises from the snapshot. You no longer need to build and maintain complex mechanisms to copy data to and from Amazon EBS.
This API reference provides detailed information about the actions, data types, parameters, and errors of the EBS direct APIs. For more information about the elements that make up the EBS direct APIs, and examples of how to use them effectively, see Accessing the Contents of an Amazon EBS Snapshot in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide. For more information about the supported Amazon Web Services Regions, endpoints, and service quotas for the EBS direct APIs, see Amazon Elastic Block Store Endpoints and Quotas in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.
Usage
ebs(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- ebs( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
complete_snapshot | Seals and completes the snapshot after all of the required blocks of data have been written to it |
get_snapshot_block | Returns the data in a block in an Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshot |
list_changed_blocks | Returns information about the blocks that are different between two Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshots of the same volume/snapshot lineage |
list_snapshot_blocks | Returns information about the blocks in an Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshot |
put_snapshot_block | Writes a block of data to a snapshot |
start_snapshot | Creates a new Amazon EBS snapshot |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- ebs()
svc$complete_snapshot(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Seals and completes the snapshot after all of the required blocks of data have been written to it
Description
Seals and completes the snapshot after all of the required blocks of data have been written to it. Completing the snapshot changes the status to completed
. You cannot write new blocks to a snapshot after it has been completed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ebs_complete_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
ebs_complete_snapshot(
SnapshotId,
ChangedBlocksCount,
Checksum = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
ChecksumAggregationMethod = NULL
)
Arguments
SnapshotId |
[required] The ID of the snapshot. |
ChangedBlocksCount |
[required] The number of blocks that were written to the snapshot. |
Checksum |
An aggregated Base-64 SHA256 checksum based on the checksums of each written block. To generate the aggregated checksum using the linear aggregation method, arrange the checksums for each written block in ascending order of their block index, concatenate them to form a single string, and then generate the checksum on the entire string using the SHA256 algorithm. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
The algorithm used to generate the checksum. Currently, the only
supported algorithm is |
ChecksumAggregationMethod |
The aggregation method used to generate the checksum. Currently, the
only supported aggregation method is |
Returns the data in a block in an Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshot
Description
Returns the data in a block in an Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ebs_get_snapshot_block/ for full documentation.
Usage
ebs_get_snapshot_block(SnapshotId, BlockIndex, BlockToken)
Arguments
SnapshotId |
[required] The ID of the snapshot containing the block from which to get data. If the specified snapshot is encrypted, you must have permission to use the KMS key that was used to encrypt the snapshot. For more information, see Using encryption in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide. |
BlockIndex |
[required] The block index of the block in which to read the data. A block index is
a logical index in units of |
BlockToken |
[required] The block token of the block from which to get data. You can obtain the
|
Returns information about the blocks that are different between two Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshots of the same volume/snapshot lineage
Description
Returns information about the blocks that are different between two Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshots of the same volume/snapshot lineage.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ebs_list_changed_blocks/ for full documentation.
Usage
ebs_list_changed_blocks(
FirstSnapshotId = NULL,
SecondSnapshotId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
StartingBlockIndex = NULL
)
Arguments
FirstSnapshotId |
The ID of the first snapshot to use for the comparison. The |
SecondSnapshotId |
[required] The ID of the second snapshot to use for the comparison. The |
NextToken |
The token to request the next page of results. If you specify NextToken, then StartingBlockIndex is ignored. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of blocks to be returned by the request. Even if additional blocks can be retrieved from the snapshot, the request can return less blocks than MaxResults or an empty array of blocks. To retrieve the next set of blocks from the snapshot, make another
request with the returned NextToken value. The value of
NextToken is |
StartingBlockIndex |
The block index from which the comparison should start. The list in the response will start from this block index or the next valid block index in the snapshots. If you specify NextToken, then StartingBlockIndex is ignored. |
Returns information about the blocks in an Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshot
Description
Returns information about the blocks in an Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ebs_list_snapshot_blocks/ for full documentation.
Usage
ebs_list_snapshot_blocks(
SnapshotId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
StartingBlockIndex = NULL
)
Arguments
SnapshotId |
[required] The ID of the snapshot from which to get block indexes and block tokens. |
NextToken |
The token to request the next page of results. If you specify NextToken, then StartingBlockIndex is ignored. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of blocks to be returned by the request. Even if additional blocks can be retrieved from the snapshot, the request can return less blocks than MaxResults or an empty array of blocks. To retrieve the next set of blocks from the snapshot, make another
request with the returned NextToken value. The value of
NextToken is |
StartingBlockIndex |
The block index from which the list should start. The list in the response will start from this block index or the next valid block index in the snapshot. If you specify NextToken, then StartingBlockIndex is ignored. |
Writes a block of data to a snapshot
Description
Writes a block of data to a snapshot. If the specified block contains data, the existing data is overwritten. The target snapshot must be in the pending
state.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ebs_put_snapshot_block/ for full documentation.
Usage
ebs_put_snapshot_block(
SnapshotId,
BlockIndex,
BlockData,
DataLength,
Progress = NULL,
Checksum,
ChecksumAlgorithm
)
Arguments
SnapshotId |
[required] The ID of the snapshot. If the specified snapshot is encrypted, you must have permission to use the KMS key that was used to encrypt the snapshot. For more information, see Using encryption in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide.. |
BlockIndex |
[required] The block index of the block in which to write the data. A block index
is a logical index in units of |
BlockData |
[required] The data to write to the block. The block data is not signed as part of the Signature Version 4 signing process. As a result, you must generate and provide a Base64-encoded SHA256 checksum for the block data using the x-amz-Checksum header. Also, you must specify the checksum algorithm using the x-amz-Checksum-Algorithm header. The checksum that you provide is part of the Signature Version 4 signing process. It is validated against a checksum generated by Amazon EBS to ensure the validity and authenticity of the data. If the checksums do not correspond, the request fails. For more information, see Using checksums with the EBS direct APIs in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide. |
DataLength |
[required] The size of the data to write to the block, in bytes. Currently, the
only supported size is Valid values: |
Progress |
The progress of the write process, as a percentage. |
Checksum |
[required] A Base64-encoded SHA256 checksum of the data. Only SHA256 checksums are supported. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
[required] The algorithm used to generate the checksum. Currently, the only
supported algorithm is |
Creates a new Amazon EBS snapshot
Description
Creates a new Amazon EBS snapshot. The new snapshot enters the pending
state after the request completes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ebs_start_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
ebs_start_snapshot(
VolumeSize,
ParentSnapshotId = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
Description = NULL,
ClientToken = NULL,
Encrypted = NULL,
KmsKeyArn = NULL,
Timeout = NULL
)
Arguments
VolumeSize |
[required] The size of the volume, in GiB. The maximum size is |
ParentSnapshotId |
The ID of the parent snapshot. If there is no parent snapshot, or if you are creating the first snapshot for an on-premises volume, omit this parameter. You can't specify ParentSnapshotId and Encrypted in the same
request. If you specify both parameters, the request fails with
The encryption status of the snapshot depends on the values that you specify for Encrypted, KmsKeyArn, and ParentSnapshotId, and whether your Amazon Web Services account is enabled for encryption by default. For more information, see Using encryption in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide. If you specify an encrypted parent snapshot, you must have permission to use the KMS key that was used to encrypt the parent snapshot. For more information, see Permissions to use Key Management Service keys in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide. |
Tags |
The tags to apply to the snapshot. |
Description |
A description for the snapshot. |
ClientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. Idempotency ensures that an API request completes only once. With an idempotent request, if the original request completes successfully. The subsequent retries with the same client token return the result from the original successful request and they have no additional effect. If you do not specify a client token, one is automatically generated by the Amazon Web Services SDK. For more information, see Idempotency for StartSnapshot API in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide. |
Encrypted |
Indicates whether to encrypt the snapshot. You can't specify Encrypted and ParentSnapshotId in the same
request. If you specify both parameters, the request fails with
The encryption status of the snapshot depends on the values that you specify for Encrypted, KmsKeyArn, and ParentSnapshotId, and whether your Amazon Web Services account is enabled for encryption by default. For more information, see Using encryption in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide. To create an encrypted snapshot, you must have permission to use the KMS key. For more information, see Permissions to use Key Management Service keys in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide. |
KmsKeyArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Key Management Service (KMS) key to be used to encrypt the snapshot. The encryption status of the snapshot depends on the values that you specify for Encrypted, KmsKeyArn, and ParentSnapshotId, and whether your Amazon Web Services account is enabled for encryption by default. For more information, see Using encryption in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide. To create an encrypted snapshot, you must have permission to use the KMS key. For more information, see Permissions to use Key Management Service keys in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide. |
Timeout |
The amount of time (in minutes) after which the snapshot is automatically cancelled if:
If no value is specified, the timeout defaults to |
Amazon Elastic File System
Description
Amazon Elastic File System (Amazon EFS) provides simple, scalable file storage for use with Amazon EC2 Linux and Mac instances in the Amazon Web Services Cloud. With Amazon EFS, storage capacity is elastic, growing and shrinking automatically as you add and remove files, so that your applications have the storage they need, when they need it. For more information, see the Amazon Elastic File System API Reference and the Amazon Elastic File System User Guide.
Usage
efs(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- efs( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_access_point | Creates an EFS access point |
create_file_system | Creates a new, empty file system |
create_mount_target | Creates a mount target for a file system |
create_replication_configuration | Creates a replication configuration to either a new or existing EFS file system |
create_tags | DEPRECATED - CreateTags is deprecated and not maintained |
delete_access_point | Deletes the specified access point |
delete_file_system | Deletes a file system, permanently severing access to its contents |
delete_file_system_policy | Deletes the FileSystemPolicy for the specified file system |
delete_mount_target | Deletes the specified mount target |
delete_replication_configuration | Deletes a replication configuration |
delete_tags | DEPRECATED - DeleteTags is deprecated and not maintained |
describe_access_points | Returns the description of a specific Amazon EFS access point if the AccessPointId is provided |
describe_account_preferences | Returns the account preferences settings for the Amazon Web Services account associated with the user making the request, in the current Amazon Web Services Region |
describe_backup_policy | Returns the backup policy for the specified EFS file system |
describe_file_system_policy | Returns the FileSystemPolicy for the specified EFS file system |
describe_file_systems | Returns the description of a specific Amazon EFS file system if either the file system CreationToken or the FileSystemId is provided |
describe_lifecycle_configuration | Returns the current LifecycleConfiguration object for the specified Amazon EFS file system |
describe_mount_targets | Returns the descriptions of all the current mount targets, or a specific mount target, for a file system |
describe_mount_target_security_groups | Returns the security groups currently in effect for a mount target |
describe_replication_configurations | Retrieves the replication configuration for a specific file system |
describe_tags | DEPRECATED - The DescribeTags action is deprecated and not maintained |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists all tags for a top-level EFS resource |
modify_mount_target_security_groups | Modifies the set of security groups in effect for a mount target |
put_account_preferences | Use this operation to set the account preference in the current Amazon Web Services Region to use long 17 character (63 bit) or short 8 character (32 bit) resource IDs for new EFS file system and mount target resources |
put_backup_policy | Updates the file system's backup policy |
put_file_system_policy | Applies an Amazon EFS FileSystemPolicy to an Amazon EFS file system |
put_lifecycle_configuration | Use this action to manage storage for your file system |
tag_resource | Creates a tag for an EFS resource |
untag_resource | Removes tags from an EFS resource |
update_file_system | Updates the throughput mode or the amount of provisioned throughput of an existing file system |
update_file_system_protection | Updates protection on the file system |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- efs()
# This operation creates a new, encrypted file system with automatic
# backups enabled, and the default generalpurpose performance mode.
svc$create_file_system(
Backup = TRUE,
CreationToken = "tokenstring",
Encrypted = TRUE,
PerformanceMode = "generalPurpose",
Tags = list(
list(
Key = "Name",
Value = "MyFileSystem"
)
)
)
## End(Not run)
Creates an EFS access point
Description
Creates an EFS access point. An access point is an application-specific view into an EFS file system that applies an operating system user and group, and a file system path, to any file system request made through the access point. The operating system user and group override any identity information provided by the NFS client. The file system path is exposed as the access point's root directory. Applications using the access point can only access data in the application's own directory and any subdirectories. To learn more, see Mounting a file system using EFS access points.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_create_access_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_create_access_point(
ClientToken,
Tags = NULL,
FileSystemId,
PosixUser = NULL,
RootDirectory = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientToken |
[required] A string of up to 64 ASCII characters that Amazon EFS uses to ensure idempotent creation. |
Tags |
Creates tags associated with the access point. Each tag is a key-value pair, each key must be unique. For more information, see Tagging Amazon Web Services resources in the Amazon Web Services General Reference Guide. |
FileSystemId |
[required] The ID of the EFS file system that the access point provides access to. |
PosixUser |
The operating system user and group applied to all file system requests made using the access point. |
RootDirectory |
Specifies the directory on the EFS file system that the access point
exposes as the root directory of your file system to NFS clients using
the access point. The clients using the access point can only access the
root directory and below. If the Amazon EFS creates a root directory only if you have provided the CreationInfo: OwnUid, OwnGID, and permissions for the directory. If you do not provide this information, Amazon EFS does not create the root directory. If the root directory does not exist, attempts to mount using the access point will fail. |
Creates a new, empty file system
Description
Creates a new, empty file system. The operation requires a creation token in the request that Amazon EFS uses to ensure idempotent creation (calling the operation with same creation token has no effect). If a file system does not currently exist that is owned by the caller's Amazon Web Services account with the specified creation token, this operation does the following:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_create_file_system/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_create_file_system(
CreationToken,
PerformanceMode = NULL,
Encrypted = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
ThroughputMode = NULL,
ProvisionedThroughputInMibps = NULL,
AvailabilityZoneName = NULL,
Backup = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
CreationToken |
[required] A string of up to 64 ASCII characters. Amazon EFS uses this to ensure idempotent creation. |
PerformanceMode |
The performance mode of the file system. We recommend Due to the higher per-operation latencies with Max I/O, we recommend using General Purpose performance mode for all file systems. Default is |
Encrypted |
A Boolean value that, if true, creates an encrypted file system. When
creating an encrypted file system, you have the option of specifying an
existing Key Management Service key (KMS key). If you don't specify a
KMS key, then the default KMS key for Amazon EFS,
|
KmsKeyId |
The ID of the KMS key that you want to use to protect the encrypted file system. This parameter is required only if you want to use a non-default KMS key. If this parameter is not specified, the default KMS key for Amazon EFS is used. You can specify a KMS key ID using the following formats:
If you use EFS accepts only symmetric KMS keys. You cannot use asymmetric KMS keys with Amazon EFS file systems. |
ThroughputMode |
Specifies the throughput mode for the file system. The mode can be
Default is |
ProvisionedThroughputInMibps |
The throughput, measured in mebibytes per second (MiBps), that you want
to provision for a file system that you're creating. Required if
|
AvailabilityZoneName |
For One Zone file systems, specify the Amazon Web Services Availability
Zone in which to create the file system. Use the format One Zone file systems are not available in all Availability Zones in Amazon Web Services Regions where Amazon EFS is available. |
Backup |
Specifies whether automatic backups are enabled on the file system that
you are creating. Set the value to Default is Backup is not available in all Amazon Web Services Regions where Amazon EFS is available. |
Tags |
Use to create one or more tags associated with the file system. Each tag
is a user-defined key-value pair. Name your file system on creation by
including a |
Creates a mount target for a file system
Description
Creates a mount target for a file system. You can then mount the file system on EC2 instances by using the mount target.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_create_mount_target/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_create_mount_target(
FileSystemId,
SubnetId,
IpAddress = NULL,
SecurityGroups = NULL
)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] The ID of the file system for which to create the mount target. |
SubnetId |
[required] The ID of the subnet to add the mount target in. For One Zone file systems, use the subnet that is associated with the file system's Availability Zone. |
IpAddress |
Valid IPv4 address within the address range of the specified subnet. |
SecurityGroups |
Up to five VPC security group IDs, of the form |
Creates a replication configuration to either a new or existing EFS file system
Description
Creates a replication configuration to either a new or existing EFS file system. For more information, see Amazon EFS replication in the Amazon EFS User Guide. The replication configuration specifies the following:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_create_replication_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_create_replication_configuration(SourceFileSystemId, Destinations)
Arguments
SourceFileSystemId |
[required] Specifies the Amazon EFS file system that you want to replicate. This file system cannot already be a source or destination file system in another replication configuration. |
Destinations |
[required] An array of destination configuration objects. Only one destination configuration object is supported. |
DEPRECATED - CreateTags is deprecated and not maintained
Description
DEPRECATED - create_tags
is deprecated and not maintained. To create tags for EFS resources, use the API action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_create_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_create_tags(FileSystemId, Tags)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] The ID of the file system whose tags you want to modify (String). This operation modifies the tags only, not the file system. |
Tags |
[required] An array of |
Deletes the specified access point
Description
Deletes the specified access point. After deletion is complete, new clients can no longer connect to the access points. Clients connected to the access point at the time of deletion will continue to function until they terminate their connection.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_delete_access_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_delete_access_point(AccessPointId)
Arguments
AccessPointId |
[required] The ID of the access point that you want to delete. |
Deletes a file system, permanently severing access to its contents
Description
Deletes a file system, permanently severing access to its contents. Upon return, the file system no longer exists and you can't access any contents of the deleted file system.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_delete_file_system/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_delete_file_system(FileSystemId)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] The ID of the file system you want to delete. |
Deletes the FileSystemPolicy for the specified file system
Description
Deletes the FileSystemPolicy
for the specified file system. The default FileSystemPolicy
goes into effect once the existing policy is deleted. For more information about the default file system policy, see Using Resource-based Policies with EFS.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_delete_file_system_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_delete_file_system_policy(FileSystemId)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] Specifies the EFS file system for which to delete the
|
Deletes the specified mount target
Description
Deletes the specified mount target.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_delete_mount_target/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_delete_mount_target(MountTargetId)
Arguments
MountTargetId |
[required] The ID of the mount target to delete (String). |
Deletes a replication configuration
Description
Deletes a replication configuration. Deleting a replication configuration ends the replication process. After a replication configuration is deleted, the destination file system becomes Writeable
and its replication overwrite protection is re-enabled. For more information, see Delete a replication configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_delete_replication_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_delete_replication_configuration(SourceFileSystemId, DeletionMode = NULL)
Arguments
SourceFileSystemId |
[required] The ID of the source file system in the replication configuration. |
DeletionMode |
When replicating across Amazon Web Services accounts or across Amazon
Web Services Regions, Amazon EFS deletes the replication configuration
from both the source and destination account or Region
( Only use the Additionally, do not use this mode for same-account, same-region replication as doing so results in a BadRequest exception error. |
DEPRECATED - DeleteTags is deprecated and not maintained
Description
DEPRECATED - delete_tags
is deprecated and not maintained. To remove tags from EFS resources, use the API action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_delete_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_delete_tags(FileSystemId, TagKeys)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] The ID of the file system whose tags you want to delete (String). |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of tag keys to delete. |
Returns the description of a specific Amazon EFS access point if the AccessPointId is provided
Description
Returns the description of a specific Amazon EFS access point if the AccessPointId
is provided. If you provide an EFS FileSystemId
, it returns descriptions of all access points for that file system. You can provide either an AccessPointId
or a FileSystemId
in the request, but not both.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_access_points/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_describe_access_points(
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
AccessPointId = NULL,
FileSystemId = NULL
)
Arguments
MaxResults |
(Optional) When retrieving all access points for a file system, you can
optionally specify the |
NextToken |
|
AccessPointId |
(Optional) Specifies an EFS access point to describe in the response;
mutually exclusive with |
FileSystemId |
(Optional) If you provide a |
Returns the account preferences settings for the Amazon Web Services account associated with the user making the request, in the current Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Returns the account preferences settings for the Amazon Web Services account associated with the user making the request, in the current Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_account_preferences/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_describe_account_preferences(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
(Optional) You can use |
MaxResults |
(Optional) When retrieving account preferences, you can optionally
specify the |
Returns the backup policy for the specified EFS file system
Description
Returns the backup policy for the specified EFS file system.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_backup_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_describe_backup_policy(FileSystemId)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] Specifies which EFS file system for which to retrieve the
|
Returns the FileSystemPolicy for the specified EFS file system
Description
Returns the FileSystemPolicy
for the specified EFS file system.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_file_system_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_describe_file_system_policy(FileSystemId)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] Specifies which EFS file system to retrieve the |
Returns the description of a specific Amazon EFS file system if either the file system CreationToken or the FileSystemId is provided
Description
Returns the description of a specific Amazon EFS file system if either the file system CreationToken
or the FileSystemId
is provided. Otherwise, it returns descriptions of all file systems owned by the caller's Amazon Web Services account in the Amazon Web Services Region of the endpoint that you're calling.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_file_systems/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_describe_file_systems(
MaxItems = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
CreationToken = NULL,
FileSystemId = NULL
)
Arguments
MaxItems |
(Optional) Specifies the maximum number of file systems to return in the response (integer). This number is automatically set to 100. The response is paginated at 100 per page if you have more than 100 file systems. |
Marker |
(Optional) Opaque pagination token returned from a previous
|
CreationToken |
(Optional) Restricts the list to the file system with this creation token (String). You specify a creation token when you create an Amazon EFS file system. |
FileSystemId |
(Optional) ID of the file system whose description you want to retrieve (String). |
Returns the current LifecycleConfiguration object for the specified Amazon EFS file system
Description
Returns the current LifecycleConfiguration
object for the specified Amazon EFS file system. Lifecycle management uses the LifecycleConfiguration
object to identify when to move files between storage classes. For a file system without a LifecycleConfiguration
object, the call returns an empty array in the response.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_lifecycle_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_describe_lifecycle_configuration(FileSystemId)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] The ID of the file system whose |
Returns the security groups currently in effect for a mount target
Description
Returns the security groups currently in effect for a mount target. This operation requires that the network interface of the mount target has been created and the lifecycle state of the mount target is not deleted
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_mount_target_security_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_describe_mount_target_security_groups(MountTargetId)
Arguments
MountTargetId |
[required] The ID of the mount target whose security groups you want to retrieve. |
Returns the descriptions of all the current mount targets, or a specific mount target, for a file system
Description
Returns the descriptions of all the current mount targets, or a specific mount target, for a file system. When requesting all of the current mount targets, the order of mount targets returned in the response is unspecified.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_mount_targets/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_describe_mount_targets(
MaxItems = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
FileSystemId = NULL,
MountTargetId = NULL,
AccessPointId = NULL
)
Arguments
MaxItems |
(Optional) Maximum number of mount targets to return in the response. Currently, this number is automatically set to 10, and other values are ignored. The response is paginated at 100 per page if you have more than 100 mount targets. |
Marker |
(Optional) Opaque pagination token returned from a previous
|
FileSystemId |
(Optional) ID of the file system whose mount targets you want to list
(String). It must be included in your request if an |
MountTargetId |
(Optional) ID of the mount target that you want to have described
(String). It must be included in your request if |
AccessPointId |
(Optional) The ID of the access point whose mount targets that you want
to list. It must be included in your request if a |
Retrieves the replication configuration for a specific file system
Description
Retrieves the replication configuration for a specific file system. If a file system is not specified, all of the replication configurations for the Amazon Web Services account in an Amazon Web Services Region are retrieved.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_replication_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_describe_replication_configurations(
FileSystemId = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
You can retrieve the replication configuration for a specific file system by providing its file system ID. For cross-account,cross-region replication, an account can only describe the replication configuration for a file system in its own Region. |
NextToken |
|
MaxResults |
(Optional) To limit the number of objects returned in a response, you
can specify the |
DEPRECATED - The DescribeTags action is deprecated and not maintained
Description
DEPRECATED - The describe_tags
action is deprecated and not maintained. To view tags associated with EFS resources, use the list_tags_for_resource
API action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_describe_tags(MaxItems = NULL, Marker = NULL, FileSystemId)
Arguments
MaxItems |
(Optional) The maximum number of file system tags to return in the response. Currently, this number is automatically set to 100, and other values are ignored. The response is paginated at 100 per page if you have more than 100 tags. |
Marker |
(Optional) An opaque pagination token returned from a previous
|
FileSystemId |
[required] The ID of the file system whose tag set you want to retrieve. |
Lists all tags for a top-level EFS resource
Description
Lists all tags for a top-level EFS resource. You must provide the ID of the resource that you want to retrieve the tags for.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceId, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceId |
[required] Specifies the EFS resource you want to retrieve tags for. You can retrieve tags for EFS file systems and access points using this API endpoint. |
MaxResults |
(Optional) Specifies the maximum number of tag objects to return in the response. The default value is 100. |
NextToken |
(Optional) You can use |
Modifies the set of security groups in effect for a mount target
Description
Modifies the set of security groups in effect for a mount target.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_modify_mount_target_security_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_modify_mount_target_security_groups(MountTargetId, SecurityGroups = NULL)
Arguments
MountTargetId |
[required] The ID of the mount target whose security groups you want to modify. |
SecurityGroups |
An array of up to five VPC security group IDs. |
Use this operation to set the account preference in the current Amazon Web Services Region to use long 17 character (63 bit) or short 8 character (32 bit) resource IDs for new EFS file system and mount target resources
Description
Use this operation to set the account preference in the current Amazon Web Services Region to use long 17 character (63 bit) or short 8 character (32 bit) resource IDs for new EFS file system and mount target resources. All existing resource IDs are not affected by any changes you make. You can set the ID preference during the opt-in period as EFS transitions to long resource IDs. For more information, see Managing Amazon EFS resource IDs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_put_account_preferences/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_put_account_preferences(ResourceIdType)
Arguments
ResourceIdType |
[required] Specifies the EFS resource ID preference to set for the user's Amazon
Web Services account, in the current Amazon Web Services Region, either
Starting in October, 2021, you will receive an error when setting the
account preference to |
Updates the file system's backup policy
Description
Updates the file system's backup policy. Use this action to start or stop automatic backups of the file system.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_put_backup_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_put_backup_policy(FileSystemId, BackupPolicy)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] Specifies which EFS file system to update the backup policy for. |
BackupPolicy |
[required] The backup policy included in the
|
Applies an Amazon EFS FileSystemPolicy to an Amazon EFS file system
Description
Applies an Amazon EFS FileSystemPolicy
to an Amazon EFS file system. A file system policy is an IAM resource-based policy and can contain multiple policy statements. A file system always has exactly one file system policy, which can be the default policy or an explicit policy set or updated using this API operation. EFS file system policies have a 20,000 character limit. When an explicit policy is set, it overrides the default policy. For more information about the default file system policy, see Default EFS file system policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_put_file_system_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_put_file_system_policy(
FileSystemId,
Policy,
BypassPolicyLockoutSafetyCheck = NULL
)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] The ID of the EFS file system that you want to create or update the
|
Policy |
[required] The |
BypassPolicyLockoutSafetyCheck |
(Optional) A boolean that specifies whether or not to bypass the
|
Use this action to manage storage for your file system
Description
Use this action to manage storage for your file system. A LifecycleConfiguration
consists of one or more LifecyclePolicy
objects that define the following:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_put_lifecycle_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_put_lifecycle_configuration(FileSystemId, LifecyclePolicies)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] The ID of the file system for which you are creating the
|
LifecyclePolicies |
[required] An array of
When using the |
Creates a tag for an EFS resource
Description
Creates a tag for an EFS resource. You can create tags for EFS file systems and access points using this API operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_tag_resource(ResourceId, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceId |
[required] The ID specifying the EFS resource that you want to create a tag for. |
Tags |
[required] An array of |
Removes tags from an EFS resource
Description
Removes tags from an EFS resource. You can remove tags from EFS file systems and access points using this API operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_untag_resource(ResourceId, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceId |
[required] Specifies the EFS resource that you want to remove tags from. |
TagKeys |
[required] The keys of the key-value tag pairs that you want to remove from the specified EFS resource. |
Updates the throughput mode or the amount of provisioned throughput of an existing file system
Description
Updates the throughput mode or the amount of provisioned throughput of an existing file system.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_update_file_system/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_update_file_system(
FileSystemId,
ThroughputMode = NULL,
ProvisionedThroughputInMibps = NULL
)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] The ID of the file system that you want to update. |
ThroughputMode |
(Optional) Updates the file system's throughput mode. If you're not
updating your throughput mode, you don't need to provide this value in
your request. If you are changing the |
ProvisionedThroughputInMibps |
(Optional) The throughput, measured in mebibytes per second (MiBps),
that you want to provision for a file system that you're creating.
Required if |
Updates protection on the file system
Description
Updates protection on the file system.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_update_file_system_protection/ for full documentation.
Usage
efs_update_file_system_protection(
FileSystemId,
ReplicationOverwriteProtection = NULL
)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] The ID of the file system to update. |
ReplicationOverwriteProtection |
The status of the file system's replication overwrite protection.
If the replication configuration is deleted, the file system's replication overwrite protection is re-enabled and the file system becomes writeable. |
FinSpace Public API
Description
The FinSpace APIs let you take actions inside the FinSpace.
Usage
finspacedata(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- finspacedata( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
associate_user_to_permission_group | Adds a user to a permission group to grant permissions for actions a user can perform in FinSpace |
create_changeset | Creates a new Changeset in a FinSpace Dataset |
create_dataset | Creates a new FinSpace Dataset |
create_data_view | Creates a Dataview for a Dataset |
create_permission_group | Creates a group of permissions for various actions that a user can perform in FinSpace |
create_user | Creates a new user in FinSpace |
delete_dataset | Deletes a FinSpace Dataset |
delete_permission_group | Deletes a permission group |
disable_user | Denies access to the FinSpace web application and API for the specified user |
disassociate_user_from_permission_group | Removes a user from a permission group |
enable_user | Allows the specified user to access the FinSpace web application and API |
get_changeset | Get information about a Changeset |
get_dataset | Returns information about a Dataset |
get_data_view | Gets information about a Dataview |
get_external_data_view_access_details | Returns the credentials to access the external Dataview from an S3 location |
get_permission_group | Retrieves the details of a specific permission group |
get_programmatic_access_credentials | Request programmatic credentials to use with FinSpace SDK |
get_user | Retrieves details for a specific user |
get_working_location | A temporary Amazon S3 location, where you can copy your files from a source location to stage or use as a scratch space in FinSpace notebook |
list_changesets | Lists the FinSpace Changesets for a Dataset |
list_datasets | Lists all of the active Datasets that a user has access to |
list_data_views | Lists all available Dataviews for a Dataset |
list_permission_groups | Lists all available permission groups in FinSpace |
list_permission_groups_by_user | Lists all the permission groups that are associated with a specific user |
list_users | Lists all available users in FinSpace |
list_users_by_permission_group | Lists details of all the users in a specific permission group |
reset_user_password | Resets the password for a specified user ID and generates a temporary one |
update_changeset | Updates a FinSpace Changeset |
update_dataset | Updates a FinSpace Dataset |
update_permission_group | Modifies the details of a permission group |
update_user | Modifies the details of the specified user |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- finspacedata()
svc$associate_user_to_permission_group(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Adds a user to a permission group to grant permissions for actions a user can perform in FinSpace
Description
Adds a user to a permission group to grant permissions for actions a user can perform in FinSpace.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_associate_user_to_permission_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_associate_user_to_permission_group(
permissionGroupId,
userId,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
permissionGroupId |
[required] The unique identifier for the permission group. |
userId |
[required] The unique identifier for the user. |
clientToken |
A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes. |
Creates a new Changeset in a FinSpace Dataset
Description
Creates a new Changeset in a FinSpace Dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_create_changeset/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_create_changeset(
clientToken = NULL,
datasetId,
changeType,
sourceParams,
formatParams
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes. |
datasetId |
[required] The unique identifier for the FinSpace Dataset where the Changeset will be created. |
changeType |
[required] The option to indicate how a Changeset will be applied to a Dataset.
|
sourceParams |
[required] Options that define the location of the data being ingested
( Both Here is an example of how you could specify the
The S3 path that you specify must allow the FinSpace role access. To do that, you first need to configure the IAM policy on S3 bucket. For more information, see Loading data from an Amazon S3 Bucket using the FinSpace API section. |
formatParams |
[required] Options that define the structure of the source file(s) including the
format type (
Here is an example of how you could specify the
Note that if you only provide
For more information about supported file formats, see Supported Data Types and File Formats in the FinSpace User Guide. |
Creates a Dataview for a Dataset
Description
Creates a Dataview for a Dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_create_data_view/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_create_data_view(
clientToken = NULL,
datasetId,
autoUpdate = NULL,
sortColumns = NULL,
partitionColumns = NULL,
asOfTimestamp = NULL,
destinationTypeParams
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes. |
datasetId |
[required] The unique Dataset identifier that is used to create a Dataview. |
autoUpdate |
Flag to indicate Dataview should be updated automatically. |
sortColumns |
Columns to be used for sorting the data. |
partitionColumns |
Ordered set of column names used to partition data. |
asOfTimestamp |
Beginning time to use for the Dataview. The value is determined as epoch time in milliseconds. For example, the value for Monday, November 1, 2021 12:00:00 PM UTC is specified as 1635768000000. |
destinationTypeParams |
[required] Options that define the destination type for the Dataview. |
Creates a new FinSpace Dataset
Description
Creates a new FinSpace Dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_create_dataset/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_create_dataset(
clientToken = NULL,
datasetTitle,
kind,
datasetDescription = NULL,
ownerInfo = NULL,
permissionGroupParams,
alias = NULL,
schemaDefinition = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes. |
datasetTitle |
[required] Display title for a FinSpace Dataset. |
kind |
[required] The format in which Dataset data is structured.
|
datasetDescription |
Description of a Dataset. |
ownerInfo |
Contact information for a Dataset owner. |
permissionGroupParams |
[required] Permission group parameters for Dataset permissions. |
alias |
The unique resource identifier for a Dataset. |
schemaDefinition |
Definition for a schema on a tabular Dataset. |
Creates a group of permissions for various actions that a user can perform in FinSpace
Description
Creates a group of permissions for various actions that a user can perform in FinSpace.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_create_permission_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_create_permission_group(
name,
description = NULL,
applicationPermissions,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
[required] The name of the permission group. |
description |
A brief description for the permission group. |
applicationPermissions |
[required] The option to indicate FinSpace application permissions that are granted to a specific group. When assigning application permissions, be aware that the permission
|
clientToken |
A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes. |
Creates a new user in FinSpace
Description
Creates a new user in FinSpace.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_create_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_create_user(
emailAddress,
type,
firstName = NULL,
lastName = NULL,
apiAccess = NULL,
apiAccessPrincipalArn = NULL,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
emailAddress |
[required] The email address of the user that you want to register. The email address serves as a uniquer identifier for each user and cannot be changed after it's created. |
type |
[required] The option to indicate the type of user. Use one of the following options to specify this parameter:
|
firstName |
The first name of the user that you want to register. |
lastName |
The last name of the user that you want to register. |
apiAccess |
The option to indicate whether the user can use the
|
apiAccessPrincipalArn |
The ARN identifier of an AWS user or role that is allowed to call the
|
clientToken |
A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes. |
Deletes a FinSpace Dataset
Description
Deletes a FinSpace Dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_delete_dataset/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_delete_dataset(clientToken = NULL, datasetId)
Arguments
clientToken |
A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes. |
datasetId |
[required] The unique identifier of the Dataset to be deleted. |
Deletes a permission group
Description
Deletes a permission group. This action is irreversible.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_delete_permission_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_delete_permission_group(permissionGroupId, clientToken = NULL)
Arguments
permissionGroupId |
[required] The unique identifier for the permission group that you want to delete. |
clientToken |
A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes. |
Denies access to the FinSpace web application and API for the specified user
Description
Denies access to the FinSpace web application and API for the specified user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_disable_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_disable_user(userId, clientToken = NULL)
Arguments
userId |
[required] The unique identifier for the user that you want to deactivate. |
clientToken |
A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes. |
Removes a user from a permission group
Description
Removes a user from a permission group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_disassociate_user_from_permission_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_disassociate_user_from_permission_group(
permissionGroupId,
userId,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
permissionGroupId |
[required] The unique identifier for the permission group. |
userId |
[required] The unique identifier for the user. |
clientToken |
A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes. |
Allows the specified user to access the FinSpace web application and API
Description
Allows the specified user to access the FinSpace web application and API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_enable_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_enable_user(userId, clientToken = NULL)
Arguments
userId |
[required] The unique identifier for the user that you want to activate. |
clientToken |
A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes. |
Get information about a Changeset
Description
Get information about a Changeset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_get_changeset/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_get_changeset(datasetId, changesetId)
Arguments
datasetId |
[required] The unique identifier for the FinSpace Dataset where the Changeset is created. |
changesetId |
[required] The unique identifier of the Changeset for which to get data. |
Gets information about a Dataview
Description
Gets information about a Dataview.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_get_data_view/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_get_data_view(dataViewId, datasetId)
Arguments
dataViewId |
[required] The unique identifier for the Dataview. |
datasetId |
[required] The unique identifier for the Dataset used in the Dataview. |
Returns information about a Dataset
Description
Returns information about a Dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_get_dataset/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_get_dataset(datasetId)
Arguments
datasetId |
[required] The unique identifier for a Dataset. |
Returns the credentials to access the external Dataview from an S3 location
Description
Returns the credentials to access the external Dataview from an S3 location. To call this API:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_get_external_data_view_access_details/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_get_external_data_view_access_details(dataViewId, datasetId)
Arguments
dataViewId |
[required] The unique identifier for the Dataview that you want to access. |
datasetId |
[required] The unique identifier for the Dataset. |
Retrieves the details of a specific permission group
Description
Retrieves the details of a specific permission group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_get_permission_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_get_permission_group(permissionGroupId)
Arguments
permissionGroupId |
[required] The unique identifier for the permission group. |
Request programmatic credentials to use with FinSpace SDK
Description
Request programmatic credentials to use with FinSpace SDK. For more information, see Step 2. Access credentials programmatically using IAM access key id and secret access key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_get_programmatic_access_credentials/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_get_programmatic_access_credentials(
durationInMinutes = NULL,
environmentId
)
Arguments
durationInMinutes |
The time duration in which the credentials remain valid. |
environmentId |
[required] The FinSpace environment identifier. |
Retrieves details for a specific user
Description
Retrieves details for a specific user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_get_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_get_user(userId)
Arguments
userId |
[required] The unique identifier of the user to get data for. |
A temporary Amazon S3 location, where you can copy your files from a source location to stage or use as a scratch space in FinSpace notebook
Description
A temporary Amazon S3 location, where you can copy your files from a source location to stage or use as a scratch space in FinSpace notebook.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_get_working_location/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_get_working_location(locationType = NULL)
Arguments
locationType |
Specify the type of the working location.
|
Lists the FinSpace Changesets for a Dataset
Description
Lists the FinSpace Changesets for a Dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_list_changesets/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_list_changesets(datasetId, maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
datasetId |
[required] The unique identifier for the FinSpace Dataset to which the Changeset belongs. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results per page. |
nextToken |
A token that indicates where a results page should begin. |
Lists all available Dataviews for a Dataset
Description
Lists all available Dataviews for a Dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_list_data_views/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_list_data_views(datasetId, nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)
Arguments
datasetId |
[required] The unique identifier of the Dataset for which to retrieve Dataviews. |
nextToken |
A token that indicates where a results page should begin. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results per page. |
Lists all of the active Datasets that a user has access to
Description
Lists all of the active Datasets that a user has access to.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_list_datasets/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_list_datasets(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)
Arguments
nextToken |
A token that indicates where a results page should begin. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of results per page. |
Lists all available permission groups in FinSpace
Description
Lists all available permission groups in FinSpace.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_list_permission_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_list_permission_groups(nextToken = NULL, maxResults)
Arguments
nextToken |
A token that indicates where a results page should begin. |
maxResults |
[required] The maximum number of results per page. |
Lists all the permission groups that are associated with a specific user
Description
Lists all the permission groups that are associated with a specific user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_list_permission_groups_by_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_list_permission_groups_by_user(
userId,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults
)
Arguments
userId |
[required] The unique identifier for the user. |
nextToken |
A token that indicates where a results page should begin. |
maxResults |
[required] The maximum number of results per page. |
Lists all available users in FinSpace
Description
Lists all available users in FinSpace.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_list_users/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_list_users(nextToken = NULL, maxResults)
Arguments
nextToken |
A token that indicates where a results page should begin. |
maxResults |
[required] The maximum number of results per page. |
Lists details of all the users in a specific permission group
Description
Lists details of all the users in a specific permission group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_list_users_by_permission_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_list_users_by_permission_group(
permissionGroupId,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults
)
Arguments
permissionGroupId |
[required] The unique identifier for the permission group. |
nextToken |
A token that indicates where a results page should begin. |
maxResults |
[required] The maximum number of results per page. |
Resets the password for a specified user ID and generates a temporary one
Description
Resets the password for a specified user ID and generates a temporary one. Only a superuser can reset password for other users. Resetting the password immediately invalidates the previous password associated with the user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_reset_user_password/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_reset_user_password(userId, clientToken = NULL)
Arguments
userId |
[required] The unique identifier of the user that a temporary password is requested for. |
clientToken |
A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes. |
Updates a FinSpace Changeset
Description
Updates a FinSpace Changeset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_update_changeset/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_update_changeset(
clientToken = NULL,
datasetId,
changesetId,
sourceParams,
formatParams
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes. |
datasetId |
[required] The unique identifier for the FinSpace Dataset in which the Changeset is created. |
changesetId |
[required] The unique identifier for the Changeset to update. |
sourceParams |
[required] Options that define the location of the data being ingested
( Both Here is an example of how you could specify the
The S3 path that you specify must allow the FinSpace role access. To do that, you first need to configure the IAM policy on S3 bucket. For more information, see Loading data from an Amazon S3 Bucket using the FinSpace APIsection. |
formatParams |
[required] Options that define the structure of the source file(s) including the
format type (
Here is an example of how you could specify the
Note that if you only provide
For more information about supported file formats, see Supported Data Types and File Formats in the FinSpace User Guide. |
Updates a FinSpace Dataset
Description
Updates a FinSpace Dataset.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_update_dataset/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_update_dataset(
clientToken = NULL,
datasetId,
datasetTitle,
kind,
datasetDescription = NULL,
alias = NULL,
schemaDefinition = NULL
)
Arguments
clientToken |
A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes. |
datasetId |
[required] The unique identifier for the Dataset to update. |
datasetTitle |
[required] A display title for the Dataset. |
kind |
[required] The format in which the Dataset data is structured.
|
datasetDescription |
A description for the Dataset. |
alias |
The unique resource identifier for a Dataset. |
schemaDefinition |
Definition for a schema on a tabular Dataset. |
Modifies the details of a permission group
Description
Modifies the details of a permission group. You cannot modify a permissionGroupID
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_update_permission_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_update_permission_group(
permissionGroupId,
name = NULL,
description = NULL,
applicationPermissions = NULL,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
permissionGroupId |
[required] The unique identifier for the permission group to update. |
name |
The name of the permission group. |
description |
A brief description for the permission group. |
applicationPermissions |
The permissions that are granted to a specific group for accessing the FinSpace application. When assigning application permissions, be aware that the permission
|
clientToken |
A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes. |
Modifies the details of the specified user
Description
Modifies the details of the specified user. You cannot update the userId
for a user.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_update_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
finspacedata_update_user(
userId,
type = NULL,
firstName = NULL,
lastName = NULL,
apiAccess = NULL,
apiAccessPrincipalArn = NULL,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
userId |
[required] The unique identifier for the user that you want to update. |
type |
The option to indicate the type of user.
|
firstName |
The first name of the user. |
lastName |
The last name of the user. |
apiAccess |
The option to indicate whether the user can use the
|
apiAccessPrincipalArn |
The ARN identifier of an AWS user or role that is allowed to call the
|
clientToken |
A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes. |
Amazon FSx
Description
Amazon FSx is a fully managed service that makes it easy for storage and application administrators to launch and use shared file storage.
Usage
fsx(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- fsx( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
associate_file_system_aliases | Use this action to associate one or more Domain Name Server (DNS) aliases with an existing Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system |
cancel_data_repository_task | Cancels an existing Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository task if that task is in either the PENDING or EXECUTING state |
copy_backup | Copies an existing backup within the same Amazon Web Services account to another Amazon Web Services Region (cross-Region copy) or within the same Amazon Web Services Region (in-Region copy) |
copy_snapshot_and_update_volume | Updates an existing volume by using a snapshot from another Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system |
create_backup | Creates a backup of an existing Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system, Amazon FSx for Lustre file system, Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP volume, or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system |
create_data_repository_association | Creates an Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository association (DRA) |
create_data_repository_task | Creates an Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository task |
create_file_cache | Creates a new Amazon File Cache resource |
create_file_system | Creates a new, empty Amazon FSx file system |
create_file_system_from_backup | Creates a new Amazon FSx for Lustre, Amazon FSx for Windows File Server, or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system from an existing Amazon FSx backup |
create_snapshot | Creates a snapshot of an existing Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume |
create_storage_virtual_machine | Creates a storage virtual machine (SVM) for an Amazon FSx for ONTAP file system |
create_volume | Creates an FSx for ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS storage volume |
create_volume_from_backup | Creates a new Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP volume from an existing Amazon FSx volume backup |
delete_backup | Deletes an Amazon FSx backup |
delete_data_repository_association | Deletes a data repository association on an Amazon FSx for Lustre file system |
delete_file_cache | Deletes an Amazon File Cache resource |
delete_file_system | Deletes a file system |
delete_snapshot | Deletes an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshot |
delete_storage_virtual_machine | Deletes an existing Amazon FSx for ONTAP storage virtual machine (SVM) |
delete_volume | Deletes an Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume |
describe_backups | Returns the description of a specific Amazon FSx backup, if a BackupIds value is provided for that backup |
describe_data_repository_associations | Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for Lustre or Amazon File Cache data repository associations, if one or more AssociationIds values are provided in the request, or if filters are used in the request |
describe_data_repository_tasks | Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for Lustre or Amazon File Cache data repository tasks, if one or more TaskIds values are provided in the request, or if filters are used in the request |
describe_file_caches | Returns the description of a specific Amazon File Cache resource, if a FileCacheIds value is provided for that cache |
describe_file_system_aliases | Returns the DNS aliases that are associated with the specified Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system |
describe_file_systems | Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx file systems, if a FileSystemIds value is provided for that file system |
describe_shared_vpc_configuration | Indicates whether participant accounts in your organization can create Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP Multi-AZ file systems in subnets that are shared by a virtual private cloud (VPC) owner |
describe_snapshots | Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshots, if a SnapshotIds value is provided |
describe_storage_virtual_machines | Describes one or more Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP storage virtual machines (SVMs) |
describe_volumes | Describes one or more Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volumes |
disassociate_file_system_aliases | Use this action to disassociate, or remove, one or more Domain Name Service (DNS) aliases from an Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists tags for Amazon FSx resources |
release_file_system_nfs_v3_locks | Releases the file system lock from an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system |
restore_volume_from_snapshot | Returns an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume to the state saved by the specified snapshot |
start_misconfigured_state_recovery | After performing steps to repair the Active Directory configuration of an FSx for Windows File Server file system, use this action to initiate the process of Amazon FSx attempting to reconnect to the file system |
tag_resource | Tags an Amazon FSx resource |
untag_resource | This action removes a tag from an Amazon FSx resource |
update_data_repository_association | Updates the configuration of an existing data repository association on an Amazon FSx for Lustre file system |
update_file_cache | Updates the configuration of an existing Amazon File Cache resource |
update_file_system | Use this operation to update the configuration of an existing Amazon FSx file system |
update_shared_vpc_configuration | Configures whether participant accounts in your organization can create Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP Multi-AZ file systems in subnets that are shared by a virtual private cloud (VPC) owner |
update_snapshot | Updates the name of an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshot |
update_storage_virtual_machine | Updates an FSx for ONTAP storage virtual machine (SVM) |
update_volume | Updates the configuration of an Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- fsx()
# This operation copies an Amazon FSx backup.
svc$copy_backup(
SourceBackupId = "backup-03e3c82e0183b7b6b",
SourceRegion = "us-east-2"
)
## End(Not run)
Use this action to associate one or more Domain Name Server (DNS) aliases with an existing Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system
Description
Use this action to associate one or more Domain Name Server (DNS) aliases with an existing Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system. A file system can have a maximum of 50 DNS aliases associated with it at any one time. If you try to associate a DNS alias that is already associated with the file system, FSx takes no action on that alias in the request. For more information, see Working with DNS Aliases and Walkthrough 5: Using DNS aliases to access your file system, including additional steps you must take to be able to access your file system using a DNS alias.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_associate_file_system_aliases/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_associate_file_system_aliases(
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
FileSystemId,
Aliases
)
Arguments
ClientRequestToken |
|
FileSystemId |
[required] Specifies the file system with which you want to associate one or more DNS aliases. |
Aliases |
[required] An array of one or more DNS alias names to associate with the file system. The alias name has to comply with the following formatting requirements:
For DNS alias names, Amazon FSx stores alphabetic characters as lowercase letters (a-z), regardless of how you specify them: as uppercase letters, lowercase letters, or the corresponding letters in escape codes. |
Cancels an existing Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository task if that task is in either the PENDING or EXECUTING state
Description
Cancels an existing Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository task if that task is in either the PENDING
or EXECUTING
state. When you cancel an export task, Amazon FSx does the following.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_cancel_data_repository_task/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_cancel_data_repository_task(TaskId)
Arguments
TaskId |
[required] Specifies the data repository task to cancel. |
Copies an existing backup within the same Amazon Web Services account to another Amazon Web Services Region (cross-Region copy) or within the same Amazon Web Services Region (in-Region copy)
Description
Copies an existing backup within the same Amazon Web Services account to another Amazon Web Services Region (cross-Region copy) or within the same Amazon Web Services Region (in-Region copy). You can have up to five backup copy requests in progress to a single destination Region per account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_copy_backup/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_copy_backup(
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
SourceBackupId,
SourceRegion = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
CopyTags = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientRequestToken |
|
SourceBackupId |
[required] The ID of the source backup. Specifies the ID of the backup that's being copied. |
SourceRegion |
The source Amazon Web Services Region of the backup. Specifies the
Amazon Web Services Region from which the backup is being copied. The
source and destination Regions must be in the same Amazon Web Services
partition. If you don't specify a Region, |
KmsKeyId |
|
CopyTags |
A Boolean flag indicating whether tags from the source backup should be
copied to the backup copy. This value defaults to If you set |
Tags |
Updates an existing volume by using a snapshot from another Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system
Description
Updates an existing volume by using a snapshot from another Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system. For more information, see on-demand data replication in the Amazon FSx for OpenZFS User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_copy_snapshot_and_update_volume/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_copy_snapshot_and_update_volume(
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
VolumeId,
SourceSnapshotARN,
CopyStrategy = NULL,
Options = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientRequestToken |
|
VolumeId |
[required] Specifies the ID of the volume that you are copying the snapshot to. |
SourceSnapshotARN |
[required] |
CopyStrategy |
Specifies the strategy to use when copying data from a snapshot to the volume.
|
Options |
Confirms that you want to delete data on the destination volume that wasn’t there during the previous snapshot replication. Your replication will fail if you don’t include an option for a specific
type of data and that data is on your destination. For example, if you
don’t include
|
Creates a backup of an existing Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system, Amazon FSx for Lustre file system, Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP volume, or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system
Description
Creates a backup of an existing Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system, Amazon FSx for Lustre file system, Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP volume, or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system. We recommend creating regular backups so that you can restore a file system or volume from a backup if an issue arises with the original file system or volume.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_backup/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_create_backup(
FileSystemId = NULL,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
VolumeId = NULL
)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
The ID of the file system to back up. |
ClientRequestToken |
(Optional) A string of up to 63 ASCII characters that Amazon FSx uses to ensure idempotent creation. This string is automatically filled on your behalf when you use the Command Line Interface (CLI) or an Amazon Web Services SDK. |
Tags |
(Optional) The tags to apply to the backup at backup creation. The key
value of the |
VolumeId |
(Optional) The ID of the FSx for ONTAP volume to back up. |
Creates an Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository association (DRA)
Description
Creates an Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository association (DRA). A data repository association is a link between a directory on the file system and an Amazon S3 bucket or prefix. You can have a maximum of 8 data repository associations on a file system. Data repository associations are supported on all FSx for Lustre 2.12 and 2.15 file systems, excluding scratch_1
deployment type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_data_repository_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_create_data_repository_association(
FileSystemId,
FileSystemPath = NULL,
DataRepositoryPath,
BatchImportMetaDataOnCreate = NULL,
ImportedFileChunkSize = NULL,
S3 = NULL,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] |
FileSystemPath |
A path on the file system that points to a high-level directory (such as
This path specifies where in your file system files will be exported from or imported to. This file system directory can be linked to only one Amazon S3 bucket, and no other S3 bucket can be linked to the directory. If you specify only a forward slash ( |
DataRepositoryPath |
[required] The path to the Amazon S3 data repository that will be linked to the
file system. The path can be an S3 bucket or prefix in the format
|
BatchImportMetaDataOnCreate |
Set to |
ImportedFileChunkSize |
For files imported from a data repository, this value determines the stripe count and maximum amount of data per file (in MiB) stored on a single physical disk. The maximum number of disks that a single file can be striped across is limited by the total number of disks that make up the file system. The default chunk size is 1,024 MiB (1 GiB) and can go as high as 512,000 MiB (500 GiB). Amazon S3 objects have a maximum size of 5 TB. |
S3 |
The configuration for an Amazon S3 data repository linked to an Amazon FSx Lustre file system with a data repository association. The configuration defines which file events (new, changed, or deleted files or directories) are automatically imported from the linked data repository to the file system or automatically exported from the file system to the data repository. |
ClientRequestToken |
|
Tags |
Creates an Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository task
Description
Creates an Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository task. A create_data_repository_task
operation will fail if a data repository is not linked to the FSx file system.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_data_repository_task/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_create_data_repository_task(
Type,
Paths = NULL,
FileSystemId,
Report,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
CapacityToRelease = NULL,
ReleaseConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
Type |
[required] Specifies the type of data repository task to create.
|
Paths |
A list of paths for the data repository task to use when the task is processed. If a path that you provide isn't valid, the task fails. If you don't provide paths, the default behavior is to export all files to S3 (for export tasks), import all files from S3 (for import tasks), or release all exported files that meet the last accessed time criteria (for release tasks).
|
FileSystemId |
[required] |
Report |
[required] Defines whether or not Amazon FSx provides a CompletionReport once the
task has completed. A CompletionReport provides a detailed report on the
files that Amazon FSx processed that meet the criteria specified by the
|
ClientRequestToken |
|
Tags |
|
CapacityToRelease |
Specifies the amount of data to release, in GiB, by an Amazon File Cache
|
ReleaseConfiguration |
The configuration that specifies the last accessed time criteria for files that will be released from an Amazon FSx for Lustre file system. |
Creates a new Amazon File Cache resource
Description
Creates a new Amazon File Cache resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_file_cache/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_create_file_cache(
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
FileCacheType,
FileCacheTypeVersion,
StorageCapacity,
SubnetIds,
SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
CopyTagsToDataRepositoryAssociations = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
LustreConfiguration = NULL,
DataRepositoryAssociations = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientRequestToken |
An idempotency token for resource creation, in a string of up to 63 ASCII characters. This token is automatically filled on your behalf when you use the Command Line Interface (CLI) or an Amazon Web Services SDK. By using the idempotent operation, you can retry a
|
FileCacheType |
[required] The type of cache that you're creating, which must be |
FileCacheTypeVersion |
[required] Sets the Lustre version for the cache that you're creating, which must
be |
StorageCapacity |
[required] The storage capacity of the cache in gibibytes (GiB). Valid values are 1200 GiB, 2400 GiB, and increments of 2400 GiB. |
SubnetIds |
[required] |
SecurityGroupIds |
A list of IDs specifying the security groups to apply to all network interfaces created for Amazon File Cache access. This list isn't returned in later requests to describe the cache. |
Tags |
|
CopyTagsToDataRepositoryAssociations |
A boolean flag indicating whether tags for the cache should be copied to data repository associations. This value defaults to false. |
KmsKeyId |
Specifies the ID of the Key Management Service (KMS) key to use for
encrypting data on an Amazon File Cache. If a |
LustreConfiguration |
The configuration for the Amazon File Cache resource being created. |
DataRepositoryAssociations |
A list of up to 8 configurations for data repository associations (DRAs) to be created during the cache creation. The DRAs link the cache to either an Amazon S3 data repository or a Network File System (NFS) data repository that supports the NFSv3 protocol. The DRA configurations must meet the following requirements:
DRA automatic import and automatic export is not supported. |
Creates a new, empty Amazon FSx file system
Description
Creates a new, empty Amazon FSx file system. You can create the following supported Amazon FSx file systems using the create_file_system
API operation:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_file_system/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_create_file_system(
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
FileSystemType,
StorageCapacity = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
SubnetIds,
SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
WindowsConfiguration = NULL,
LustreConfiguration = NULL,
OntapConfiguration = NULL,
FileSystemTypeVersion = NULL,
OpenZFSConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientRequestToken |
A string of up to 63 ASCII characters that Amazon FSx uses to ensure idempotent creation. This string is automatically filled on your behalf when you use the Command Line Interface (CLI) or an Amazon Web Services SDK. |
FileSystemType |
[required] The type of Amazon FSx file system to create. Valid values are
|
StorageCapacity |
Sets the storage capacity of the file system that you're creating, in gibibytes (GiB). FSx for Lustre file systems - The amount of storage capacity that
you can configure depends on the value that you set for
FSx for ONTAP file systems - The amount of storage capacity that you
can configure depends on the value of the FSx for OpenZFS file systems - The amount of storage capacity that you can configure is from 64 GiB up to 524,288 GiB (512 TiB). FSx for Windows File Server file systems - The amount of storage
capacity that you can configure depends on the value that you set for
|
StorageType |
Sets the storage class for the file system that you're creating. Valid
values are
Default value is |
SubnetIds |
[required] Specifies the IDs of the subnets that the file system will be accessible
from. For Windows and ONTAP For Windows |
SecurityGroupIds |
A list of IDs specifying the security groups to apply to all network interfaces created for file system access. This list isn't returned in later requests to describe the file system. You must specify a security group if you are creating a Multi-AZ FSx for ONTAP file system in a VPC subnet that has been shared with you. |
Tags |
The tags to apply to the file system that's being created. The key value
of the |
KmsKeyId |
|
WindowsConfiguration |
The Microsoft Windows configuration for the file system that's being created. |
LustreConfiguration |
|
OntapConfiguration |
|
FileSystemTypeVersion |
For FSx for Lustre file systems, sets the Lustre version for the file
system that you're creating. Valid values are
Default value is
|
OpenZFSConfiguration |
The OpenZFS configuration for the file system that's being created. |
Creates a new Amazon FSx for Lustre, Amazon FSx for Windows File Server, or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system from an existing Amazon FSx backup
Description
Creates a new Amazon FSx for Lustre, Amazon FSx for Windows File Server, or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system from an existing Amazon FSx backup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_file_system_from_backup/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_create_file_system_from_backup(
BackupId,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
SubnetIds,
SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
WindowsConfiguration = NULL,
LustreConfiguration = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
FileSystemTypeVersion = NULL,
OpenZFSConfiguration = NULL,
StorageCapacity = NULL
)
Arguments
BackupId |
[required] |
ClientRequestToken |
A string of up to 63 ASCII characters that Amazon FSx uses to ensure idempotent creation. This string is automatically filled on your behalf when you use the Command Line Interface (CLI) or an Amazon Web Services SDK. |
SubnetIds |
[required] Specifies the IDs of the subnets that the file system will be accessible
from. For Windows Windows |
SecurityGroupIds |
A list of IDs for the security groups that apply to the specified
network interfaces created for file system access. These security groups
apply to all network interfaces. This value isn't returned in later
|
Tags |
The tags to be applied to the file system at file system creation. The
key value of the |
WindowsConfiguration |
The configuration for this Microsoft Windows file system. |
LustreConfiguration |
|
StorageType |
Sets the storage type for the Windows or OpenZFS file system that you're
creating from a backup. Valid values are
The default value is HDD and SSD storage types have different minimum storage capacity requirements. A restored file system's storage capacity is tied to the file system that was backed up. You can create a file system that uses HDD storage from a backup of a file system that used SSD storage if the original SSD file system had a storage capacity of at least 2000 GiB. |
KmsKeyId |
|
FileSystemTypeVersion |
Sets the version for the Amazon FSx for Lustre file system that you're
creating from a backup. Valid values are You can enter a Lustre version that is newer than the backup's
|
OpenZFSConfiguration |
The OpenZFS configuration for the file system that's being created. |
StorageCapacity |
Sets the storage capacity of the OpenZFS file system that you're
creating from a backup, in gibibytes (GiB). Valid values are from 64 GiB
up to 524,288 GiB (512 TiB). However, the value that you specify must be
equal to or greater than the backup's storage capacity value. If you
don't use the If used to create a file system other than OpenZFS, you must provide a
value that matches the backup's |
Creates a snapshot of an existing Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume
Description
Creates a snapshot of an existing Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume. With snapshots, you can easily undo file changes and compare file versions by restoring the volume to a previous version.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_create_snapshot(ClientRequestToken = NULL, Name, VolumeId, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
ClientRequestToken |
|
Name |
[required] The name of the snapshot. |
VolumeId |
[required] The ID of the volume that you are taking a snapshot of. |
Tags |
Creates a storage virtual machine (SVM) for an Amazon FSx for ONTAP file system
Description
Creates a storage virtual machine (SVM) for an Amazon FSx for ONTAP file system.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_storage_virtual_machine/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_create_storage_virtual_machine(
ActiveDirectoryConfiguration = NULL,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
FileSystemId,
Name,
SvmAdminPassword = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
RootVolumeSecurityStyle = NULL
)
Arguments
ActiveDirectoryConfiguration |
Describes the self-managed Microsoft Active Directory to which you want to join the SVM. Joining an Active Directory provides user authentication and access control for SMB clients, including Microsoft Windows and macOS clients accessing the file system. |
ClientRequestToken |
|
FileSystemId |
[required] |
Name |
[required] The name of the SVM. |
SvmAdminPassword |
The password to use when managing the SVM using the NetApp ONTAP CLI or
REST API. If you do not specify a password, you can still use the file
system's |
Tags |
|
RootVolumeSecurityStyle |
The security style of the root volume of the SVM. Specify one of the following values:
|
Creates an FSx for ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS storage volume
Description
Creates an FSx for ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS storage volume.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_volume/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_create_volume(
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
VolumeType,
Name,
OntapConfiguration = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
OpenZFSConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientRequestToken |
|
VolumeType |
[required] Specifies the type of volume to create; |
Name |
[required] Specifies the name of the volume that you're creating. |
OntapConfiguration |
Specifies the configuration to use when creating the ONTAP volume. |
Tags |
|
OpenZFSConfiguration |
Specifies the configuration to use when creating the OpenZFS volume. |
Creates a new Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP volume from an existing Amazon FSx volume backup
Description
Creates a new Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP volume from an existing Amazon FSx volume backup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_volume_from_backup/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_create_volume_from_backup(
BackupId,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
Name,
OntapConfiguration = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
BackupId |
[required] |
ClientRequestToken |
|
Name |
[required] The name of the new volume you're creating. |
OntapConfiguration |
Specifies the configuration of the ONTAP volume that you are creating. |
Tags |
Deletes an Amazon FSx backup
Description
Deletes an Amazon FSx backup. After deletion, the backup no longer exists, and its data is gone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_delete_backup/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_delete_backup(BackupId, ClientRequestToken = NULL)
Arguments
BackupId |
[required] The ID of the backup that you want to delete. |
ClientRequestToken |
A string of up to 63 ASCII characters that Amazon FSx uses to ensure idempotent deletion. This parameter is automatically filled on your behalf when using the CLI or SDK. |
Deletes a data repository association on an Amazon FSx for Lustre file system
Description
Deletes a data repository association on an Amazon FSx for Lustre file system. Deleting the data repository association unlinks the file system from the Amazon S3 bucket. When deleting a data repository association, you have the option of deleting the data in the file system that corresponds to the data repository association. Data repository associations are supported on all FSx for Lustre 2.12 and 2.15 file systems, excluding scratch_1
deployment type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_delete_data_repository_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_delete_data_repository_association(
AssociationId,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
DeleteDataInFileSystem = NULL
)
Arguments
AssociationId |
[required] The ID of the data repository association that you want to delete. |
ClientRequestToken |
|
DeleteDataInFileSystem |
Set to |
Deletes an Amazon File Cache resource
Description
Deletes an Amazon File Cache resource. After deletion, the cache no longer exists, and its data is gone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_delete_file_cache/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_delete_file_cache(FileCacheId, ClientRequestToken = NULL)
Arguments
FileCacheId |
[required] The ID of the cache that's being deleted. |
ClientRequestToken |
Deletes a file system
Description
Deletes a file system. After deletion, the file system no longer exists, and its data is gone. Any existing automatic backups and snapshots are also deleted.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_delete_file_system/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_delete_file_system(
FileSystemId,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
WindowsConfiguration = NULL,
LustreConfiguration = NULL,
OpenZFSConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] The ID of the file system that you want to delete. |
ClientRequestToken |
A string of up to 63 ASCII characters that Amazon FSx uses to ensure idempotent deletion. This token is automatically filled on your behalf when using the Command Line Interface (CLI) or an Amazon Web Services SDK. |
WindowsConfiguration |
|
LustreConfiguration |
|
OpenZFSConfiguration |
The configuration object for the OpenZFS file system used in the
|
Deletes an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshot
Description
Deletes an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshot. After deletion, the snapshot no longer exists, and its data is gone. Deleting a snapshot doesn't affect snapshots stored in a file system backup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_delete_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_delete_snapshot(ClientRequestToken = NULL, SnapshotId)
Arguments
ClientRequestToken |
|
SnapshotId |
[required] The ID of the snapshot that you want to delete. |
Deletes an existing Amazon FSx for ONTAP storage virtual machine (SVM)
Description
Deletes an existing Amazon FSx for ONTAP storage virtual machine (SVM). Prior to deleting an SVM, you must delete all non-root volumes in the SVM, otherwise the operation will fail.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_delete_storage_virtual_machine/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_delete_storage_virtual_machine(
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
StorageVirtualMachineId
)
Arguments
ClientRequestToken |
|
StorageVirtualMachineId |
[required] The ID of the SVM that you want to delete. |
Deletes an Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume
Description
Deletes an Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_delete_volume/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_delete_volume(
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
VolumeId,
OntapConfiguration = NULL,
OpenZFSConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientRequestToken |
|
VolumeId |
[required] The ID of the volume that you are deleting. |
OntapConfiguration |
For Amazon FSx for ONTAP volumes, specify whether to take a final backup
of the volume and apply tags to the backup. To apply tags to the backup,
you must have the |
OpenZFSConfiguration |
For Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volumes, specify whether to delete all child volumes and snapshots. |
Returns the description of a specific Amazon FSx backup, if a BackupIds value is provided for that backup
Description
Returns the description of a specific Amazon FSx backup, if a BackupIds
value is provided for that backup. Otherwise, it returns all backups owned by your Amazon Web Services account in the Amazon Web Services Region of the endpoint that you're calling.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_backups/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_describe_backups(
BackupIds = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
BackupIds |
The IDs of the backups that you want to retrieve. This parameter value
overrides any filters. If any IDs aren't found, a |
Filters |
The filters structure. The supported names are |
MaxResults |
Maximum number of backups to return in the response. This parameter
value must be greater than 0. The number of items that Amazon FSx
returns is the minimum of the |
NextToken |
An opaque pagination token returned from a previous
|
Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for Lustre or Amazon File Cache data repository associations, if one or more AssociationIds values are provided in the request, or if filters are used in the request
Description
Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for Lustre or Amazon File Cache data repository associations, if one or more AssociationIds
values are provided in the request, or if filters are used in the request. Data repository associations are supported on Amazon File Cache resources and all FSx for Lustre 2.12 and 2,15 file systems, excluding scratch_1
deployment type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_data_repository_associations/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_describe_data_repository_associations(
AssociationIds = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
AssociationIds |
IDs of the data repository associations whose descriptions you want to retrieve (String). |
Filters |
|
MaxResults |
The maximum number of resources to return in the response. This value must be an integer greater than zero. |
NextToken |
Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for Lustre or Amazon File Cache data repository tasks, if one or more TaskIds values are provided in the request, or if filters are used in the request
Description
Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for Lustre or Amazon File Cache data repository tasks, if one or more TaskIds
values are provided in the request, or if filters are used in the request. You can use filters to narrow the response to include just tasks for specific file systems or caches, or tasks in a specific lifecycle state. Otherwise, it returns all data repository tasks owned by your Amazon Web Services account in the Amazon Web Services Region of the endpoint that you're calling.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_data_repository_tasks/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_describe_data_repository_tasks(
TaskIds = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
TaskIds |
(Optional) IDs of the tasks whose descriptions you want to retrieve (String). |
Filters |
(Optional) You can use filters to narrow the
|
MaxResults |
|
NextToken |
Returns the description of a specific Amazon File Cache resource, if a FileCacheIds value is provided for that cache
Description
Returns the description of a specific Amazon File Cache resource, if a FileCacheIds
value is provided for that cache. Otherwise, it returns descriptions of all caches owned by your Amazon Web Services account in the Amazon Web Services Region of the endpoint that you're calling.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_file_caches/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_describe_file_caches(
FileCacheIds = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
FileCacheIds |
IDs of the caches whose descriptions you want to retrieve (String). |
MaxResults |
|
NextToken |
Returns the DNS aliases that are associated with the specified Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system
Description
Returns the DNS aliases that are associated with the specified Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system. A history of all DNS aliases that have been associated with and disassociated from the file system is available in the list of AdministrativeAction provided in the describe_file_systems
operation response.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_file_system_aliases/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_describe_file_system_aliases(
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
FileSystemId,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientRequestToken |
|
FileSystemId |
[required] The ID of the file system to return the associated DNS aliases for (String). |
MaxResults |
Maximum number of DNS aliases to return in the response (integer). This
parameter value must be greater than 0. The number of items that Amazon
FSx returns is the minimum of the |
NextToken |
Opaque pagination token returned from a previous
|
Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx file systems, if a FileSystemIds value is provided for that file system
Description
Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx file systems, if a FileSystemIds
value is provided for that file system. Otherwise, it returns descriptions of all file systems owned by your Amazon Web Services account in the Amazon Web Services Region of the endpoint that you're calling.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_file_systems/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_describe_file_systems(
FileSystemIds = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
FileSystemIds |
IDs of the file systems whose descriptions you want to retrieve (String). |
MaxResults |
Maximum number of file systems to return in the response (integer). This
parameter value must be greater than 0. The number of items that Amazon
FSx returns is the minimum of the |
NextToken |
Opaque pagination token returned from a previous
|
Indicates whether participant accounts in your organization can create Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP Multi-AZ file systems in subnets that are shared by a virtual private cloud (VPC) owner
Description
Indicates whether participant accounts in your organization can create Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP Multi-AZ file systems in subnets that are shared by a virtual private cloud (VPC) owner. For more information, see Creating FSx for ONTAP file systems in shared subnets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_shared_vpc_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_describe_shared_vpc_configuration()
Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshots, if a SnapshotIds value is provided
Description
Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshots, if a SnapshotIds
value is provided. Otherwise, this operation returns all snapshots owned by your Amazon Web Services account in the Amazon Web Services Region of the endpoint that you're calling.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_snapshots/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_describe_snapshots(
SnapshotIds = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
IncludeShared = NULL
)
Arguments
SnapshotIds |
The IDs of the snapshots that you want to retrieve. This parameter value
overrides any filters. If any IDs aren't found, a |
Filters |
The filters structure. The supported names are |
MaxResults |
|
NextToken |
|
IncludeShared |
Set to |
Describes one or more Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP storage virtual machines (SVMs)
Description
Describes one or more Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP storage virtual machines (SVMs).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_storage_virtual_machines/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_describe_storage_virtual_machines(
StorageVirtualMachineIds = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
StorageVirtualMachineIds |
Enter the ID of one or more SVMs that you want to view. |
Filters |
Enter a filter name:value pair to view a select set of SVMs. |
MaxResults |
|
NextToken |
Describes one or more Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volumes
Description
Describes one or more Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volumes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_volumes/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_describe_volumes(
VolumeIds = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
VolumeIds |
The IDs of the volumes whose descriptions you want to retrieve. |
Filters |
Enter a filter |
MaxResults |
|
NextToken |
Use this action to disassociate, or remove, one or more Domain Name Service (DNS) aliases from an Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system
Description
Use this action to disassociate, or remove, one or more Domain Name Service (DNS) aliases from an Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system. If you attempt to disassociate a DNS alias that is not associated with the file system, Amazon FSx responds with an HTTP status code 400 (Bad Request). For more information, see Working with DNS Aliases.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_disassociate_file_system_aliases/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_disassociate_file_system_aliases(
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
FileSystemId,
Aliases
)
Arguments
ClientRequestToken |
|
FileSystemId |
[required] Specifies the file system from which to disassociate the DNS aliases. |
Aliases |
[required] An array of one or more DNS alias names to disassociate, or remove, from the file system. |
Lists tags for Amazon FSx resources
Description
Lists tags for Amazon FSx resources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceARN, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The ARN of the Amazon FSx resource that will have its tags listed. |
MaxResults |
Maximum number of tags to return in the response (integer). This
parameter value must be greater than 0. The number of items that Amazon
FSx returns is the minimum of the |
NextToken |
Opaque pagination token returned from a previous
|
Releases the file system lock from an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system
Description
Releases the file system lock from an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_release_file_system_nfs_v3_locks/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_release_file_system_nfs_v3_locks(FileSystemId, ClientRequestToken = NULL)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] |
ClientRequestToken |
Returns an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume to the state saved by the specified snapshot
Description
Returns an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume to the state saved by the specified snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_restore_volume_from_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_restore_volume_from_snapshot(
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
VolumeId,
SnapshotId,
Options = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientRequestToken |
|
VolumeId |
[required] The ID of the volume that you are restoring. |
SnapshotId |
[required] The ID of the source snapshot. Specifies the snapshot that you are restoring from. |
Options |
The settings used when restoring the specified volume from snapshot.
|
After performing steps to repair the Active Directory configuration of an FSx for Windows File Server file system, use this action to initiate the process of Amazon FSx attempting to reconnect to the file system
Description
After performing steps to repair the Active Directory configuration of an FSx for Windows File Server file system, use this action to initiate the process of Amazon FSx attempting to reconnect to the file system.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_start_misconfigured_state_recovery/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_start_misconfigured_state_recovery(ClientRequestToken = NULL, FileSystemId)
Arguments
ClientRequestToken |
|
FileSystemId |
[required] |
Tags an Amazon FSx resource
Description
Tags an Amazon FSx resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_tag_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon FSx resource that you want to tag. |
Tags |
[required] A list of tags for the resource. If a tag with a given key already exists, the value is replaced by the one specified in this parameter. |
This action removes a tag from an Amazon FSx resource
Description
This action removes a tag from an Amazon FSx resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_untag_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The ARN of the Amazon FSx resource to untag. |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of keys of tags on the resource to untag. In case the tag key doesn't exist, the call will still succeed to be idempotent. |
Updates the configuration of an existing data repository association on an Amazon FSx for Lustre file system
Description
Updates the configuration of an existing data repository association on an Amazon FSx for Lustre file system. Data repository associations are supported on all FSx for Lustre 2.12 and 2.15 file systems, excluding scratch_1
deployment type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_update_data_repository_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_update_data_repository_association(
AssociationId,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
ImportedFileChunkSize = NULL,
S3 = NULL
)
Arguments
AssociationId |
[required] The ID of the data repository association that you are updating. |
ClientRequestToken |
|
ImportedFileChunkSize |
For files imported from a data repository, this value determines the stripe count and maximum amount of data per file (in MiB) stored on a single physical disk. The maximum number of disks that a single file can be striped across is limited by the total number of disks that make up the file system. The default chunk size is 1,024 MiB (1 GiB) and can go as high as 512,000 MiB (500 GiB). Amazon S3 objects have a maximum size of 5 TB. |
S3 |
The configuration for an Amazon S3 data repository linked to an Amazon FSx Lustre file system with a data repository association. The configuration defines which file events (new, changed, or deleted files or directories) are automatically imported from the linked data repository to the file system or automatically exported from the file system to the data repository. |
Updates the configuration of an existing Amazon File Cache resource
Description
Updates the configuration of an existing Amazon File Cache resource. You can update multiple properties in a single request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_update_file_cache/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_update_file_cache(
FileCacheId,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
LustreConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
FileCacheId |
[required] The ID of the cache that you are updating. |
ClientRequestToken |
|
LustreConfiguration |
The configuration updates for an Amazon File Cache resource. |
Use this operation to update the configuration of an existing Amazon FSx file system
Description
Use this operation to update the configuration of an existing Amazon FSx file system. You can update multiple properties in a single request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_update_file_system/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_update_file_system(
FileSystemId,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
StorageCapacity = NULL,
WindowsConfiguration = NULL,
LustreConfiguration = NULL,
OntapConfiguration = NULL,
OpenZFSConfiguration = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
FileSystemTypeVersion = NULL
)
Arguments
FileSystemId |
[required] The ID of the file system that you are updating. |
ClientRequestToken |
A string of up to 63 ASCII characters that Amazon FSx uses to ensure idempotent updates. This string is automatically filled on your behalf when you use the Command Line Interface (CLI) or an Amazon Web Services SDK. |
StorageCapacity |
Use this parameter to increase the storage capacity of an FSx for Windows File Server, FSx for Lustre, FSx for OpenZFS, or FSx for ONTAP file system. Specifies the storage capacity target value, in GiB, to increase the storage capacity for the file system that you're updating. You can't make a storage capacity increase request if there is an existing storage capacity increase request in progress. For Lustre file systems, the storage capacity target value can be the following:
For more information, see Managing storage and throughput capacity in the FSx for Lustre User Guide. For FSx for OpenZFS file systems, the storage capacity target value must be at least 10 percent greater than the current storage capacity value. For more information, see Managing storage capacity in the FSx for OpenZFS User Guide. For Windows file systems, the storage capacity target value must be at least 10 percent greater than the current storage capacity value. To increase storage capacity, the file system must have at least 16 MBps of throughput capacity. For more information, see Managing storage capacity in the Amazon FSxfor Windows File Server User Guide. For ONTAP file systems, the storage capacity target value must be at least 10 percent greater than the current storage capacity value. For more information, see Managing storage capacity and provisioned IOPS in the Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP User Guide. |
WindowsConfiguration |
The configuration updates for an Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system. |
LustreConfiguration |
|
OntapConfiguration |
|
OpenZFSConfiguration |
The configuration updates for an FSx for OpenZFS file system. |
StorageType |
|
FileSystemTypeVersion |
The Lustre version you are updating an FSx for Lustre file system to.
Valid values are |
Configures whether participant accounts in your organization can create Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP Multi-AZ file systems in subnets that are shared by a virtual private cloud (VPC) owner
Description
Configures whether participant accounts in your organization can create Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP Multi-AZ file systems in subnets that are shared by a virtual private cloud (VPC) owner. For more information, see the Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_update_shared_vpc_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_update_shared_vpc_configuration(
EnableFsxRouteTableUpdatesFromParticipantAccounts = NULL,
ClientRequestToken = NULL
)
Arguments
EnableFsxRouteTableUpdatesFromParticipantAccounts |
Specifies whether participant accounts can create FSx for ONTAP Multi-AZ
file systems in shared subnets. Set to |
ClientRequestToken |
Updates the name of an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshot
Description
Updates the name of an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_update_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_update_snapshot(ClientRequestToken = NULL, Name, SnapshotId)
Arguments
ClientRequestToken |
|
Name |
[required] The name of the snapshot to update. |
SnapshotId |
[required] The ID of the snapshot that you want to update, in the format
|
Updates an FSx for ONTAP storage virtual machine (SVM)
Description
Updates an FSx for ONTAP storage virtual machine (SVM).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_update_storage_virtual_machine/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_update_storage_virtual_machine(
ActiveDirectoryConfiguration = NULL,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
StorageVirtualMachineId,
SvmAdminPassword = NULL
)
Arguments
ActiveDirectoryConfiguration |
Specifies updates to an SVM's Microsoft Active Directory (AD) configuration. |
ClientRequestToken |
|
StorageVirtualMachineId |
[required] The ID of the SVM that you want to update, in the format
|
SvmAdminPassword |
Specifies a new SvmAdminPassword. |
Updates the configuration of an Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume
Description
Updates the configuration of an Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_update_volume/ for full documentation.
Usage
fsx_update_volume(
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
VolumeId,
OntapConfiguration = NULL,
Name = NULL,
OpenZFSConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientRequestToken |
|
VolumeId |
[required] The ID of the volume that you want to update, in the format
|
OntapConfiguration |
The configuration of the ONTAP volume that you are updating. |
Name |
The name of the OpenZFS volume. OpenZFS root volumes are automatically
named |
OpenZFSConfiguration |
The configuration of the OpenZFS volume that you are updating. |
Amazon Glacier
Description
Amazon S3 Glacier (Glacier) is a storage solution for "cold data."
Glacier is an extremely low-cost storage service that provides secure, durable, and easy-to-use storage for data backup and archival. With Glacier, customers can store their data cost effectively for months, years, or decades. Glacier also enables customers to offload the administrative burdens of operating and scaling storage to AWS, so they don't have to worry about capacity planning, hardware provisioning, data replication, hardware failure and recovery, or time-consuming hardware migrations.
Glacier is a great storage choice when low storage cost is paramount and your data is rarely retrieved. If your application requires fast or frequent access to your data, consider using Amazon S3. For more information, see Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3).
You can store any kind of data in any format. There is no maximum limit on the total amount of data you can store in Glacier.
If you are a first-time user of Glacier, we recommend that you begin by reading the following sections in the Amazon S3 Glacier Developer Guide:
-
What is Amazon S3 Glacier - This section of the Developer Guide describes the underlying data model, the operations it supports, and the AWS SDKs that you can use to interact with the service.
-
Getting Started with Amazon S3 Glacier - The Getting Started section walks you through the process of creating a vault, uploading archives, creating jobs to download archives, retrieving the job output, and deleting archives.
Usage
glacier(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- glacier( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
abort_multipart_upload | This operation aborts a multipart upload identified by the upload ID |
abort_vault_lock | This operation aborts the vault locking process if the vault lock is not in the Locked state |
add_tags_to_vault | This operation adds the specified tags to a vault |
complete_multipart_upload | You call this operation to inform Amazon S3 Glacier (Glacier) that all the archive parts have been uploaded and that Glacier can now assemble the archive from the uploaded parts |
complete_vault_lock | This operation completes the vault locking process by transitioning the vault lock from the InProgress state to the Locked state, which causes the vault lock policy to become unchangeable |
create_vault | This operation creates a new vault with the specified name |
delete_archive | This operation deletes an archive from a vault |
delete_vault | This operation deletes a vault |
delete_vault_access_policy | This operation deletes the access policy associated with the specified vault |
delete_vault_notifications | This operation deletes the notification configuration set for a vault |
describe_job | This operation returns information about a job you previously initiated, including the job initiation date, the user who initiated the job, the job status code/message and the Amazon SNS topic to notify after Amazon S3 Glacier (Glacier) completes the job |
describe_vault | This operation returns information about a vault, including the vault's Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the date the vault was created, the number of archives it contains, and the total size of all the archives in the vault |
get_data_retrieval_policy | This operation returns the current data retrieval policy for the account and region specified in the GET request |
get_job_output | This operation downloads the output of the job you initiated using InitiateJob |
get_vault_access_policy | This operation retrieves the access-policy subresource set on the vault; for more information on setting this subresource, see Set Vault Access Policy (PUT access-policy) |
get_vault_lock | This operation retrieves the following attributes from the lock-policy subresource set on the specified vault: |
get_vault_notifications | This operation retrieves the notification-configuration subresource of the specified vault |
initiate_job | This operation initiates a job of the specified type, which can be a select, an archival retrieval, or a vault retrieval |
initiate_multipart_upload | This operation initiates a multipart upload |
initiate_vault_lock | This operation initiates the vault locking process by doing the following: |
list_jobs | This operation lists jobs for a vault, including jobs that are in-progress and jobs that have recently finished |
list_multipart_uploads | This operation lists in-progress multipart uploads for the specified vault |
list_parts | This operation lists the parts of an archive that have been uploaded in a specific multipart upload |
list_provisioned_capacity | This operation lists the provisioned capacity units for the specified AWS account |
list_tags_for_vault | This operation lists all the tags attached to a vault |
list_vaults | This operation lists all vaults owned by the calling user's account |
purchase_provisioned_capacity | This operation purchases a provisioned capacity unit for an AWS account |
remove_tags_from_vault | This operation removes one or more tags from the set of tags attached to a vault |
set_data_retrieval_policy | This operation sets and then enacts a data retrieval policy in the region specified in the PUT request |
set_vault_access_policy | This operation configures an access policy for a vault and will overwrite an existing policy |
set_vault_notifications | This operation configures notifications that will be sent when specific events happen to a vault |
upload_archive | This operation adds an archive to a vault |
upload_multipart_part | This operation uploads a part of an archive |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- glacier()
# The example deletes an in-progress multipart upload to a vault named
# my-vault:
svc$abort_multipart_upload(
accountId = "-",
uploadId = "19gaRezEXAMPLES6Ry5YYdqthHOC_kGRCT03L9yetr220UmPtBYKk-OssZtLq...",
vaultName = "my-vault"
)
## End(Not run)
This operation aborts a multipart upload identified by the upload ID
Description
This operation aborts a multipart upload identified by the upload ID.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_abort_multipart_upload/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_abort_multipart_upload(accountId, vaultName, uploadId)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
uploadId |
[required] The upload ID of the multipart upload to delete. |
This operation aborts the vault locking process if the vault lock is not in the Locked state
Description
This operation aborts the vault locking process if the vault lock is not in the Locked
state. If the vault lock is in the Locked
state when this operation is requested, the operation returns an AccessDeniedException
error. Aborting the vault locking process removes the vault lock policy from the specified vault.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_abort_vault_lock/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_abort_vault_lock(accountId, vaultName)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
This operation adds the specified tags to a vault
Description
This operation adds the specified tags to a vault. Each tag is composed of a key and a value. Each vault can have up to 10 tags. If your request would cause the tag limit for the vault to be exceeded, the operation throws the LimitExceededException
error. If a tag already exists on the vault under a specified key, the existing key value will be overwritten. For more information about tags, see Tagging Amazon S3 Glacier Resources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_add_tags_to_vault/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_add_tags_to_vault(accountId, vaultName, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
Tags |
The tags to add to the vault. Each tag is composed of a key and a value. The value can be an empty string. |
You call this operation to inform Amazon S3 Glacier (Glacier) that all the archive parts have been uploaded and that Glacier can now assemble the archive from the uploaded parts
Description
You call this operation to inform Amazon S3 Glacier (Glacier) that all the archive parts have been uploaded and that Glacier can now assemble the archive from the uploaded parts. After assembling and saving the archive to the vault, Glacier returns the URI path of the newly created archive resource. Using the URI path, you can then access the archive. After you upload an archive, you should save the archive ID returned to retrieve the archive at a later point. You can also get the vault inventory to obtain a list of archive IDs in a vault. For more information, see initiate_job
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_complete_multipart_upload/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_complete_multipart_upload(
accountId,
vaultName,
uploadId,
archiveSize = NULL,
checksum = NULL
)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
uploadId |
[required] The upload ID of the multipart upload. |
archiveSize |
The total size, in bytes, of the entire archive. This value should be the sum of all the sizes of the individual parts that you uploaded. |
checksum |
The SHA256 tree hash of the entire archive. It is the tree hash of SHA256 tree hash of the individual parts. If the value you specify in the request does not match the SHA256 tree hash of the final assembled archive as computed by Amazon S3 Glacier (Glacier), Glacier returns an error and the request fails. |
This operation completes the vault locking process by transitioning the vault lock from the InProgress state to the Locked state, which causes the vault lock policy to become unchangeable
Description
This operation completes the vault locking process by transitioning the vault lock from the InProgress
state to the Locked
state, which causes the vault lock policy to become unchangeable. A vault lock is put into the InProgress
state by calling initiate_vault_lock
. You can obtain the state of the vault lock by calling get_vault_lock
. For more information about the vault locking process, Amazon Glacier Vault Lock.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_complete_vault_lock/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_complete_vault_lock(accountId, vaultName, lockId)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
lockId |
[required] The |
This operation creates a new vault with the specified name
Description
This operation creates a new vault with the specified name. The name of the vault must be unique within a region for an AWS account. You can create up to 1,000 vaults per account. If you need to create more vaults, contact Amazon S3 Glacier.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_create_vault/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_create_vault(accountId, vaultName)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
This operation deletes an archive from a vault
Description
This operation deletes an archive from a vault. Subsequent requests to initiate a retrieval of this archive will fail. Archive retrievals that are in progress for this archive ID may or may not succeed according to the following scenarios:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_delete_archive/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_delete_archive(accountId, vaultName, archiveId)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
archiveId |
[required] The ID of the archive to delete. |
This operation deletes a vault
Description
This operation deletes a vault. Amazon S3 Glacier will delete a vault only if there are no archives in the vault as of the last inventory and there have been no writes to the vault since the last inventory. If either of these conditions is not satisfied, the vault deletion fails (that is, the vault is not removed) and Amazon S3 Glacier returns an error. You can use describe_vault
to return the number of archives in a vault, and you can use Initiate a Job (POST jobs) to initiate a new inventory retrieval for a vault. The inventory contains the archive IDs you use to delete archives using Delete Archive (DELETE archive).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_delete_vault/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_delete_vault(accountId, vaultName)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
This operation deletes the access policy associated with the specified vault
Description
This operation deletes the access policy associated with the specified vault. The operation is eventually consistent; that is, it might take some time for Amazon S3 Glacier to completely remove the access policy, and you might still see the effect of the policy for a short time after you send the delete request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_delete_vault_access_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_delete_vault_access_policy(accountId, vaultName)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
This operation deletes the notification configuration set for a vault
Description
This operation deletes the notification configuration set for a vault. The operation is eventually consistent; that is, it might take some time for Amazon S3 Glacier to completely disable the notifications and you might still receive some notifications for a short time after you send the delete request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_delete_vault_notifications/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_delete_vault_notifications(accountId, vaultName)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
This operation returns information about a job you previously initiated, including the job initiation date, the user who initiated the job, the job status code/message and the Amazon SNS topic to notify after Amazon S3 Glacier (Glacier) completes the job
Description
This operation returns information about a job you previously initiated, including the job initiation date, the user who initiated the job, the job status code/message and the Amazon SNS topic to notify after Amazon S3 Glacier (Glacier) completes the job. For more information about initiating a job, see initiate_job
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_describe_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_describe_job(accountId, vaultName, jobId)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
jobId |
[required] The ID of the job to describe. |
This operation returns information about a vault, including the vault's Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the date the vault was created, the number of archives it contains, and the total size of all the archives in the vault
Description
This operation returns information about a vault, including the vault's Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the date the vault was created, the number of archives it contains, and the total size of all the archives in the vault. The number of archives and their total size are as of the last inventory generation. This means that if you add or remove an archive from a vault, and then immediately use Describe Vault, the change in contents will not be immediately reflected. If you want to retrieve the latest inventory of the vault, use initiate_job
. Amazon S3 Glacier generates vault inventories approximately daily. For more information, see Downloading a Vault Inventory in Amazon S3 Glacier.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_describe_vault/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_describe_vault(accountId, vaultName)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
This operation returns the current data retrieval policy for the account and region specified in the GET request
Description
This operation returns the current data retrieval policy for the account and region specified in the GET request. For more information about data retrieval policies, see Amazon Glacier Data Retrieval Policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_get_data_retrieval_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_get_data_retrieval_policy(accountId)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
This operation downloads the output of the job you initiated using InitiateJob
Description
This operation downloads the output of the job you initiated using initiate_job
. Depending on the job type you specified when you initiated the job, the output will be either the content of an archive or a vault inventory.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_get_job_output/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_get_job_output(accountId, vaultName, jobId, range = NULL)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
jobId |
[required] The job ID whose data is downloaded. |
range |
The range of bytes to retrieve from the output. For example, if you want
to download the first 1,048,576 bytes, specify the range as
If the job output is large, then you can use a range to retrieve a portion of the output. This allows you to download the entire output in smaller chunks of bytes. For example, suppose you have 1 GB of job output you want to download and you decide to download 128 MB chunks of data at a time, which is a total of eight Get Job Output requests. You use the following process to download the job output:
|
This operation retrieves the access-policy subresource set on the vault; for more information on setting this subresource, see Set Vault Access Policy (PUT access-policy)
Description
This operation retrieves the access-policy
subresource set on the vault; for more information on setting this subresource, see Set Vault Access Policy (PUT access-policy). If there is no access policy set on the vault, the operation returns a 404 Not found
error. For more information about vault access policies, see Amazon Glacier Access Control with Vault Access Policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_get_vault_access_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_get_vault_access_policy(accountId, vaultName)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
This operation retrieves the following attributes from the lock-policy subresource set on the specified vault:
Description
This operation retrieves the following attributes from the lock-policy
subresource set on the specified vault:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_get_vault_lock/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_get_vault_lock(accountId, vaultName)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
This operation retrieves the notification-configuration subresource of the specified vault
Description
This operation retrieves the notification-configuration
subresource of the specified vault.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_get_vault_notifications/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_get_vault_notifications(accountId, vaultName)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
This operation initiates a job of the specified type, which can be a select, an archival retrieval, or a vault retrieval
Description
This operation initiates a job of the specified type, which can be a select, an archival retrieval, or a vault retrieval. For more information about using this operation, see the documentation for the underlying REST API Initiate a Job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_initiate_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_initiate_job(accountId, vaultName, jobParameters = NULL)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
jobParameters |
Provides options for specifying job information. |
This operation initiates a multipart upload
Description
This operation initiates a multipart upload. Amazon S3 Glacier creates a multipart upload resource and returns its ID in the response. The multipart upload ID is used in subsequent requests to upload parts of an archive (see upload_multipart_part
).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_initiate_multipart_upload/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_initiate_multipart_upload(
accountId,
vaultName,
archiveDescription = NULL,
partSize = NULL
)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
archiveDescription |
The archive description that you are uploading in parts. The part size must be a megabyte (1024 KB) multiplied by a power of 2, for example 1048576 (1 MB), 2097152 (2 MB), 4194304 (4 MB), 8388608 (8 MB), and so on. The minimum allowable part size is 1 MB, and the maximum is 4 GB (4096 MB). |
partSize |
The size of each part except the last, in bytes. The last part can be smaller than this part size. |
This operation initiates the vault locking process by doing the following:
Description
This operation initiates the vault locking process by doing the following:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_initiate_vault_lock/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_initiate_vault_lock(accountId, vaultName, policy = NULL)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
policy |
The vault lock policy as a JSON string, which uses "\" as an escape character. |
This operation lists jobs for a vault, including jobs that are in-progress and jobs that have recently finished
Description
This operation lists jobs for a vault, including jobs that are in-progress and jobs that have recently finished. The List Job operation returns a list of these jobs sorted by job initiation time.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_list_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_list_jobs(
accountId,
vaultName,
limit = NULL,
marker = NULL,
statuscode = NULL,
completed = NULL
)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
limit |
The maximum number of jobs to be returned. The default limit is 50. The number of jobs returned might be fewer than the specified limit, but the number of returned jobs never exceeds the limit. |
marker |
An opaque string used for pagination. This value specifies the job at which the listing of jobs should begin. Get the marker value from a previous List Jobs response. You only need to include the marker if you are continuing the pagination of results started in a previous List Jobs request. |
statuscode |
The type of job status to return. You can specify the following values:
|
completed |
The state of the jobs to return. You can specify |
This operation lists in-progress multipart uploads for the specified vault
Description
This operation lists in-progress multipart uploads for the specified vault. An in-progress multipart upload is a multipart upload that has been initiated by an initiate_multipart_upload
request, but has not yet been completed or aborted. The list returned in the List Multipart Upload response has no guaranteed order.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_list_multipart_uploads/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_list_multipart_uploads(
accountId,
vaultName,
marker = NULL,
limit = NULL
)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
marker |
An opaque string used for pagination. This value specifies the upload at which the listing of uploads should begin. Get the marker value from a previous List Uploads response. You need only include the marker if you are continuing the pagination of results started in a previous List Uploads request. |
limit |
Specifies the maximum number of uploads returned in the response body. If this value is not specified, the List Uploads operation returns up to 50 uploads. |
This operation lists the parts of an archive that have been uploaded in a specific multipart upload
Description
This operation lists the parts of an archive that have been uploaded in a specific multipart upload. You can make this request at any time during an in-progress multipart upload before you complete the upload (see complete_multipart_upload
. List Parts returns an error for completed uploads. The list returned in the List Parts response is sorted by part range.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_list_parts/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_list_parts(accountId, vaultName, uploadId, marker = NULL, limit = NULL)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
uploadId |
[required] The upload ID of the multipart upload. |
marker |
An opaque string used for pagination. This value specifies the part at which the listing of parts should begin. Get the marker value from the response of a previous List Parts response. You need only include the marker if you are continuing the pagination of results started in a previous List Parts request. |
limit |
The maximum number of parts to be returned. The default limit is 50. The number of parts returned might be fewer than the specified limit, but the number of returned parts never exceeds the limit. |
This operation lists the provisioned capacity units for the specified AWS account
Description
This operation lists the provisioned capacity units for the specified AWS account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_list_provisioned_capacity/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_list_provisioned_capacity(accountId)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, don't include any hyphens ('-') in the ID. |
This operation lists all the tags attached to a vault
Description
This operation lists all the tags attached to a vault. The operation returns an empty map if there are no tags. For more information about tags, see Tagging Amazon S3 Glacier Resources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_list_tags_for_vault/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_list_tags_for_vault(accountId, vaultName)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
This operation lists all vaults owned by the calling user's account
Description
This operation lists all vaults owned by the calling user's account. The list returned in the response is ASCII-sorted by vault name.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_list_vaults/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_list_vaults(accountId, marker = NULL, limit = NULL)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
marker |
A string used for pagination. The marker specifies the vault ARN after which the listing of vaults should begin. |
limit |
The maximum number of vaults to be returned. The default limit is 10. The number of vaults returned might be fewer than the specified limit, but the number of returned vaults never exceeds the limit. |
This operation purchases a provisioned capacity unit for an AWS account
Description
This operation purchases a provisioned capacity unit for an AWS account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_purchase_provisioned_capacity/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_purchase_provisioned_capacity(accountId)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, don't include any hyphens ('-') in the ID. |
This operation removes one or more tags from the set of tags attached to a vault
Description
This operation removes one or more tags from the set of tags attached to a vault. For more information about tags, see Tagging Amazon S3 Glacier Resources. This operation is idempotent. The operation will be successful, even if there are no tags attached to the vault.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_remove_tags_from_vault/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_remove_tags_from_vault(accountId, vaultName, TagKeys = NULL)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
TagKeys |
A list of tag keys. Each corresponding tag is removed from the vault. |
This operation sets and then enacts a data retrieval policy in the region specified in the PUT request
Description
This operation sets and then enacts a data retrieval policy in the region specified in the PUT request. You can set one policy per region for an AWS account. The policy is enacted within a few minutes of a successful PUT operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_set_data_retrieval_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_set_data_retrieval_policy(accountId, Policy = NULL)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
Policy |
The data retrieval policy in JSON format. |
This operation configures an access policy for a vault and will overwrite an existing policy
Description
This operation configures an access policy for a vault and will overwrite an existing policy. To configure a vault access policy, send a PUT request to the access-policy
subresource of the vault. An access policy is specific to a vault and is also called a vault subresource. You can set one access policy per vault and the policy can be up to 20 KB in size. For more information about vault access policies, see Amazon Glacier Access Control with Vault Access Policies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_set_vault_access_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_set_vault_access_policy(accountId, vaultName, policy = NULL)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
policy |
The vault access policy as a JSON string. |
This operation configures notifications that will be sent when specific events happen to a vault
Description
This operation configures notifications that will be sent when specific events happen to a vault. By default, you don't get any notifications.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_set_vault_notifications/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_set_vault_notifications(
accountId,
vaultName,
vaultNotificationConfig = NULL
)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
vaultNotificationConfig |
Provides options for specifying notification configuration. |
This operation adds an archive to a vault
Description
This operation adds an archive to a vault. This is a synchronous operation, and for a successful upload, your data is durably persisted. Amazon S3 Glacier returns the archive ID in the x-amz-archive-id
header of the response.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_upload_archive/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_upload_archive(
vaultName,
accountId,
archiveDescription = NULL,
checksum = NULL,
body = NULL
)
Arguments
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
accountId |
[required] The |
archiveDescription |
The optional description of the archive you are uploading. |
checksum |
The SHA256 tree hash of the data being uploaded. |
body |
The data to upload. |
This operation uploads a part of an archive
Description
This operation uploads a part of an archive. You can upload archive parts in any order. You can also upload them in parallel. You can upload up to 10,000 parts for a multipart upload.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_upload_multipart_part/ for full documentation.
Usage
glacier_upload_multipart_part(
accountId,
vaultName,
uploadId,
checksum = NULL,
range = NULL,
body = NULL
)
Arguments
accountId |
[required] The |
vaultName |
[required] The name of the vault. |
uploadId |
[required] The upload ID of the multipart upload. |
checksum |
The SHA256 tree hash of the data being uploaded. |
range |
Identifies the range of bytes in the assembled archive that will be uploaded in this part. Amazon S3 Glacier uses this information to assemble the archive in the proper sequence. The format of this header follows RFC 2616. An example header is Content-Range:bytes 0-4194303/*. |
body |
The data to upload. |
Amazon Omics
Description
This is the AWS HealthOmics API Reference. For an introduction to the service, see What is AWS HealthOmics? in the AWS HealthOmics User Guide.
Usage
omics(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- omics( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
abort_multipart_read_set_upload | Stops a multipart upload |
accept_share | Accept a resource share request |
batch_delete_read_set | Deletes one or more read sets |
cancel_annotation_import_job | Cancels an annotation import job |
cancel_run | Cancels a run |
cancel_variant_import_job | Cancels a variant import job |
complete_multipart_read_set_upload | Concludes a multipart upload once you have uploaded all the components |
create_annotation_store | Creates an annotation store |
create_annotation_store_version | Creates a new version of an annotation store |
create_multipart_read_set_upload | Begins a multipart read set upload |
create_reference_store | Creates a reference store |
create_run_cache | You can create a run cache to save the task outputs from completed tasks in a run for a private workflow |
create_run_group | You can optionally create a run group to limit the compute resources for the runs that you add to the group |
create_sequence_store | Creates a sequence store |
create_share | Creates a cross-account shared resource |
create_variant_store | Creates a variant store |
create_workflow | Creates a workflow |
delete_annotation_store | Deletes an annotation store |
delete_annotation_store_versions | Deletes one or multiple versions of an annotation store |
delete_reference | Deletes a genome reference |
delete_reference_store | Deletes a genome reference store |
delete_run | Deletes a workflow run |
delete_run_cache | Delete a run cache |
delete_run_group | Deletes a workflow run group |
delete_s3_access_policy | Deletes an access policy for the specified store |
delete_sequence_store | Deletes a sequence store |
delete_share | Deletes a resource share |
delete_variant_store | Deletes a variant store |
delete_workflow | Deletes a workflow |
get_annotation_import_job | Gets information about an annotation import job |
get_annotation_store | Gets information about an annotation store |
get_annotation_store_version | Retrieves the metadata for an annotation store version |
get_read_set | Gets a file from a read set |
get_read_set_activation_job | Gets information about a read set activation job |
get_read_set_export_job | Gets information about a read set export job |
get_read_set_import_job | Gets information about a read set import job |
get_read_set_metadata | Gets details about a read set |
get_reference | Gets a reference file |
get_reference_import_job | Gets information about a reference import job |
get_reference_metadata | Gets information about a genome reference's metadata |
get_reference_store | Gets information about a reference store |
get_run | Gets information about a workflow run |
get_run_cache | Retrieve the details for the specified run cache |
get_run_group | Gets information about a workflow run group |
get_run_task | Gets information about a workflow run task |
get_s3_access_policy | Retrieves details about an access policy on a given store |
get_sequence_store | Gets information about a sequence store |
get_share | Retrieves the metadata for the specified resource share |
get_variant_import_job | Gets information about a variant import job |
get_variant_store | Gets information about a variant store |
get_workflow | Gets information about a workflow |
list_annotation_import_jobs | Retrieves a list of annotation import jobs |
list_annotation_stores | Retrieves a list of annotation stores |
list_annotation_store_versions | Lists the versions of an annotation store |
list_multipart_read_set_uploads | Lists multipart read set uploads and for in progress uploads |
list_read_set_activation_jobs | Retrieves a list of read set activation jobs |
list_read_set_export_jobs | Retrieves a list of read set export jobs |
list_read_set_import_jobs | Retrieves a list of read set import jobs |
list_read_sets | Retrieves a list of read sets |
list_read_set_upload_parts | This operation will list all parts in a requested multipart upload for a sequence store |
list_reference_import_jobs | Retrieves a list of reference import jobs |
list_references | Retrieves a list of references |
list_reference_stores | Retrieves a list of reference stores |
list_run_caches | Retrieves a list of your run caches |
list_run_groups | Retrieves a list of run groups |
list_runs | Retrieves a list of runs |
list_run_tasks | Retrieves a list of tasks for a run |
list_sequence_stores | Retrieves a list of sequence stores |
list_shares | Retrieves the resource shares associated with an account |
list_tags_for_resource | Retrieves a list of tags for a resource |
list_variant_import_jobs | Retrieves a list of variant import jobs |
list_variant_stores | Retrieves a list of variant stores |
list_workflows | Retrieves a list of workflows |
put_s3_access_policy | Adds an access policy to the specified store |
start_annotation_import_job | Starts an annotation import job |
start_read_set_activation_job | Activates an archived read set |
start_read_set_export_job | Exports a read set to Amazon S3 |
start_read_set_import_job | Starts a read set import job |
start_reference_import_job | Starts a reference import job |
start_run | Starts a workflow run |
start_variant_import_job | Starts a variant import job |
tag_resource | Tags a resource |
untag_resource | Removes tags from a resource |
update_annotation_store | Updates an annotation store |
update_annotation_store_version | Updates the description of an annotation store version |
update_run_cache | Update a run cache |
update_run_group | Updates a run group |
update_sequence_store | Update one or more parameters for the sequence store |
update_variant_store | Updates a variant store |
update_workflow | Updates a workflow |
upload_read_set_part | This operation uploads a specific part of a read set |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- omics()
svc$abort_multipart_read_set_upload(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Stops a multipart upload
Description
Stops a multipart upload.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_abort_multipart_read_set_upload/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_abort_multipart_read_set_upload(sequenceStoreId, uploadId)
Arguments
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The sequence store ID for the store involved in the multipart upload. |
uploadId |
[required] The ID for the multipart upload. |
Accept a resource share request
Description
Accept a resource share request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_accept_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_accept_share(shareId)
Arguments
shareId |
[required] The ID of the resource share. |
Deletes one or more read sets
Description
Deletes one or more read sets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_batch_delete_read_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_batch_delete_read_set(ids, sequenceStoreId)
Arguments
ids |
[required] The read sets' IDs. |
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The read sets' sequence store ID. |
Cancels an annotation import job
Description
Cancels an annotation import job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_cancel_annotation_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_cancel_annotation_import_job(jobId)
Arguments
jobId |
[required] The job's ID. |
Cancels a run
Description
Cancels a run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_cancel_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_cancel_run(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The run's ID. |
Cancels a variant import job
Description
Cancels a variant import job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_cancel_variant_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_cancel_variant_import_job(jobId)
Arguments
jobId |
[required] The job's ID. |
Concludes a multipart upload once you have uploaded all the components
Description
Concludes a multipart upload once you have uploaded all the components.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_complete_multipart_read_set_upload/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_complete_multipart_read_set_upload(sequenceStoreId, uploadId, parts)
Arguments
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The sequence store ID for the store involved in the multipart upload. |
uploadId |
[required] The ID for the multipart upload. |
parts |
[required] The individual uploads or parts of a multipart upload. |
Creates an annotation store
Description
Creates an annotation store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_annotation_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_create_annotation_store(
reference = NULL,
name = NULL,
description = NULL,
tags = NULL,
versionName = NULL,
sseConfig = NULL,
storeFormat,
storeOptions = NULL
)
Arguments
reference |
The genome reference for the store's annotations. |
name |
A name for the store. |
description |
A description for the store. |
tags |
Tags for the store. |
versionName |
The name given to an annotation store version to distinguish it from other versions. |
sseConfig |
Server-side encryption (SSE) settings for the store. |
storeFormat |
[required] The annotation file format of the store. |
storeOptions |
File parsing options for the annotation store. |
Creates a new version of an annotation store
Description
Creates a new version of an annotation store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_annotation_store_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_create_annotation_store_version(
name,
versionName,
description = NULL,
versionOptions = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
[required] The name of an annotation store version from which versions are being created. |
versionName |
[required] The name given to an annotation store version to distinguish it from other versions. |
description |
The description of an annotation store version. |
versionOptions |
The options for an annotation store version. |
tags |
Any tags added to annotation store version. |
Begins a multipart read set upload
Description
Begins a multipart read set upload.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_multipart_read_set_upload/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_create_multipart_read_set_upload(
sequenceStoreId,
clientToken = NULL,
sourceFileType,
subjectId,
sampleId,
generatedFrom = NULL,
referenceArn = NULL,
name,
description = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The sequence store ID for the store that is the destination of the multipart uploads. |
clientToken |
An idempotency token that can be used to avoid triggering multiple multipart uploads. |
sourceFileType |
[required] The type of file being uploaded. |
subjectId |
[required] The source's subject ID. |
sampleId |
[required] The source's sample ID. |
generatedFrom |
Where the source originated. |
referenceArn |
The ARN of the reference. |
name |
[required] The name of the read set. |
description |
The description of the read set. |
tags |
Any tags to add to the read set. |
Creates a reference store
Description
Creates a reference store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_reference_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_create_reference_store(
name,
description = NULL,
sseConfig = NULL,
tags = NULL,
clientToken = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
[required] A name for the store. |
description |
A description for the store. |
sseConfig |
Server-side encryption (SSE) settings for the store. |
tags |
Tags for the store. |
clientToken |
To ensure that requests don't run multiple times, specify a unique token for each request. |
You can create a run cache to save the task outputs from completed tasks in a run for a private workflow
Description
You can create a run cache to save the task outputs from completed tasks in a run for a private workflow. Subsequent runs use the task outputs from the cache, rather than computing the task outputs again. You specify an Amazon S3 location where HealthOmics saves the cached data. This data must be immediately accessible (not in an archived state).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_run_cache/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_create_run_cache(
cacheBehavior = NULL,
cacheS3Location,
description = NULL,
name = NULL,
requestId,
tags = NULL,
cacheBucketOwnerId = NULL
)
Arguments
cacheBehavior |
Default cache behavior for runs that use this cache. Supported values are:
If you don't specify a value, the default behavior is CACHE_ON_FAILURE. When you start a run that uses this cache, you can override the default cache behavior. For more information, see Run cache behavior in the AWS HealthOmics User Guide. |
cacheS3Location |
[required] Specify the S3 location for storing the cached task outputs. This data must be immediately accessible (not in an archived state). |
description |
Enter a description of the run cache. |
name |
Enter a user-friendly name for the run cache. |
requestId |
[required] A unique request token, to ensure idempotency. If you don't specify a token, HealthOmics automatically generates a universally unique identifier (UUID) for the request. |
tags |
Specify one or more tags to associate with this run cache. |
cacheBucketOwnerId |
The AWS account ID of the expected owner of the S3 bucket for the run cache. If not provided, your account ID is set as the owner of the bucket. |
You can optionally create a run group to limit the compute resources for the runs that you add to the group
Description
You can optionally create a run group to limit the compute resources for the runs that you add to the group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_run_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_create_run_group(
name = NULL,
maxCpus = NULL,
maxRuns = NULL,
maxDuration = NULL,
tags = NULL,
requestId,
maxGpus = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
A name for the group. |
maxCpus |
The maximum number of CPUs that can run concurrently across all active runs in the run group. |
maxRuns |
The maximum number of runs that can be running at the same time. |
maxDuration |
The maximum time for each run (in minutes). If a run exceeds the maximum run time, the run fails automatically. |
tags |
Tags for the group. |
requestId |
[required] To ensure that requests don't run multiple times, specify a unique ID for each request. |
maxGpus |
The maximum number of GPUs that can run concurrently across all active runs in the run group. |
Creates a sequence store
Description
Creates a sequence store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_sequence_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_create_sequence_store(
name,
description = NULL,
sseConfig = NULL,
tags = NULL,
clientToken = NULL,
fallbackLocation = NULL,
eTagAlgorithmFamily = NULL,
propagatedSetLevelTags = NULL,
s3AccessConfig = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
[required] A name for the store. |
description |
A description for the store. |
sseConfig |
Server-side encryption (SSE) settings for the store. |
tags |
Tags for the store. |
clientToken |
To ensure that requests don't run multiple times, specify a unique token for each request. |
fallbackLocation |
An S3 location that is used to store files that have failed a direct upload. |
eTagAlgorithmFamily |
The ETag algorithm family to use for ingested read sets. |
propagatedSetLevelTags |
The tags keys to propagate to the S3 objects associated with read sets in the sequence store. |
s3AccessConfig |
S3 access configuration parameters |
Creates a cross-account shared resource
Description
Creates a cross-account shared resource. The resource owner makes an offer to share the resource with the principal subscriber (an AWS user with a different account than the resource owner).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_create_share(resourceArn, principalSubscriber, shareName = NULL)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN of the resource to be shared. |
principalSubscriber |
[required] The principal subscriber is the account being offered shared access to the resource. |
shareName |
A name that the owner defines for the share. |
Creates a variant store
Description
Creates a variant store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_variant_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_create_variant_store(
reference,
name = NULL,
description = NULL,
tags = NULL,
sseConfig = NULL
)
Arguments
reference |
[required] The genome reference for the store's variants. |
name |
A name for the store. |
description |
A description for the store. |
tags |
Tags for the store. |
sseConfig |
Server-side encryption (SSE) settings for the store. |
Creates a workflow
Description
Creates a workflow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_workflow/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_create_workflow(
name = NULL,
description = NULL,
engine = NULL,
definitionZip = NULL,
definitionUri = NULL,
main = NULL,
parameterTemplate = NULL,
storageCapacity = NULL,
tags = NULL,
requestId,
accelerators = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
A name for the workflow. |
description |
A description for the workflow. |
engine |
An engine for the workflow. |
definitionZip |
A ZIP archive for the workflow. |
definitionUri |
The URI of a definition for the workflow. |
main |
The path of the main definition file for the workflow. |
parameterTemplate |
A parameter template for the workflow. |
storageCapacity |
The default storage capacity for the workflow runs, in gibibytes. |
tags |
Tags for the workflow. |
requestId |
[required] To ensure that requests don't run multiple times, specify a unique ID for each request. |
accelerators |
The computational accelerator specified to run the workflow. |
Deletes an annotation store
Description
Deletes an annotation store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_annotation_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_delete_annotation_store(name, force = NULL)
Arguments
name |
[required] The store's name. |
force |
Whether to force deletion. |
Deletes one or multiple versions of an annotation store
Description
Deletes one or multiple versions of an annotation store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_annotation_store_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_delete_annotation_store_versions(name, versions, force = NULL)
Arguments
name |
[required] The name of the annotation store from which versions are being deleted. |
versions |
[required] The versions of an annotation store to be deleted. |
force |
Forces the deletion of an annotation store version when imports are in-progress.. |
Deletes a genome reference
Description
Deletes a genome reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_reference/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_delete_reference(id, referenceStoreId)
Arguments
id |
[required] The reference's ID. |
referenceStoreId |
[required] The reference's store ID. |
Deletes a genome reference store
Description
Deletes a genome reference store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_reference_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_delete_reference_store(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The store's ID. |
Deletes a workflow run
Description
Deletes a workflow run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_delete_run(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The run's ID. |
Delete a run cache
Description
Delete a run cache. This action removes the cache metadata stored in the service account, but doesn't delete the data in Amazon S3. You can access the cache data in Amazon S3, for inspection or to troubleshoot issues. You can remove old cache data using standard S3 Delete
operations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_run_cache/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_delete_run_cache(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] Run cache identifier for the cache you want to delete. |
Deletes a workflow run group
Description
Deletes a workflow run group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_run_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_delete_run_group(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The run group's ID. |
Deletes an access policy for the specified store
Description
Deletes an access policy for the specified store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_s3_access_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_delete_s3_access_policy(s3AccessPointArn)
Arguments
s3AccessPointArn |
[required] The S3 access point ARN that has the access policy. |
Deletes a sequence store
Description
Deletes a sequence store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_sequence_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_delete_sequence_store(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The sequence store's ID. |
Deletes a resource share
Description
Deletes a resource share. If you are the resource owner, the subscriber will no longer have access to the shared resource. If you are the subscriber, this operation deletes your access to the share.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_delete_share(shareId)
Arguments
shareId |
[required] The ID for the resource share to be deleted. |
Deletes a variant store
Description
Deletes a variant store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_variant_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_delete_variant_store(name, force = NULL)
Arguments
name |
[required] The store's name. |
force |
Whether to force deletion. |
Deletes a workflow
Description
Deletes a workflow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_workflow/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_delete_workflow(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The workflow's ID. |
Gets information about an annotation import job
Description
Gets information about an annotation import job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_annotation_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_annotation_import_job(jobId)
Arguments
jobId |
[required] The job's ID. |
Gets information about an annotation store
Description
Gets information about an annotation store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_annotation_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_annotation_store(name)
Arguments
name |
[required] The store's name. |
Retrieves the metadata for an annotation store version
Description
Retrieves the metadata for an annotation store version.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_annotation_store_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_annotation_store_version(name, versionName)
Arguments
name |
[required] The name given to an annotation store version to distinguish it from others. |
versionName |
[required] The name given to an annotation store version to distinguish it from others. |
Gets a file from a read set
Description
Gets a file from a read set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_read_set/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_read_set(id, sequenceStoreId, file = NULL, partNumber)
Arguments
id |
[required] The read set's ID. |
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The read set's sequence store ID. |
file |
The file to retrieve. |
partNumber |
[required] The part number to retrieve. |
Gets information about a read set activation job
Description
Gets information about a read set activation job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_read_set_activation_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_read_set_activation_job(id, sequenceStoreId)
Arguments
id |
[required] The job's ID. |
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The job's sequence store ID. |
Gets information about a read set export job
Description
Gets information about a read set export job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_read_set_export_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_read_set_export_job(sequenceStoreId, id)
Arguments
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The job's sequence store ID. |
id |
[required] The job's ID. |
Gets information about a read set import job
Description
Gets information about a read set import job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_read_set_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_read_set_import_job(id, sequenceStoreId)
Arguments
id |
[required] The job's ID. |
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The job's sequence store ID. |
Gets details about a read set
Description
Gets details about a read set.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_read_set_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_read_set_metadata(id, sequenceStoreId)
Arguments
id |
[required] The read set's ID. |
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The read set's sequence store ID. |
Gets a reference file
Description
Gets a reference file.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_reference/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_reference(
id,
referenceStoreId,
range = NULL,
partNumber,
file = NULL
)
Arguments
id |
[required] The reference's ID. |
referenceStoreId |
[required] The reference's store ID. |
range |
The range to retrieve. |
partNumber |
[required] The part number to retrieve. |
file |
The file to retrieve. |
Gets information about a reference import job
Description
Gets information about a reference import job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_reference_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_reference_import_job(id, referenceStoreId)
Arguments
id |
[required] The job's ID. |
referenceStoreId |
[required] The job's reference store ID. |
Gets information about a genome reference's metadata
Description
Gets information about a genome reference's metadata.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_reference_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_reference_metadata(id, referenceStoreId)
Arguments
id |
[required] The reference's ID. |
referenceStoreId |
[required] The reference's reference store ID. |
Gets information about a reference store
Description
Gets information about a reference store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_reference_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_reference_store(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The store's ID. |
Gets information about a workflow run
Description
Gets information about a workflow run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_run(id, export = NULL)
Arguments
id |
[required] The run's ID. |
export |
The run's export format. |
Retrieve the details for the specified run cache
Description
Retrieve the details for the specified run cache.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_run_cache/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_run_cache(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The identifier of the run cache to retrieve. |
Gets information about a workflow run group
Description
Gets information about a workflow run group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_run_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_run_group(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The group's ID. |
Gets information about a workflow run task
Description
Gets information about a workflow run task.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_run_task/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_run_task(id, taskId)
Arguments
id |
[required] The workflow run ID. |
taskId |
[required] The task's ID. |
Retrieves details about an access policy on a given store
Description
Retrieves details about an access policy on a given store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_s3_access_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_s3_access_policy(s3AccessPointArn)
Arguments
s3AccessPointArn |
[required] The S3 access point ARN that has the access policy. |
Gets information about a sequence store
Description
Gets information about a sequence store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_sequence_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_sequence_store(id)
Arguments
id |
[required] The store's ID. |
Retrieves the metadata for the specified resource share
Description
Retrieves the metadata for the specified resource share.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_share(shareId)
Arguments
shareId |
[required] The ID of the share. |
Gets information about a variant import job
Description
Gets information about a variant import job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_variant_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_variant_import_job(jobId)
Arguments
jobId |
[required] The job's ID. |
Gets information about a variant store
Description
Gets information about a variant store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_variant_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_variant_store(name)
Arguments
name |
[required] The store's name. |
Gets information about a workflow
Description
Gets information about a workflow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_workflow/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_get_workflow(id, type = NULL, export = NULL, workflowOwnerId = NULL)
Arguments
id |
[required] The workflow's ID. |
type |
The workflow's type. |
export |
The export format for the workflow. |
workflowOwnerId |
The ID of the workflow owner. |
Retrieves a list of annotation import jobs
Description
Retrieves a list of annotation import jobs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_annotation_import_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_annotation_import_jobs(
maxResults = NULL,
ids = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
filter = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of jobs to return in one page of results. |
ids |
IDs of annotation import jobs to retrieve. |
nextToken |
Specifies the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
filter |
A filter to apply to the list. |
Lists the versions of an annotation store
Description
Lists the versions of an annotation store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_annotation_store_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_annotation_store_versions(
name,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
filter = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
[required] The name of an annotation store. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of annotation store versions to return in one page of results. |
nextToken |
Specifies the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
filter |
A filter to apply to the list of annotation store versions. |
Retrieves a list of annotation stores
Description
Retrieves a list of annotation stores.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_annotation_stores/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_annotation_stores(
ids = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
filter = NULL
)
Arguments
ids |
IDs of stores to list. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of stores to return in one page of results. |
nextToken |
Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
filter |
A filter to apply to the list. |
Lists multipart read set uploads and for in progress uploads
Description
Lists multipart read set uploads and for in progress uploads. Once the upload is completed, a read set is created and the upload will no longer be returned in the response.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_multipart_read_set_uploads/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_multipart_read_set_uploads(
sequenceStoreId,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The Sequence Store ID used for the multipart uploads. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of multipart uploads returned in a page. |
nextToken |
Next token returned in the response of a previous ListMultipartReadSetUploads call. Used to get the next page of results. |
Retrieves a list of read set activation jobs
Description
Retrieves a list of read set activation jobs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_read_set_activation_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_read_set_activation_jobs(
sequenceStoreId,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
filter = NULL
)
Arguments
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The read set's sequence store ID. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of read set activation jobs to return in one page of results. |
nextToken |
Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
filter |
A filter to apply to the list. |
Retrieves a list of read set export jobs
Description
Retrieves a list of read set export jobs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_read_set_export_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_read_set_export_jobs(
sequenceStoreId,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
filter = NULL
)
Arguments
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The jobs' sequence store ID. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of jobs to return in one page of results. |
nextToken |
Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
filter |
A filter to apply to the list. |
Retrieves a list of read set import jobs
Description
Retrieves a list of read set import jobs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_read_set_import_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_read_set_import_jobs(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
sequenceStoreId,
filter = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of jobs to return in one page of results. |
nextToken |
Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The jobs' sequence store ID. |
filter |
A filter to apply to the list. |
This operation will list all parts in a requested multipart upload for a sequence store
Description
This operation will list all parts in a requested multipart upload for a sequence store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_read_set_upload_parts/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_read_set_upload_parts(
sequenceStoreId,
uploadId,
partSource,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
filter = NULL
)
Arguments
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The Sequence Store ID used for the multipart uploads. |
uploadId |
[required] The ID for the initiated multipart upload. |
partSource |
[required] The source file for the upload part. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of read set upload parts returned in a page. |
nextToken |
Next token returned in the response of a previous ListReadSetUploadPartsRequest call. Used to get the next page of results. |
filter |
Attributes used to filter for a specific subset of read set part uploads. |
Retrieves a list of read sets
Description
Retrieves a list of read sets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_read_sets/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_read_sets(
sequenceStoreId,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
filter = NULL
)
Arguments
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The jobs' sequence store ID. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of read sets to return in one page of results. |
nextToken |
Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
filter |
A filter to apply to the list. |
Retrieves a list of reference import jobs
Description
Retrieves a list of reference import jobs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_reference_import_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_reference_import_jobs(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
referenceStoreId,
filter = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of jobs to return in one page of results. |
nextToken |
Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
referenceStoreId |
[required] The job's reference store ID. |
filter |
A filter to apply to the list. |
Retrieves a list of reference stores
Description
Retrieves a list of reference stores.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_reference_stores/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_reference_stores(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL, filter = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of stores to return in one page of results. |
nextToken |
Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
filter |
A filter to apply to the list. |
Retrieves a list of references
Description
Retrieves a list of references.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_references/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_references(
referenceStoreId,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
filter = NULL
)
Arguments
referenceStoreId |
[required] The references' reference store ID. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of references to return in one page of results. |
nextToken |
Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
filter |
A filter to apply to the list. |
Retrieves a list of your run caches
Description
Retrieves a list of your run caches.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_run_caches/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_run_caches(maxResults = NULL, startingToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
startingToken |
Optional pagination token returned from a prior call to the
|
Retrieves a list of run groups
Description
Retrieves a list of run groups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_run_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_run_groups(name = NULL, startingToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)
Arguments
name |
The run groups' name. |
startingToken |
Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of run groups to return in one page of results. |
Retrieves a list of tasks for a run
Description
Retrieves a list of tasks for a run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_run_tasks/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_run_tasks(
id,
status = NULL,
startingToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
id |
[required] The run's ID. |
status |
Filter the list by status. |
startingToken |
Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of run tasks to return in one page of results. |
Retrieves a list of runs
Description
Retrieves a list of runs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_runs/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_runs(
name = NULL,
runGroupId = NULL,
startingToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
status = NULL
)
Arguments
name |
Filter the list by run name. |
runGroupId |
Filter the list by run group ID. |
startingToken |
Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of runs to return in one page of results. |
status |
The status of a run. |
Retrieves a list of sequence stores
Description
Retrieves a list of sequence stores.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_sequence_stores/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_sequence_stores(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL, filter = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of stores to return in one page of results. |
nextToken |
Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
filter |
A filter to apply to the list. |
Retrieves the resource shares associated with an account
Description
Retrieves the resource shares associated with an account. Use the filter parameter to retrieve a specific subset of the shares.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_shares/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_shares(
resourceOwner,
filter = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceOwner |
[required] The account that owns the resource shares. |
filter |
Attributes that you use to filter for a specific subset of resource shares. |
nextToken |
Next token returned in the response of a previous ListReadSetUploadPartsRequest call. Used to get the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of shares to return in one page of results. |
Retrieves a list of tags for a resource
Description
Retrieves a list of tags for a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The resource's ARN. |
Retrieves a list of variant import jobs
Description
Retrieves a list of variant import jobs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_variant_import_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_variant_import_jobs(
maxResults = NULL,
ids = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
filter = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of import jobs to return in one page of results. |
ids |
A list of job IDs. |
nextToken |
Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
filter |
A filter to apply to the list. |
Retrieves a list of variant stores
Description
Retrieves a list of variant stores.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_variant_stores/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_variant_stores(
maxResults = NULL,
ids = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
filter = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of stores to return in one page of results. |
ids |
A list of store IDs. |
nextToken |
Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
filter |
A filter to apply to the list. |
Retrieves a list of workflows
Description
Retrieves a list of workflows.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_workflows/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_list_workflows(
type = NULL,
name = NULL,
startingToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
type |
Filter the list by workflow type. |
name |
Filter the list by workflow name. |
startingToken |
Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of workflows to return in one page of results. |
Adds an access policy to the specified store
Description
Adds an access policy to the specified store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_put_s3_access_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_put_s3_access_policy(s3AccessPointArn, s3AccessPolicy)
Arguments
s3AccessPointArn |
[required] The S3 access point ARN where you want to put the access policy. |
s3AccessPolicy |
[required] The resource policy that controls S3 access to the store. |
Starts an annotation import job
Description
Starts an annotation import job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_start_annotation_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_start_annotation_import_job(
destinationName,
roleArn,
items,
versionName = NULL,
formatOptions = NULL,
runLeftNormalization = NULL,
annotationFields = NULL
)
Arguments
destinationName |
[required] A destination annotation store for the job. |
roleArn |
[required] A service role for the job. |
items |
[required] Items to import. |
versionName |
The name of the annotation store version. |
formatOptions |
Formatting options for the annotation file. |
runLeftNormalization |
The job's left normalization setting. |
annotationFields |
The annotation schema generated by the parsed annotation data. |
Activates an archived read set
Description
Activates an archived read set. To reduce storage charges, Amazon Omics archives unused read sets after 30 days.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_start_read_set_activation_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_start_read_set_activation_job(
sequenceStoreId,
clientToken = NULL,
sources
)
Arguments
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The read set's sequence store ID. |
clientToken |
To ensure that jobs don't run multiple times, specify a unique token for each job. |
sources |
[required] The job's source files. |
Exports a read set to Amazon S3
Description
Exports a read set to Amazon S3.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_start_read_set_export_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_start_read_set_export_job(
sequenceStoreId,
destination,
roleArn,
clientToken = NULL,
sources
)
Arguments
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The read set's sequence store ID. |
destination |
[required] A location for exported files in Amazon S3. |
roleArn |
[required] A service role for the job. |
clientToken |
To ensure that jobs don't run multiple times, specify a unique token for each job. |
sources |
[required] The job's source files. |
Starts a read set import job
Description
Starts a read set import job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_start_read_set_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_start_read_set_import_job(
sequenceStoreId,
roleArn,
clientToken = NULL,
sources
)
Arguments
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The read set's sequence store ID. |
roleArn |
[required] A service role for the job. |
clientToken |
To ensure that jobs don't run multiple times, specify a unique token for each job. |
sources |
[required] The job's source files. |
Starts a reference import job
Description
Starts a reference import job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_start_reference_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_start_reference_import_job(
referenceStoreId,
roleArn,
clientToken = NULL,
sources
)
Arguments
referenceStoreId |
[required] The job's reference store ID. |
roleArn |
[required] A service role for the job. |
clientToken |
To ensure that jobs don't run multiple times, specify a unique token for each job. |
sources |
[required] The job's source files. |
Starts a workflow run
Description
Starts a workflow run. To duplicate a run, specify the run's ID and a role ARN. The remaining parameters are copied from the previous run.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_start_run/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_start_run(
workflowId = NULL,
workflowType = NULL,
runId = NULL,
roleArn,
name = NULL,
cacheId = NULL,
cacheBehavior = NULL,
runGroupId = NULL,
priority = NULL,
parameters = NULL,
storageCapacity = NULL,
outputUri = NULL,
logLevel = NULL,
tags = NULL,
requestId,
retentionMode = NULL,
storageType = NULL,
workflowOwnerId = NULL
)
Arguments
workflowId |
The run's workflow ID. |
workflowType |
The run's workflow type. |
runId |
The ID of a run to duplicate. |
roleArn |
[required] A service role for the run. |
name |
A name for the run. |
cacheId |
Identifier of the cache associated with this run. If you don't specify a cache ID, no task outputs are cached for this run. |
cacheBehavior |
The cache behavior for the run. You specify this value if you want to override the default behavior for the cache. You had set the default value when you created the cache. For more information, see Run cache behavior in the AWS HealthOmics User Guide. |
runGroupId |
The run's group ID. |
priority |
A priority for the run. |
parameters |
Parameters for the run. |
storageCapacity |
A storage capacity for the run in gibibytes. This field is not required if the storage type is dynamic (the system ignores any value that you enter). |
outputUri |
An output URI for the run. |
logLevel |
A log level for the run. |
tags |
Tags for the run. |
requestId |
[required] To ensure that requests don't run multiple times, specify a unique ID for each request. |
retentionMode |
The retention mode for the run. The default value is RETAIN. HealthOmics stores a fixed number of runs that are available to the
console and API. In the default mode (RETAIN), you need to remove runs
manually when the number of run exceeds the maximum. If you set the
retention mode to For more information about retention mode, see Specifying run retention mode in the AWS HealthOmics User Guide. |
storageType |
The run's storage type. By default, the run uses STATIC storage type, which allocates a fixed amount of storage. If you set the storage type to DYNAMIC, HealthOmics dynamically scales the storage up or down, based on file system utilization. |
workflowOwnerId |
The ID of the workflow owner. |
Starts a variant import job
Description
Starts a variant import job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_start_variant_import_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_start_variant_import_job(
destinationName,
roleArn,
items,
runLeftNormalization = NULL,
annotationFields = NULL
)
Arguments
destinationName |
[required] The destination variant store for the job. |
roleArn |
[required] A service role for the job. |
items |
[required] Items to import. |
runLeftNormalization |
The job's left normalization setting. |
annotationFields |
The annotation schema generated by the parsed annotation data. |
Tags a resource
Description
Tags a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The resource's ARN. |
tags |
[required] Tags for the resource. |
Removes tags from a resource
Description
Removes tags from a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The resource's ARN. |
tagKeys |
[required] Keys of tags to remove. |
Updates an annotation store
Description
Updates an annotation store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_update_annotation_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_update_annotation_store(name, description = NULL)
Arguments
name |
[required] A name for the store. |
description |
A description for the store. |
Updates the description of an annotation store version
Description
Updates the description of an annotation store version.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_update_annotation_store_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_update_annotation_store_version(name, versionName, description = NULL)
Arguments
name |
[required] The name of an annotation store. |
versionName |
[required] The name of an annotation store version. |
description |
The description of an annotation store. |
Update a run cache
Description
Update a run cache.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_update_run_cache/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_update_run_cache(
cacheBehavior = NULL,
description = NULL,
id,
name = NULL
)
Arguments
cacheBehavior |
Update the default run cache behavior. |
description |
Update the run cache description. |
id |
[required] The identifier of the run cache you want to update. |
name |
Update the name of the run cache. |
Updates a run group
Description
Updates a run group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_update_run_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_update_run_group(
id,
name = NULL,
maxCpus = NULL,
maxRuns = NULL,
maxDuration = NULL,
maxGpus = NULL
)
Arguments
id |
[required] The group's ID. |
name |
A name for the group. |
maxCpus |
The maximum number of CPUs to use. |
maxRuns |
The maximum number of concurrent runs for the group. |
maxDuration |
A maximum run time for the group in minutes. |
maxGpus |
The maximum GPUs that can be used by a run group. |
Update one or more parameters for the sequence store
Description
Update one or more parameters for the sequence store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_update_sequence_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_update_sequence_store(
id,
name = NULL,
description = NULL,
clientToken = NULL,
fallbackLocation = NULL,
propagatedSetLevelTags = NULL,
s3AccessConfig = NULL
)
Arguments
id |
[required] The ID of the sequence store. |
name |
A name for the sequence store. |
description |
A description for the sequence store. |
clientToken |
To ensure that requests don't run multiple times, specify a unique token for each request. |
fallbackLocation |
The S3 URI of a bucket and folder to store Read Sets that fail to upload. |
propagatedSetLevelTags |
The tags keys to propagate to the S3 objects associated with read sets in the sequence store. |
s3AccessConfig |
S3 access configuration parameters. |
Updates a variant store
Description
Updates a variant store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_update_variant_store/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_update_variant_store(name, description = NULL)
Arguments
name |
[required] A name for the store. |
description |
A description for the store. |
Updates a workflow
Description
Updates a workflow.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_update_workflow/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_update_workflow(id, name = NULL, description = NULL)
Arguments
id |
[required] The workflow's ID. |
name |
A name for the workflow. |
description |
A description for the workflow. |
This operation uploads a specific part of a read set
Description
This operation uploads a specific part of a read set. If you upload a new part using a previously used part number, the previously uploaded part will be overwritten.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_upload_read_set_part/ for full documentation.
Usage
omics_upload_read_set_part(
sequenceStoreId,
uploadId,
partSource,
partNumber,
payload
)
Arguments
sequenceStoreId |
[required] The Sequence Store ID used for the multipart upload. |
uploadId |
[required] The ID for the initiated multipart upload. |
partSource |
[required] The source file for an upload part. |
partNumber |
[required] The number of the part being uploaded. |
payload |
[required] The read set data to upload for a part. |
Amazon Recycle Bin
Description
This is the Recycle Bin API Reference. This documentation provides descriptions and syntax for each of the actions and data types in Recycle Bin.
Recycle Bin is a resource recovery feature that enables you to restore accidentally deleted snapshots and EBS-backed AMIs. When using Recycle Bin, if your resources are deleted, they are retained in the Recycle Bin for a time period that you specify.
You can restore a resource from the Recycle Bin at any time before its retention period expires. After you restore a resource from the Recycle Bin, the resource is removed from the Recycle Bin, and you can then use it in the same way you use any other resource of that type in your account. If the retention period expires and the resource is not restored, the resource is permanently deleted from the Recycle Bin and is no longer available for recovery. For more information about Recycle Bin, see Recycle Bin in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide.
Usage
recyclebin(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- recyclebin( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_rule | Creates a Recycle Bin retention rule |
delete_rule | Deletes a Recycle Bin retention rule |
get_rule | Gets information about a Recycle Bin retention rule |
list_rules | Lists the Recycle Bin retention rules in the Region |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists the tags assigned to a retention rule |
lock_rule | Locks a Region-level retention rule |
tag_resource | Assigns tags to the specified retention rule |
unlock_rule | Unlocks a retention rule |
untag_resource | Unassigns a tag from a retention rule |
update_rule | Updates an existing Recycle Bin retention rule |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- recyclebin()
svc$create_rule(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates a Recycle Bin retention rule
Description
Creates a Recycle Bin retention rule. You can create two types of retention rules:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_create_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
recyclebin_create_rule(
RetentionPeriod,
Description = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
ResourceType,
ResourceTags = NULL,
LockConfiguration = NULL,
ExcludeResourceTags = NULL
)
Arguments
RetentionPeriod |
[required] Information about the retention period for which the retention rule is to retain resources. |
Description |
The retention rule description. |
Tags |
Information about the tags to assign to the retention rule. |
ResourceType |
[required] The resource type to be retained by the retention rule. Currently, only
Amazon EBS snapshots and EBS-backed AMIs are supported. To retain
snapshots, specify |
ResourceTags |
[Tag-level retention rules only] Specifies the resource tags to use to identify resources that are to be retained by a tag-level retention rule. For tag-level retention rules, only deleted resources, of the specified resource type, that have one or more of the specified tag key and value pairs are retained. If a resource is deleted, but it does not have any of the specified tag key and value pairs, it is immediately deleted without being retained by the retention rule. You can add the same tag key and value pair to a maximum or five retention rules. To create a Region-level retention rule, omit this parameter. A Region-level retention rule does not have any resource tags specified. It retains all deleted resources of the specified resource type in the Region in which the rule is created, even if the resources are not tagged. |
LockConfiguration |
Information about the retention rule lock configuration. |
ExcludeResourceTags |
[Region-level retention rules only] Specifies the exclusion tags to use to identify resources that are to be excluded, or ignored, by a Region-level retention rule. Resources that have any of these tags are not retained by the retention rule upon deletion. You can't specify exclusion tags for tag-level retention rules. |
Deletes a Recycle Bin retention rule
Description
Deletes a Recycle Bin retention rule. For more information, see Delete Recycle Bin retention rules in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_delete_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
recyclebin_delete_rule(Identifier)
Arguments
Identifier |
[required] The unique ID of the retention rule. |
Gets information about a Recycle Bin retention rule
Description
Gets information about a Recycle Bin retention rule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_get_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
recyclebin_get_rule(Identifier)
Arguments
Identifier |
[required] The unique ID of the retention rule. |
Lists the Recycle Bin retention rules in the Region
Description
Lists the Recycle Bin retention rules in the Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_list_rules/ for full documentation.
Usage
recyclebin_list_rules(
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
ResourceType,
ResourceTags = NULL,
LockState = NULL,
ExcludeResourceTags = NULL
)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return with a single call. To retrieve
the remaining results, make another call with the returned |
NextToken |
The token for the next page of results. |
ResourceType |
[required] The resource type retained by the retention rule. Only retention rules
that retain the specified resource type are listed. Currently, only
Amazon EBS snapshots and EBS-backed AMIs are supported. To list
retention rules that retain snapshots, specify |
ResourceTags |
[Tag-level retention rules only] Information about the resource tags used to identify resources that are retained by the retention rule. |
LockState |
The lock state of the retention rules to list. Only retention rules with the specified lock state are returned. |
ExcludeResourceTags |
[Region-level retention rules only] Information about the exclusion tags used to identify resources that are to be excluded, or ignored, by the retention rule. |
Lists the tags assigned to a retention rule
Description
Lists the tags assigned to a retention rule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
recyclebin_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the retention rule. |
Locks a Region-level retention rule
Description
Locks a Region-level retention rule. A locked retention rule can't be modified or deleted.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_lock_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
recyclebin_lock_rule(Identifier, LockConfiguration)
Arguments
Identifier |
[required] The unique ID of the retention rule. |
LockConfiguration |
[required] Information about the retention rule lock configuration. |
Assigns tags to the specified retention rule
Description
Assigns tags to the specified retention rule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
recyclebin_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the retention rule. |
Tags |
[required] Information about the tags to assign to the retention rule. |
Unlocks a retention rule
Description
Unlocks a retention rule. After a retention rule is unlocked, it can be modified or deleted only after the unlock delay period expires.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_unlock_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
recyclebin_unlock_rule(Identifier)
Arguments
Identifier |
[required] The unique ID of the retention rule. |
Unassigns a tag from a retention rule
Description
Unassigns a tag from a retention rule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
recyclebin_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the retention rule. |
TagKeys |
[required] The tag keys of the tags to unassign. All tags that have the specified tag key are unassigned. |
Updates an existing Recycle Bin retention rule
Description
Updates an existing Recycle Bin retention rule. You can update a retention rule's description, resource tags, and retention period at any time after creation. You can't update a retention rule's resource type after creation. For more information, see Update Recycle Bin retention rules in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_update_rule/ for full documentation.
Usage
recyclebin_update_rule(
Identifier,
RetentionPeriod = NULL,
Description = NULL,
ResourceType = NULL,
ResourceTags = NULL,
ExcludeResourceTags = NULL
)
Arguments
Identifier |
[required] The unique ID of the retention rule. |
RetentionPeriod |
Information about the retention period for which the retention rule is to retain resources. |
Description |
The retention rule description. |
ResourceType |
This parameter is currently not supported. You can't update a retention rule's resource type after creation. |
ResourceTags |
[Tag-level retention rules only] Specifies the resource tags to use to identify resources that are to be retained by a tag-level retention rule. For tag-level retention rules, only deleted resources, of the specified resource type, that have one or more of the specified tag key and value pairs are retained. If a resource is deleted, but it does not have any of the specified tag key and value pairs, it is immediately deleted without being retained by the retention rule. You can add the same tag key and value pair to a maximum or five retention rules. To create a Region-level retention rule, omit this parameter. A Region-level retention rule does not have any resource tags specified. It retains all deleted resources of the specified resource type in the Region in which the rule is created, even if the resources are not tagged. |
ExcludeResourceTags |
[Region-level retention rules only] Specifies the exclusion tags to use to identify resources that are to be excluded, or ignored, by a Region-level retention rule. Resources that have any of these tags are not retained by the retention rule upon deletion. You can't specify exclusion tags for tag-level retention rules. |
Objects exported from other packages
Description
These objects are imported from other packages. Follow the links below to see their documentation.
- paws.common
config
,credentials
,creds
,list_paginators
,paginate
,paginate_lapply
,paginate_sapply
,paws_stream_parser
Amazon Simple Storage Service
Description
Amazon Simple Storage Service
Usage
s3(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- s3( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
abort_multipart_upload | This operation aborts a multipart upload |
complete_multipart_upload | Completes a multipart upload by assembling previously uploaded parts |
copy_object | Creates a copy of an object that is already stored in Amazon S3 |
create_bucket | This action creates an Amazon S3 bucket |
create_bucket_metadata_table_configuration | Creates a metadata table configuration for a general purpose bucket |
create_multipart_upload | This action initiates a multipart upload and returns an upload ID |
create_session | Creates a session that establishes temporary security credentials to support fast authentication and authorization for the Zonal endpoint API operations on directory buckets |
delete_bucket | Deletes the S3 bucket |
delete_bucket_analytics_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
delete_bucket_cors | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
delete_bucket_encryption | This implementation of the DELETE action resets the default encryption for the bucket as server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed keys (SSE-S3) |
delete_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
delete_bucket_inventory_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
delete_bucket_lifecycle | Deletes the lifecycle configuration from the specified bucket |
delete_bucket_metadata_table_configuration | Deletes a metadata table configuration from a general purpose bucket |
delete_bucket_metrics_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
delete_bucket_ownership_controls | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
delete_bucket_policy | Deletes the policy of a specified bucket |
delete_bucket_replication | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
delete_bucket_tagging | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
delete_bucket_website | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
delete_object | Removes an object from a bucket |
delete_objects | This operation enables you to delete multiple objects from a bucket using a single HTTP request |
delete_object_tagging | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
delete_public_access_block | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
download_file | Download a file from S3 and store it at a specified file location |
generate_presigned_url | @title Generate a presigned url given a client, its method, and arguments |
get_bucket_accelerate_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_acl | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_analytics_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_cors | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_encryption | Returns the default encryption configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket |
get_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_inventory_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_lifecycle | For an updated version of this API, see GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration |
get_bucket_lifecycle_configuration | Returns the lifecycle configuration information set on the bucket |
get_bucket_location | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_logging | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_metadata_table_configuration | Retrieves the metadata table configuration for a general purpose bucket |
get_bucket_metrics_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_notification | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_notification_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_ownership_controls | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_policy | Returns the policy of a specified bucket |
get_bucket_policy_status | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_replication | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_request_payment | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_tagging | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_versioning | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_bucket_website | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_object | Retrieves an object from Amazon S3 |
get_object_acl | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_object_attributes | Retrieves all the metadata from an object without returning the object itself |
get_object_legal_hold | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_object_lock_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_object_retention | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_object_tagging | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_object_torrent | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
get_public_access_block | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
head_bucket | You can use this operation to determine if a bucket exists and if you have permission to access it |
head_object | The HEAD operation retrieves metadata from an object without returning the object itself |
list_bucket_analytics_configurations | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
list_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configurations | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
list_bucket_inventory_configurations | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
list_bucket_metrics_configurations | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
list_buckets | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
list_directory_buckets | Returns a list of all Amazon S3 directory buckets owned by the authenticated sender of the request |
list_multipart_uploads | This operation lists in-progress multipart uploads in a bucket |
list_objects | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
list_objects_v2 | Returns some or all (up to 1,000) of the objects in a bucket with each request |
list_object_versions | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
list_parts | Lists the parts that have been uploaded for a specific multipart upload |
put_bucket_accelerate_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_bucket_acl | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_bucket_analytics_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_bucket_cors | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_bucket_encryption | This operation configures default encryption and Amazon S3 Bucket Keys for an existing bucket |
put_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_bucket_inventory_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_bucket_lifecycle | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_bucket_lifecycle_configuration | Creates a new lifecycle configuration for the bucket or replaces an existing lifecycle configuration |
put_bucket_logging | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_bucket_metrics_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_bucket_notification | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_bucket_notification_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_bucket_ownership_controls | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_bucket_policy | Applies an Amazon S3 bucket policy to an Amazon S3 bucket |
put_bucket_replication | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_bucket_request_payment | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_bucket_tagging | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_bucket_versioning | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_bucket_website | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_object | Adds an object to a bucket |
put_object_acl | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_object_legal_hold | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_object_lock_configuration | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_object_retention | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_object_tagging | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
put_public_access_block | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
restore_object | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
select_object_content | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
upload_part | Uploads a part in a multipart upload |
upload_part_copy | Uploads a part by copying data from an existing object as data source |
write_get_object_response | This operation is not supported for directory buckets |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- s3()
# The following example aborts a multipart upload.
svc$abort_multipart_upload(
Bucket = "examplebucket",
Key = "bigobject",
UploadId = "xadcOB_7YPBOJuoFiQ9cz4P3Pe6FIZwO4f7wN93uHsNBEw97pl5eNwzExg0LA..."
)
## End(Not run)
This operation aborts a multipart upload
Description
This operation aborts a multipart upload. After a multipart upload is aborted, no additional parts can be uploaded using that upload ID. The storage consumed by any previously uploaded parts will be freed. However, if any part uploads are currently in progress, those part uploads might or might not succeed. As a result, it might be necessary to abort a given multipart upload multiple times in order to completely free all storage consumed by all parts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_abort_multipart_upload/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_abort_multipart_upload(
Bucket,
Key,
UploadId,
RequestPayer = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
IfMatchInitiatedTime = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name to which the upload was taking place. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
Key |
[required] Key of the object for which the multipart upload was initiated. |
UploadId |
[required] Upload ID that identifies the multipart upload. |
RequestPayer |
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
IfMatchInitiatedTime |
If present, this header aborts an in progress multipart upload only if
it was initiated on the provided timestamp. If the initiated timestamp
of the multipart upload does not match the provided value, the operation
returns a This functionality is only supported for directory buckets. |
Completes a multipart upload by assembling previously uploaded parts
Description
Completes a multipart upload by assembling previously uploaded parts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_complete_multipart_upload/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_complete_multipart_upload(
Bucket,
Key,
MultipartUpload = NULL,
UploadId,
ChecksumCRC32 = NULL,
ChecksumCRC32C = NULL,
ChecksumCRC64NVME = NULL,
ChecksumSHA1 = NULL,
ChecksumSHA256 = NULL,
ChecksumType = NULL,
MpuObjectSize = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
IfMatch = NULL,
IfNoneMatch = NULL,
SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
SSECustomerKey = NULL,
SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] Name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
Key |
[required] Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated. |
MultipartUpload |
The container for the multipart upload request information. |
UploadId |
[required] ID for the initiated multipart upload. |
ChecksumCRC32 |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header
specifies the Base64 encoded, 32-bit |
ChecksumCRC32C |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header
specifies the Base64 encoded, 32-bit |
ChecksumCRC64NVME |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header
specifies the Base64 encoded, 64-bit |
ChecksumSHA1 |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header
specifies the Base64 encoded, 160-bit |
ChecksumSHA256 |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header
specifies the Base64 encoded, 256-bit |
ChecksumType |
This header specifies the checksum type of the object, which determines
how part-level checksums are combined to create an object-level checksum
for multipart objects. You can use this header as a data integrity check
to verify that the checksum type that is received is the same checksum
that was specified. If the checksum type doesn’t match the checksum type
that was specified for the object during the
|
MpuObjectSize |
The expected total object size of the multipart upload request. If
there’s a mismatch between the specified object size value and the
actual object size value, it results in an |
RequestPayer |
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
IfMatch |
Uploads the object only if the ETag (entity tag) value provided during
the WRITE operation matches the ETag of the object in S3. If the ETag
values do not match, the operation returns a If a conflicting operation occurs during the upload S3 returns a
Expects the ETag value as a string. For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232, or Conditional requests in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
IfNoneMatch |
Uploads the object only if the object key name does not already exist in
the bucket specified. Otherwise, Amazon S3 returns a
If a conflicting operation occurs during the upload S3 returns a
Expects the '*' (asterisk) character. For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232, or Conditional requests in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
SSECustomerAlgorithm |
The server-side encryption (SSE) algorithm used to encrypt the object. This parameter is required only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm or if your bucket policy requires the use of SSE-C. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerKey |
The server-side encryption (SSE) customer managed key. This parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerKeyMD5 |
The MD5 server-side encryption (SSE) customer managed key. This parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
Creates a copy of an object that is already stored in Amazon S3
Description
Creates a copy of an object that is already stored in Amazon S3.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_copy_object/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_copy_object(
ACL = NULL,
Bucket,
CacheControl = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
ContentDisposition = NULL,
ContentEncoding = NULL,
ContentLanguage = NULL,
ContentType = NULL,
CopySource,
CopySourceIfMatch = NULL,
CopySourceIfModifiedSince = NULL,
CopySourceIfNoneMatch = NULL,
CopySourceIfUnmodifiedSince = NULL,
Expires = NULL,
GrantFullControl = NULL,
GrantRead = NULL,
GrantReadACP = NULL,
GrantWriteACP = NULL,
Key,
Metadata = NULL,
MetadataDirective = NULL,
TaggingDirective = NULL,
ServerSideEncryption = NULL,
StorageClass = NULL,
WebsiteRedirectLocation = NULL,
SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
SSECustomerKey = NULL,
SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
SSEKMSKeyId = NULL,
SSEKMSEncryptionContext = NULL,
BucketKeyEnabled = NULL,
CopySourceSSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
CopySourceSSECustomerKey = NULL,
CopySourceSSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
Tagging = NULL,
ObjectLockMode = NULL,
ObjectLockRetainUntilDate = NULL,
ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
ExpectedSourceBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
ACL |
The canned access control list (ACL) to apply to the object. When you copy an object, the ACL metadata is not preserved and is set to
If the destination bucket that you're copying objects to uses the bucket
owner enforced setting for S3 Object Ownership, ACLs are disabled and no
longer affect permissions. Buckets that use this setting only accept
|
Bucket |
[required] The name of the destination bucket. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Copying objects across different Amazon Web Services Regions isn't
supported when the source or destination bucket is in Amazon Web
Services Local Zones. The source and destination buckets must have the
same parent Amazon Web Services Region. Otherwise, you get an HTTP
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must use the Outpost bucket access point ARN or the access point alias
for the destination bucket. You can only copy objects within the same
Outpost bucket. It's not supported to copy objects across different
Amazon Web Services Outposts, between buckets on the same Outposts, or
between Outposts buckets and any other bucket types. For more
information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts?
in the S3 on Outposts guide. When you use this action with S3 on
Outposts through the REST API, you must direct requests to the S3 on
Outposts hostname, in the format
|
CacheControl |
Specifies the caching behavior along the request/reply chain. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm that you want Amazon S3 to use to create the checksum for the object. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When you copy an object, if the source object has a checksum, that
checksum value will be copied to the new object by default. If the
For directory buckets, when you use Amazon Web Services SDKs, |
ContentDisposition |
Specifies presentational information for the object. Indicates whether an object should be displayed in a web browser or downloaded as a file. It allows specifying the desired filename for the downloaded file. |
ContentEncoding |
Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the Content-Type header field. For directory buckets, only the |
ContentLanguage |
The language the content is in. |
ContentType |
A standard MIME type that describes the format of the object data. |
CopySource |
[required] Specifies the source object for the copy operation. The source object can be up to 5 GB. If the source object is an object that was uploaded by using a multipart upload, the object copy will be a single part object after the source object is copied to the destination bucket. You specify the value of the copy source in one of two formats, depending on whether you want to access the source object through an access point:
If your source bucket versioning is enabled, the If you enable versioning on the destination bucket, Amazon S3 generates
a unique version ID for the copied object. This version ID is different
from the version ID of the source object. Amazon S3 returns the version
ID of the copied object in the If you do not enable versioning or suspend it on the destination bucket,
the version ID that Amazon S3 generates in the Directory buckets - S3 Versioning isn't enabled and supported for directory buckets. |
CopySourceIfMatch |
Copies the object if its entity tag (ETag) matches the specified tag. If both the
|
CopySourceIfModifiedSince |
Copies the object if it has been modified since the specified time. If both the
|
CopySourceIfNoneMatch |
Copies the object if its entity tag (ETag) is different than the specified ETag. If both the
|
CopySourceIfUnmodifiedSince |
Copies the object if it hasn't been modified since the specified time. If both the
|
Expires |
The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable. |
GrantFullControl |
Gives the grantee READ, READ_ACP, and WRITE_ACP permissions on the object.
|
GrantRead |
Allows grantee to read the object data and its metadata.
|
GrantReadACP |
Allows grantee to read the object ACL.
|
GrantWriteACP |
Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable object.
|
Key |
[required] The key of the destination object. |
Metadata |
A map of metadata to store with the object in S3. |
MetadataDirective |
Specifies whether the metadata is copied from the source object or
replaced with metadata that's provided in the request. When copying an
object, you can preserve all metadata (the default) or specify new
metadata. If this header isn’t specified, General purpose bucket - For general purpose buckets, when you grant
permissions, you can use the
|
TaggingDirective |
Specifies whether the object tag-set is copied from the source object or replaced with the tag-set that's provided in the request. The default value is Directory buckets - For directory buckets in a
Because only the empty tag-set is supported for directory buckets in a
|
ServerSideEncryption |
The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in
Amazon S3. Unrecognized or unsupported values won’t write a destination
object and will receive a Amazon S3 automatically encrypts all new objects that are copied to an S3 bucket. When copying an object, if you don't specify encryption information in your copy request, the encryption setting of the target object is set to the default encryption configuration of the destination bucket. By default, all buckets have a base level of encryption configuration that uses server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed keys (SSE-S3). If the destination bucket has a different default encryption configuration, Amazon S3 uses the corresponding encryption key to encrypt the target object copy. With server-side encryption, Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes your data to disks in its data centers and decrypts the data when you access it. For more information about server-side encryption, see Using Server-Side Encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide. General purpose buckets
Directory buckets
|
StorageClass |
If the
You can use the Before using an object as a source object for the copy operation, you must restore a copy of it if it meets any of the following conditions:
For more information, see |
WebsiteRedirectLocation |
If the destination bucket is configured as a website, redirects requests
for this object copy to another object in the same bucket or to an
external URL. Amazon S3 stores the value of this header in the object
metadata. This value is unique to each object and is not copied when
using the This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerAlgorithm |
Specifies the algorithm to use when encrypting the object (for example,
When you perform a This functionality is not supported when the destination bucket is a directory bucket. |
SSECustomerKey |
Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in
encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is
discarded. Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be
appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the
This functionality is not supported when the destination bucket is a directory bucket. |
SSECustomerKeyMD5 |
Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error. This functionality is not supported when the destination bucket is a directory bucket. |
SSEKMSKeyId |
Specifies the KMS key ID (Key ID, Key ARN, or Key Alias) to use for object encryption. All GET and PUT requests for an object protected by KMS will fail if they're not made via SSL or using SigV4. For information about configuring any of the officially supported Amazon Web Services SDKs and Amazon Web Services CLI, see Specifying the Signature Version in Request Authentication in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Directory buckets - To encrypt data using SSE-KMS, it's recommended
to specify the |
SSEKMSEncryptionContext |
Specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context as an additional encryption context to use for the destination object encryption. The value of this header is a base64-encoded UTF-8 string holding JSON with the encryption context key-value pairs. General purpose buckets - This value must be explicitly added to
specify encryption context for Directory buckets - You can optionally provide an explicit encryption context value. The value must match the default encryption context - the bucket Amazon Resource Name (ARN). An additional encryption context value is not supported. |
BucketKeyEnabled |
Specifies whether Amazon S3 should use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with server-side encryption using Key Management Service (KMS) keys (SSE-KMS). If a target object uses SSE-KMS, you can enable an S3 Bucket Key for the object. Setting this header to For more information, see Amazon S3 Bucket Keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Directory buckets - S3 Bucket Keys aren't supported, when you copy
SSE-KMS encrypted objects from general purpose buckets to directory
buckets, from directory buckets to general purpose buckets, or between
directory buckets, through |
CopySourceSSECustomerAlgorithm |
Specifies the algorithm to use when decrypting the source object (for
example, If the source object for the copy is stored in Amazon S3 using SSE-C, you must provide the necessary encryption information in your request so that Amazon S3 can decrypt the object for copying. This functionality is not supported when the source object is in a directory bucket. |
CopySourceSSECustomerKey |
Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use to decrypt the source object. The encryption key provided in this header must be the same one that was used when the source object was created. If the source object for the copy is stored in Amazon S3 using SSE-C, you must provide the necessary encryption information in your request so that Amazon S3 can decrypt the object for copying. This functionality is not supported when the source object is in a directory bucket. |
CopySourceSSECustomerKeyMD5 |
Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error. If the source object for the copy is stored in Amazon S3 using SSE-C, you must provide the necessary encryption information in your request so that Amazon S3 can decrypt the object for copying. This functionality is not supported when the source object is in a directory bucket. |
RequestPayer |
|
Tagging |
The tag-set for the object copy in the destination bucket. This value
must be used in conjunction with the The default value is the empty value. Directory buckets - For directory buckets in a
Because only the empty tag-set is supported for directory buckets in a
|
ObjectLockMode |
The Object Lock mode that you want to apply to the object copy. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ObjectLockRetainUntilDate |
The date and time when you want the Object Lock of the object copy to expire. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus |
Specifies whether you want to apply a legal hold to the object copy. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected destination bucket owner. If the account
ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the destination
bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code |
ExpectedSourceBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected source bucket owner. If the account ID
that you provide does not match the actual owner of the source bucket,
the request fails with the HTTP status code |
This action creates an Amazon S3 bucket
Description
This action creates an Amazon S3 bucket. To create an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket, see create_bucket
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_create_bucket/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_create_bucket(
ACL = NULL,
Bucket,
CreateBucketConfiguration = NULL,
GrantFullControl = NULL,
GrantRead = NULL,
GrantReadACP = NULL,
GrantWrite = NULL,
GrantWriteACP = NULL,
ObjectLockEnabledForBucket = NULL,
ObjectOwnership = NULL
)
Arguments
ACL |
The canned ACL to apply to the bucket. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket to create. General purpose buckets - For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use path-style requests in the format
|
CreateBucketConfiguration |
The configuration information for the bucket. |
GrantFullControl |
Allows grantee the read, write, read ACP, and write ACP permissions on the bucket. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
GrantRead |
Allows grantee to list the objects in the bucket. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
GrantReadACP |
Allows grantee to read the bucket ACL. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
GrantWrite |
Allows grantee to create new objects in the bucket. For the bucket and object owners of existing objects, also allows deletions and overwrites of those objects. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
GrantWriteACP |
Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable bucket. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ObjectLockEnabledForBucket |
Specifies whether you want S3 Object Lock to be enabled for the new bucket. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ObjectOwnership |
Creates a metadata table configuration for a general purpose bucket
Description
Creates a metadata table configuration for a general purpose bucket. For more information, see Accelerating data discovery with S3 Metadata in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_create_bucket_metadata_table_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_create_bucket_metadata_table_configuration(
Bucket,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
MetadataTableConfiguration,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The general purpose bucket that you want to create the metadata table configuration in. |
ContentMD5 |
The |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
The checksum algorithm to use with your metadata table configuration. |
MetadataTableConfiguration |
[required] The contents of your metadata table configuration. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The expected owner of the general purpose bucket that contains your metadata table configuration. |
This action initiates a multipart upload and returns an upload ID
Description
This action initiates a multipart upload and returns an upload ID. This upload ID is used to associate all of the parts in the specific multipart upload. You specify this upload ID in each of your subsequent upload part requests (see upload_part
). You also include this upload ID in the final request to either complete or abort the multipart upload request. For more information about multipart uploads, see Multipart Upload Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_create_multipart_upload/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_create_multipart_upload(
ACL = NULL,
Bucket,
CacheControl = NULL,
ContentDisposition = NULL,
ContentEncoding = NULL,
ContentLanguage = NULL,
ContentType = NULL,
Expires = NULL,
GrantFullControl = NULL,
GrantRead = NULL,
GrantReadACP = NULL,
GrantWriteACP = NULL,
Key,
Metadata = NULL,
ServerSideEncryption = NULL,
StorageClass = NULL,
WebsiteRedirectLocation = NULL,
SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
SSECustomerKey = NULL,
SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
SSEKMSKeyId = NULL,
SSEKMSEncryptionContext = NULL,
BucketKeyEnabled = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
Tagging = NULL,
ObjectLockMode = NULL,
ObjectLockRetainUntilDate = NULL,
ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
ChecksumType = NULL
)
Arguments
ACL |
The canned ACL to apply to the object. Amazon S3 supports a set of predefined ACLs, known as canned ACLs. Each canned ACL has a predefined set of grantees and permissions. For more information, see Canned ACL in the Amazon S3 User Guide. By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access
control. When uploading an object, you can grant access permissions to
individual Amazon Web Services accounts or to predefined groups defined
by Amazon S3. These permissions are then added to the access control
list (ACL) on the new object. For more information, see Using ACLs.
One way to grant the permissions using the request headers is to specify
a canned ACL with the
|
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket where the multipart upload is initiated and where the object is uploaded. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
CacheControl |
Specifies caching behavior along the request/reply chain. |
ContentDisposition |
Specifies presentational information for the object. |
ContentEncoding |
Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the Content-Type header field. For directory buckets, only the |
ContentLanguage |
The language that the content is in. |
ContentType |
A standard MIME type describing the format of the object data. |
Expires |
The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable. |
GrantFullControl |
Specify access permissions explicitly to give the grantee READ, READ_ACP, and WRITE_ACP permissions on the object. By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When uploading an object, you can use this header to explicitly grant access permissions to specific Amazon Web Services accounts or groups. This header maps to specific permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide. You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:
For example, the following
|
GrantRead |
Specify access permissions explicitly to allow grantee to read the object data and its metadata. By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When uploading an object, you can use this header to explicitly grant access permissions to specific Amazon Web Services accounts or groups. This header maps to specific permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide. You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:
For example, the following
|
GrantReadACP |
Specify access permissions explicitly to allows grantee to read the object ACL. By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When uploading an object, you can use this header to explicitly grant access permissions to specific Amazon Web Services accounts or groups. This header maps to specific permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide. You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:
For example, the following
|
GrantWriteACP |
Specify access permissions explicitly to allows grantee to allow grantee to write the ACL for the applicable object. By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When uploading an object, you can use this header to explicitly grant access permissions to specific Amazon Web Services accounts or groups. This header maps to specific permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide. You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:
For example, the following
|
Key |
[required] Object key for which the multipart upload is to be initiated. |
Metadata |
A map of metadata to store with the object in S3. |
ServerSideEncryption |
The server-side encryption algorithm used when you store this object in
Amazon S3 (for example,
|
StorageClass |
By default, Amazon S3 uses the STANDARD Storage Class to store newly created objects. The STANDARD storage class provides high durability and high availability. Depending on performance needs, you can specify a different Storage Class. For more information, see Storage Classes in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
|
WebsiteRedirectLocation |
If the bucket is configured as a website, redirects requests for this object to another object in the same bucket or to an external URL. Amazon S3 stores the value of this header in the object metadata. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerAlgorithm |
Specifies the algorithm to use when encrypting the object (for example, AES256). This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerKey |
Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in
encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is
discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be
appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the
This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerKeyMD5 |
Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the customer-provided encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSEKMSKeyId |
Specifies the KMS key ID (Key ID, Key ARN, or Key Alias) to use for object encryption. If the KMS key doesn't exist in the same account that's issuing the command, you must use the full Key ARN not the Key ID. General purpose buckets - If you specify
Directory buckets - To encrypt data using SSE-KMS, it's recommended
to specify the |
SSEKMSEncryptionContext |
Specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context to use for object encryption. The value of this header is a Base64 encoded string of a UTF-8 encoded JSON, which contains the encryption context as key-value pairs. Directory buckets - You can optionally provide an explicit encryption context value. The value must match the default encryption context - the bucket Amazon Resource Name (ARN). An additional encryption context value is not supported. |
BucketKeyEnabled |
Specifies whether Amazon S3 should use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with server-side encryption using Key Management Service (KMS) keys (SSE-KMS). General purpose buckets - Setting this header to Directory buckets - S3 Bucket Keys are always enabled for |
RequestPayer |
|
Tagging |
The tag-set for the object. The tag-set must be encoded as URL Query parameters. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ObjectLockMode |
Specifies the Object Lock mode that you want to apply to the uploaded object. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ObjectLockRetainUntilDate |
Specifies the date and time when you want the Object Lock to expire. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus |
Specifies whether you want to apply a legal hold to the uploaded object. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm that you want Amazon S3 to use to create the checksum for the object. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
ChecksumType |
Indicates the checksum type that you want Amazon S3 to use to calculate the object’s checksum value. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
Creates a session that establishes temporary security credentials to support fast authentication and authorization for the Zonal endpoint API operations on directory buckets
Description
Creates a session that establishes temporary security credentials to support fast authentication and authorization for the Zonal endpoint API operations on directory buckets. For more information about Zonal endpoint API operations that include the Availability Zone in the request endpoint, see S3 Express One Zone APIs in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_create_session/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_create_session(
SessionMode = NULL,
Bucket,
ServerSideEncryption = NULL,
SSEKMSKeyId = NULL,
SSEKMSEncryptionContext = NULL,
BucketKeyEnabled = NULL
)
Arguments
SessionMode |
Specifies the mode of the session that will be created, either
|
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket that you create a session for. |
ServerSideEncryption |
The server-side encryption algorithm to use when you store objects in the directory bucket. For directory buckets, there are only two supported options for
server-side encryption: server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed
keys (SSE-S3) ( |
SSEKMSKeyId |
If you specify Your SSE-KMS configuration can only support 1 customer managed key
per directory bucket's lifetime. The Amazon Web Services managed key
( |
SSEKMSEncryptionContext |
Specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context as an
additional encryption context to use for object encryption. The value of
this header is a Base64 encoded string of a UTF-8 encoded JSON, which
contains the encryption context as key-value pairs. This value is stored
as object metadata and automatically gets passed on to Amazon Web
Services KMS for future General purpose buckets - This value must be explicitly added during
Directory buckets - You can optionally provide an explicit encryption context value. The value must match the default encryption context - the bucket Amazon Resource Name (ARN). An additional encryption context value is not supported. |
BucketKeyEnabled |
Specifies whether Amazon S3 should use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with server-side encryption using KMS keys (SSE-KMS). S3 Bucket Keys are always enabled for |
Deletes the S3 bucket
Description
Deletes the S3 bucket. All objects (including all object versions and delete markers) in the bucket must be deleted before the bucket itself can be deleted.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_bucket(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] Specifies the bucket being deleted. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use path-style requests in the format
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code For directory buckets, this header is not supported in this API
operation. If you specify this header, the request fails with the HTTP
status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_analytics_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_bucket_analytics_configuration(
Bucket,
Id,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket from which an analytics configuration is deleted. |
Id |
[required] The ID that identifies the analytics configuration. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_cors/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_bucket_cors(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] Specifies the bucket whose |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This implementation of the DELETE action resets the default encryption for the bucket as server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed keys (SSE-S3)
Description
This implementation of the DELETE action resets the default encryption for the bucket as server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed keys (SSE-S3).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_encryption/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_bucket_encryption(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket containing the server-side encryption configuration to delete. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use path-style requests in the format
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code For directory buckets, this header is not supported in this API
operation. If you specify this header, the request fails with the HTTP
status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration(Bucket, Id)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose configuration you want to modify or retrieve. |
Id |
[required] The ID used to identify the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration. |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_inventory_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_bucket_inventory_configuration(
Bucket,
Id,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket containing the inventory configuration to delete. |
Id |
[required] The ID used to identify the inventory configuration. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
Deletes the lifecycle configuration from the specified bucket
Description
Deletes the lifecycle configuration from the specified bucket. Amazon S3 removes all the lifecycle configuration rules in the lifecycle subresource associated with the bucket. Your objects never expire, and Amazon S3 no longer automatically deletes any objects on the basis of rules contained in the deleted lifecycle configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_lifecycle/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_bucket_lifecycle(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name of the lifecycle to delete. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code This parameter applies to general purpose buckets only. It is not supported for directory bucket lifecycle configurations. |
Deletes a metadata table configuration from a general purpose bucket
Description
Deletes a metadata table configuration from a general purpose bucket. For more information, see Accelerating data discovery with S3 Metadata in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_metadata_table_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_bucket_metadata_table_configuration(
Bucket,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The general purpose bucket that you want to remove the metadata table configuration from. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The expected bucket owner of the general purpose bucket that you want to remove the metadata table configuration from. |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_metrics_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_bucket_metrics_configuration(Bucket, Id, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket containing the metrics configuration to delete. |
Id |
[required] The ID used to identify the metrics configuration. The ID has a 64 character limit and can only contain letters, numbers, periods, dashes, and underscores. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_ownership_controls/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_bucket_ownership_controls(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The Amazon S3 bucket whose |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
Deletes the policy of a specified bucket
Description
Deletes the policy of a specified bucket.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_bucket_policy(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use path-style requests in the format
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code For directory buckets, this header is not supported in this API
operation. If you specify this header, the request fails with the HTTP
status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_replication/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_bucket_replication(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_tagging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_bucket_tagging(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket that has the tag set to be removed. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_website/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_bucket_website(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name for which you want to remove the website configuration. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
Removes an object from a bucket
Description
Removes an object from a bucket. The behavior depends on the bucket's versioning state:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_object/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_object(
Bucket,
Key,
MFA = NULL,
VersionId = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
BypassGovernanceRetention = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
IfMatch = NULL,
IfMatchLastModifiedTime = NULL,
IfMatchSize = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name of the bucket containing the object. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
Key |
[required] Key name of the object to delete. |
MFA |
The concatenation of the authentication device's serial number, a space, and the value that is displayed on your authentication device. Required to permanently delete a versioned object if versioning is configured with MFA delete enabled. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
VersionId |
Version ID used to reference a specific version of the object. For directory buckets in this API operation, only the |
RequestPayer |
|
BypassGovernanceRetention |
Indicates whether S3 Object Lock should bypass Governance-mode
restrictions to process this operation. To use this header, you must
have the This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
IfMatch |
The For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232. This functionality is only supported for directory buckets. |
IfMatchLastModifiedTime |
If present, the object is deleted only if its modification times matches
the provided This functionality is only supported for directory buckets. |
IfMatchSize |
If present, the object is deleted only if its size matches the provided
size in bytes. If the This functionality is only supported for directory buckets. You can use the |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_object_tagging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_object_tagging(
Bucket,
Key,
VersionId = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name containing the objects from which to remove the tags. Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
Key |
[required] The key that identifies the object in the bucket from which to remove all tags. |
VersionId |
The versionId of the object that the tag-set will be removed from. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation enables you to delete multiple objects from a bucket using a single HTTP request
Description
This operation enables you to delete multiple objects from a bucket using a single HTTP request. If you know the object keys that you want to delete, then this operation provides a suitable alternative to sending individual delete requests, reducing per-request overhead.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_objects/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_objects(
Bucket,
Delete,
MFA = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
BypassGovernanceRetention = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name containing the objects to delete. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
Delete |
[required] Container for the request. |
MFA |
The concatenation of the authentication device's serial number, a space, and the value that is displayed on your authentication device. Required to permanently delete a versioned object if versioning is configured with MFA delete enabled. When performing the This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
RequestPayer |
|
BypassGovernanceRetention |
Specifies whether you want to delete this object even if it has a
Governance-type Object Lock in place. To use this header, you must have
the This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding For the
For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If the individual checksum value you provide through
If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_public_access_block/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_delete_public_access_block(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The Amazon S3 bucket whose |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
Download a file from S3 and store it at a specified file location
Description
Download a file from S3 and store it at a specified file location.
Usage
s3_download_file(Bucket, Key, Filename, IfMatch, IfModifiedSince,
IfNoneMatch, IfUnmodifiedSince, Range, ResponseCacheControl,
ResponseContentDisposition, ResponseContentEncoding, ResponseContentLanguage,
ResponseContentType, ResponseExpires, VersionId, SSECustomerAlgorithm,
SSECustomerKey, SSECustomerKeyMD5, RequestPayer, PartNumber,
ExpectedBucketOwner)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name containing the object. When using this API with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this operation with an access point through the AWS SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using Access Points in the Amazon Simple Storage Service Developer Guide. When using this API with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this operation using S3 on Outposts through the AWS SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon Simple Storage Service Developer Guide. |
Key |
[required] Key of the object to get. |
Filename |
[required] A local file location where the downloaded object will be saved. |
IfMatch |
Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is the same as the one specified, otherwise return a 412 (precondition failed). |
IfModifiedSince |
Return the object only if it has been modified since the specified time, otherwise return a 304 (not modified). |
IfNoneMatch |
Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is different from the one specified, otherwise return a 304 (not modified). |
IfUnmodifiedSince |
Return the object only if it has not been modified since the specified time, otherwise return a 412 (precondition failed). |
Range |
Downloads the specified range bytes of an object. For more information about the HTTP Range header, see https://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec14.html#sec14.35. Amazon S3 doesn't support retrieving multiple ranges of data per |
ResponseCacheControl |
Sets the |
ResponseContentDisposition |
Sets the |
ResponseContentEncoding |
Sets the |
ResponseContentLanguage |
Sets the |
ResponseContentType |
Sets the |
ResponseExpires |
Sets the |
VersionId |
VersionId used to reference a specific version of the object. |
SSECustomerAlgorithm |
Specifies the algorithm to use to when encrypting the object (for example, AES256). |
SSECustomerKey |
Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in
encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is
discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be
appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the
|
SSECustomerKeyMD5 |
Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error. |
RequestPayer |
Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request. Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests |
PartNumber |
Part number of the object being read. This is a positive integer between 1 and 10,000. Effectively performs a 'ranged' GET request for the part specified. Useful for downloading just a part of an object. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account id of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a
different account, the request will fail with an HTTP
|
Details
This is a wrapper function for get_object
that will
write the downloaded object to the file location specified.
Request syntax
svc$download_file( Bucket = "string", Key = "string", Filename = "string" )
Examples
## Not run:
# The following example retrieves an object from an S3 bucket. The request
# specifies the range header to retrieve a specific byte range. The text file
# is saved in a local output folder.
svc$download_file(
Bucket = "examplebucket",
Key = "SampleFile.txt",
Range = "bytes=0-9",
Filename = "./output/SampleFile.txt"
)
# The following example retrieves an object from an S3 bucket. The object is
# stored in the current directory as "HappyFace.jpg".
svc$download_file(
Bucket = "examplebucket",
Key = "HappyFace.jpg",
Filename = "HappyFace.jpg"
)
## End(Not run)
Generate a presigned url given a client, its method, and arguments
Description
Generate a presigned url given a client, its method, and arguments
Usage
s3_generate_presigned_url(client_method, params=list(), expires_in=3600,
http_method = NULL)
Arguments
client_method |
(character): The client method to presign for |
params |
(list): The parameters normally passed to |
expires_in |
(numeric): The number of seconds the presigned url is valid for. By default it expires in an hour (3600 seconds) |
http_method |
(character) The http method to use on the generated url. By default, the http method is whatever is used in the method's model. |
Value
The presigned url character
Request syntax
svc$generate_signed_url( client_method = "string", params = "list", expires_in = "numeric", http_method = "string" )
Examples
## Not run:
# The following example generates a presigned URL that you
# can give to others so that they can retrieve an object from an S3 bucket.
svc$generate_signed_url(
client_method = "get_object",
Params = list(Bucket = "BUCKET_NAME", Key = "OBJECT_KEY"),
ExpiresIn = 3600
)
## End(Not run)
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_accelerate_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_accelerate_configuration(
Bucket,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket for which the accelerate configuration is retrieved. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
RequestPayer |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_acl(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] Specifies the S3 bucket whose ACL is being requested. When you use this API operation with an access point, provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name. When you use this API operation with an Object Lambda access point,
provide the alias of the Object Lambda access point in place of the
bucket name. If the Object Lambda access point alias in a request is not
valid, the error code |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_analytics_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_analytics_configuration(Bucket, Id, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket from which an analytics configuration is retrieved. |
Id |
[required] The ID that identifies the analytics configuration. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_cors/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_cors(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name for which to get the cors configuration. When you use this API operation with an access point, provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name. When you use this API operation with an Object Lambda access point,
provide the alias of the Object Lambda access point in place of the
bucket name. If the Object Lambda access point alias in a request is not
valid, the error code |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
Returns the default encryption configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket
Description
Returns the default encryption configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket. By default, all buckets have a default encryption configuration that uses server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed keys (SSE-S3).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_encryption/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_encryption(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket from which the server-side encryption configuration is retrieved. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use path-style requests in the format
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code For directory buckets, this header is not supported in this API
operation. If you specify this header, the request fails with the HTTP
status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration(Bucket, Id)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose configuration you want to modify or retrieve. |
Id |
[required] The ID used to identify the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration. |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_inventory_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_inventory_configuration(Bucket, Id, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket containing the inventory configuration to retrieve. |
Id |
[required] The ID used to identify the inventory configuration. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
For an updated version of this API, see GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration
Description
For an updated version of this API, see get_bucket_lifecycle_configuration
. If you configured a bucket lifecycle using the filter
element, you should see the updated version of this topic. This topic is provided for backward compatibility.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_lifecycle/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_lifecycle(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket for which to get the lifecycle information. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
Returns the lifecycle configuration information set on the bucket
Description
Returns the lifecycle configuration information set on the bucket. For information about lifecycle configuration, see Object Lifecycle Management.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_lifecycle_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_lifecycle_configuration(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket for which to get the lifecycle information. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code This parameter applies to general purpose buckets only. It is not supported for directory bucket lifecycle configurations. |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_location/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_location(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket for which to get the location. When you use this API operation with an access point, provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name. When you use this API operation with an Object Lambda access point,
provide the alias of the Object Lambda access point in place of the
bucket name. If the Object Lambda access point alias in a request is not
valid, the error code |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_logging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_logging(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name for which to get the logging information. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
Retrieves the metadata table configuration for a general purpose bucket
Description
Retrieves the metadata table configuration for a general purpose bucket. For more information, see Accelerating data discovery with S3 Metadata in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_metadata_table_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_metadata_table_configuration(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The general purpose bucket that contains the metadata table configuration that you want to retrieve. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The expected owner of the general purpose bucket that you want to retrieve the metadata table configuration from. |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_metrics_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_metrics_configuration(Bucket, Id, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket containing the metrics configuration to retrieve. |
Id |
[required] The ID used to identify the metrics configuration. The ID has a 64 character limit and can only contain letters, numbers, periods, dashes, and underscores. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_notification/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_notification(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket for which to get the notification configuration. When you use this API operation with an access point, provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name. When you use this API operation with an Object Lambda access point,
provide the alias of the Object Lambda access point in place of the
bucket name. If the Object Lambda access point alias in a request is not
valid, the error code |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_notification_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_notification_configuration(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket for which to get the notification configuration. When you use this API operation with an access point, provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name. When you use this API operation with an Object Lambda access point,
provide the alias of the Object Lambda access point in place of the
bucket name. If the Object Lambda access point alias in a request is not
valid, the error code |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_ownership_controls/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_ownership_controls(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
Returns the policy of a specified bucket
Description
Returns the policy of a specified bucket.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_policy(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name to get the bucket policy for. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use path-style requests in the format
Access points - When you use this API operation with an access point, provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name. Object Lambda access points - When you use this API operation with
an Object Lambda access point, provide the alias of the Object Lambda
access point in place of the bucket name. If the Object Lambda access
point alias in a request is not valid, the error code
Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code For directory buckets, this header is not supported in this API
operation. If you specify this header, the request fails with the HTTP
status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_policy_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_policy_status(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose policy status you want to retrieve. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_replication/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_replication(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name for which to get the replication information. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_request_payment/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_request_payment(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket for which to get the payment request configuration |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_tagging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_tagging(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket for which to get the tagging information. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_versioning/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_versioning(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket for which to get the versioning information. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_website/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_bucket_website(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name for which to get the website configuration. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
Retrieves an object from Amazon S3
Description
Retrieves an object from Amazon S3.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_object/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_object(
Bucket,
IfMatch = NULL,
IfModifiedSince = NULL,
IfNoneMatch = NULL,
IfUnmodifiedSince = NULL,
Key,
Range = NULL,
ResponseCacheControl = NULL,
ResponseContentDisposition = NULL,
ResponseContentEncoding = NULL,
ResponseContentLanguage = NULL,
ResponseContentType = NULL,
ResponseExpires = NULL,
VersionId = NULL,
SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
SSECustomerKey = NULL,
SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
PartNumber = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
ChecksumMode = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name containing the object. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Object Lambda access points - When you use this action with an Object Lambda access point, you must direct requests to the Object Lambda access point hostname. The Object Lambda access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-object-lambda.Region.amazonaws.com. Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
IfMatch |
Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is the same as the one
specified in this header; otherwise, return a If both of the For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232. |
IfModifiedSince |
Return the object only if it has been modified since the specified time;
otherwise, return a If both of the For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232. |
IfNoneMatch |
Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is different from the
one specified in this header; otherwise, return a If both of the For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232. |
IfUnmodifiedSince |
Return the object only if it has not been modified since the specified
time; otherwise, return a If both of the For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232. |
Key |
[required] Key of the object to get. |
Range |
Downloads the specified byte range of an object. For more information about the HTTP Range header, see https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc9110.html#name-range. Amazon S3 doesn't support retrieving multiple ranges of data per |
ResponseCacheControl |
Sets the |
ResponseContentDisposition |
Sets the |
ResponseContentEncoding |
Sets the |
ResponseContentLanguage |
Sets the |
ResponseContentType |
Sets the |
ResponseExpires |
Sets the |
VersionId |
Version ID used to reference a specific version of the object. By default, the
For more information about versioning, see
|
SSECustomerAlgorithm |
Specifies the algorithm to use when decrypting the object (for example,
If you encrypt an object by using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C) when you store the object in Amazon S3, then when you GET the object, you must use the following headers:
For more information about SSE-C, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerKey |
Specifies the customer-provided encryption key that you originally
provided for Amazon S3 to encrypt the data before storing it. This value
is used to decrypt the object when recovering it and must match the one
used when storing the data. The key must be appropriate for use with the
algorithm specified in the
If you encrypt an object by using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C) when you store the object in Amazon S3, then when you GET the object, you must use the following headers:
For more information about SSE-C, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerKeyMD5 |
Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the customer-provided encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error. If you encrypt an object by using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C) when you store the object in Amazon S3, then when you GET the object, you must use the following headers:
For more information about SSE-C, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys) in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
RequestPayer |
|
PartNumber |
Part number of the object being read. This is a positive integer between 1 and 10,000. Effectively performs a 'ranged' GET request for the part specified. Useful for downloading just a part of an object. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
ChecksumMode |
To retrieve the checksum, this mode must be enabled. |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_object_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_object_acl(
Bucket,
Key,
VersionId = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name that contains the object for which to get the ACL information. Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
Key |
[required] The key of the object for which to get the ACL information. |
VersionId |
Version ID used to reference a specific version of the object. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
RequestPayer |
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
Retrieves all the metadata from an object without returning the object itself
Description
Retrieves all the metadata from an object without returning the object itself. This operation is useful if you're interested only in an object's metadata.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_object_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_object_attributes(
Bucket,
Key,
VersionId = NULL,
MaxParts = NULL,
PartNumberMarker = NULL,
SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
SSECustomerKey = NULL,
SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
ObjectAttributes
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket that contains the object. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
Key |
[required] The object key. |
VersionId |
The version ID used to reference a specific version of the object. S3 Versioning isn't enabled and supported for directory buckets. For
this API operation, only the |
MaxParts |
Sets the maximum number of parts to return. |
PartNumberMarker |
Specifies the part after which listing should begin. Only parts with higher part numbers will be listed. |
SSECustomerAlgorithm |
Specifies the algorithm to use when encrypting the object (for example, AES256). This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerKey |
Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in
encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is
discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be
appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the
This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerKeyMD5 |
Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
RequestPayer |
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
ObjectAttributes |
[required] Specifies the fields at the root level that you want returned in the response. Fields that you do not specify are not returned. |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_object_legal_hold/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_object_legal_hold(
Bucket,
Key,
VersionId = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name containing the object whose legal hold status you want to retrieve. Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
Key |
[required] The key name for the object whose legal hold status you want to retrieve. |
VersionId |
The version ID of the object whose legal hold status you want to retrieve. |
RequestPayer |
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_object_lock_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_object_lock_configuration(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket whose Object Lock configuration you want to retrieve. Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_object_retention/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_object_retention(
Bucket,
Key,
VersionId = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name containing the object whose retention settings you want to retrieve. Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
Key |
[required] The key name for the object whose retention settings you want to retrieve. |
VersionId |
The version ID for the object whose retention settings you want to retrieve. |
RequestPayer |
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_object_tagging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_object_tagging(
Bucket,
Key,
VersionId = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name containing the object for which to get the tagging information. Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
Key |
[required] Object key for which to get the tagging information. |
VersionId |
The versionId of the object for which to get the tagging information. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
RequestPayer |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_object_torrent/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_object_torrent(
Bucket,
Key,
RequestPayer = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket containing the object for which to get the torrent files. |
Key |
[required] The object key for which to get the information. |
RequestPayer |
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_public_access_block/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_get_public_access_block(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
You can use this operation to determine if a bucket exists and if you have permission to access it
Description
You can use this operation to determine if a bucket exists and if you have permission to access it. The action returns a 200 OK
if the bucket exists and you have permission to access it.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_head_bucket/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_head_bucket(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Object Lambda access points - When you use this API operation with
an Object Lambda access point, provide the alias of the Object Lambda
access point in place of the bucket name. If the Object Lambda access
point alias in a request is not valid, the error code
Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
The HEAD operation retrieves metadata from an object without returning the object itself
Description
The HEAD
operation retrieves metadata from an object without returning the object itself. This operation is useful if you're interested only in an object's metadata.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_head_object/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_head_object(
Bucket,
IfMatch = NULL,
IfModifiedSince = NULL,
IfNoneMatch = NULL,
IfUnmodifiedSince = NULL,
Key,
Range = NULL,
ResponseCacheControl = NULL,
ResponseContentDisposition = NULL,
ResponseContentEncoding = NULL,
ResponseContentLanguage = NULL,
ResponseContentType = NULL,
ResponseExpires = NULL,
VersionId = NULL,
SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
SSECustomerKey = NULL,
SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
PartNumber = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
ChecksumMode = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket that contains the object. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
IfMatch |
Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is the same as the one specified; otherwise, return a 412 (precondition failed) error. If both of the
Then Amazon S3 returns For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232. |
IfModifiedSince |
Return the object only if it has been modified since the specified time; otherwise, return a 304 (not modified) error. If both of the
Then Amazon S3 returns the For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232. |
IfNoneMatch |
Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is different from the one specified; otherwise, return a 304 (not modified) error. If both of the
Then Amazon S3 returns the For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232. |
IfUnmodifiedSince |
Return the object only if it has not been modified since the specified time; otherwise, return a 412 (precondition failed) error. If both of the
Then Amazon S3 returns For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232. |
Key |
[required] The object key. |
Range |
HeadObject returns only the metadata for an object. If the Range is
satisfiable, only the |
ResponseCacheControl |
Sets the |
ResponseContentDisposition |
Sets the |
ResponseContentEncoding |
Sets the |
ResponseContentLanguage |
Sets the |
ResponseContentType |
Sets the |
ResponseExpires |
Sets the |
VersionId |
Version ID used to reference a specific version of the object. For directory buckets in this API operation, only the |
SSECustomerAlgorithm |
Specifies the algorithm to use when encrypting the object (for example, AES256). This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerKey |
Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in
encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is
discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be
appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the
This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerKeyMD5 |
Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
RequestPayer |
|
PartNumber |
Part number of the object being read. This is a positive integer between 1 and 10,000. Effectively performs a 'ranged' HEAD request for the part specified. Useful querying about the size of the part and the number of parts in this object. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
ChecksumMode |
To retrieve the checksum, this parameter must be enabled. General purpose buckets - If you enable checksum mode and the object
is uploaded with a
checksum
and encrypted with an Key Management Service (KMS) key, you must have
permission to use the Directory buckets - If you enable |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_bucket_analytics_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_list_bucket_analytics_configurations(
Bucket,
ContinuationToken = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket from which analytics configurations are retrieved. |
ContinuationToken |
The |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_list_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configurations(
Bucket,
ContinuationToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose configuration you want to modify or retrieve. |
ContinuationToken |
The |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_bucket_inventory_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_list_bucket_inventory_configurations(
Bucket,
ContinuationToken = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket containing the inventory configurations to retrieve. |
ContinuationToken |
The marker used to continue an inventory configuration listing that has
been truncated. Use the |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_bucket_metrics_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_list_bucket_metrics_configurations(
Bucket,
ContinuationToken = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket containing the metrics configurations to retrieve. |
ContinuationToken |
The marker that is used to continue a metrics configuration listing that
has been truncated. Use the |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_buckets/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_list_buckets(
MaxBuckets = NULL,
ContinuationToken = NULL,
Prefix = NULL,
BucketRegion = NULL
)
Arguments
MaxBuckets |
Maximum number of buckets to be returned in response. When the number is more than the count of buckets that are owned by an Amazon Web Services account, return all the buckets in response. |
ContinuationToken |
Length Constraints: Minimum length of 0. Maximum length of 1024. Required: No. If you specify the |
Prefix |
Limits the response to bucket names that begin with the specified bucket name prefix. |
BucketRegion |
Limits the response to buckets that are located in the specified Amazon
Web Services Region. The Amazon Web Services Region must be expressed
according to the Amazon Web Services Region code, such as Requests made to a Regional endpoint that is different from the
|
Returns a list of all Amazon S3 directory buckets owned by the authenticated sender of the request
Description
Returns a list of all Amazon S3 directory buckets owned by the authenticated sender of the request. For more information about directory buckets, see Directory buckets in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_directory_buckets/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_list_directory_buckets(ContinuationToken = NULL, MaxDirectoryBuckets = NULL)
Arguments
ContinuationToken |
|
MaxDirectoryBuckets |
Maximum number of buckets to be returned in response. When the number is more than the count of buckets that are owned by an Amazon Web Services account, return all the buckets in response. |
This operation lists in-progress multipart uploads in a bucket
Description
This operation lists in-progress multipart uploads in a bucket. An in-progress multipart upload is a multipart upload that has been initiated by the create_multipart_upload
request, but has not yet been completed or aborted.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_multipart_uploads/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_list_multipart_uploads(
Bucket,
Delimiter = NULL,
EncodingType = NULL,
KeyMarker = NULL,
MaxUploads = NULL,
Prefix = NULL,
UploadIdMarker = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
Delimiter |
Character you use to group keys. All keys that contain the same string between the prefix, if specified,
and the first occurrence of the delimiter after the prefix are grouped
under a single result element, Directory buckets - For directory buckets, |
EncodingType |
|
KeyMarker |
Specifies the multipart upload after which listing should begin.
|
MaxUploads |
Sets the maximum number of multipart uploads, from 1 to 1,000, to return in the response body. 1,000 is the maximum number of uploads that can be returned in a response. |
Prefix |
Lists in-progress uploads only for those keys that begin with the
specified prefix. You can use prefixes to separate a bucket into
different grouping of keys. (You can think of using Directory buckets - For directory buckets, only prefixes that end in
a delimiter ( |
UploadIdMarker |
Together with key-marker, specifies the multipart upload after which
listing should begin. If key-marker is not specified, the
upload-id-marker parameter is ignored. Otherwise, any multipart uploads
for a key equal to the key-marker might be included in the list only if
they have an upload ID lexicographically greater than the specified
This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
RequestPayer |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_object_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_list_object_versions(
Bucket,
Delimiter = NULL,
EncodingType = NULL,
KeyMarker = NULL,
MaxKeys = NULL,
Prefix = NULL,
VersionIdMarker = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
OptionalObjectAttributes = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name that contains the objects. |
Delimiter |
A delimiter is a character that you specify to group keys. All keys that
contain the same string between the |
EncodingType |
|
KeyMarker |
Specifies the key to start with when listing objects in a bucket. |
MaxKeys |
Sets the maximum number of keys returned in the response. By default,
the action returns up to 1,000 key names. The response might contain
fewer keys but will never contain more. If additional keys satisfy the
search criteria, but were not returned because |
Prefix |
Use this parameter to select only those keys that begin with the
specified prefix. You can use prefixes to separate a bucket into
different groupings of keys. (You can think of using |
VersionIdMarker |
Specifies the object version you want to start listing from. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
RequestPayer |
|
OptionalObjectAttributes |
Specifies the optional fields that you want returned in the response. Fields that you do not specify are not returned. |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_objects/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_list_objects(
Bucket,
Delimiter = NULL,
EncodingType = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxKeys = NULL,
Prefix = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
OptionalObjectAttributes = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket containing the objects. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
Delimiter |
A delimiter is a character that you use to group keys. |
EncodingType |
|
Marker |
Marker is where you want Amazon S3 to start listing from. Amazon S3 starts listing after this specified key. Marker can be any key in the bucket. |
MaxKeys |
Sets the maximum number of keys returned in the response. By default, the action returns up to 1,000 key names. The response might contain fewer keys but will never contain more. |
Prefix |
Limits the response to keys that begin with the specified prefix. |
RequestPayer |
Confirms that the requester knows that she or he will be charged for the list objects request. Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
OptionalObjectAttributes |
Specifies the optional fields that you want returned in the response. Fields that you do not specify are not returned. |
Returns some or all (up to 1,000) of the objects in a bucket with each request
Description
Returns some or all (up to 1,000) of the objects in a bucket with each request. You can use the request parameters as selection criteria to return a subset of the objects in a bucket. A 200 OK
response can contain valid or invalid XML. Make sure to design your application to parse the contents of the response and handle it appropriately. For more information about listing objects, see Listing object keys programmatically in the Amazon S3 User Guide. To get a list of your buckets, see list_buckets
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_objects_v2/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_list_objects_v2(
Bucket,
Delimiter = NULL,
EncodingType = NULL,
MaxKeys = NULL,
Prefix = NULL,
ContinuationToken = NULL,
FetchOwner = NULL,
StartAfter = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
OptionalObjectAttributes = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
Delimiter |
A delimiter is a character that you use to group keys.
|
EncodingType |
Encoding type used by Amazon S3 to encode the object keys in the response. Responses are encoded only in UTF-8. An object key can contain any Unicode character. However, the XML 1.0 parser can't parse certain characters, such as characters with an ASCII value from 0 to 10. For characters that aren't supported in XML 1.0, you can add this parameter to request that Amazon S3 encode the keys in the response. For more information about characters to avoid in object key names, see Object key naming guidelines. When using the URL encoding type, non-ASCII characters that are used in
an object's key name will be percent-encoded according to UTF-8 code
values. For example, the object |
MaxKeys |
Sets the maximum number of keys returned in the response. By default, the action returns up to 1,000 key names. The response might contain fewer keys but will never contain more. |
Prefix |
Limits the response to keys that begin with the specified prefix. Directory buckets - For directory buckets, only prefixes that end in
a delimiter ( |
ContinuationToken |
|
FetchOwner |
The owner field is not present in
Directory buckets - For directory buckets, the bucket owner is returned as the object owner for all objects. |
StartAfter |
StartAfter is where you want Amazon S3 to start listing from. Amazon S3 starts listing after this specified key. StartAfter can be any key in the bucket. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
RequestPayer |
Confirms that the requester knows that she or he will be charged for the list objects request in V2 style. Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
OptionalObjectAttributes |
Specifies the optional fields that you want returned in the response. Fields that you do not specify are not returned. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
Lists the parts that have been uploaded for a specific multipart upload
Description
Lists the parts that have been uploaded for a specific multipart upload.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_parts/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_list_parts(
Bucket,
Key,
MaxParts = NULL,
PartNumberMarker = NULL,
UploadId,
RequestPayer = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
SSECustomerKey = NULL,
SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket to which the parts are being uploaded. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
Key |
[required] Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated. |
MaxParts |
Sets the maximum number of parts to return. |
PartNumberMarker |
Specifies the part after which listing should begin. Only parts with higher part numbers will be listed. |
UploadId |
[required] Upload ID identifying the multipart upload whose parts are being listed. |
RequestPayer |
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
SSECustomerAlgorithm |
The server-side encryption (SSE) algorithm used to encrypt the object. This parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerKey |
The server-side encryption (SSE) customer managed key. This parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerKeyMD5 |
The MD5 server-side encryption (SSE) customer managed key. This parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_accelerate_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_accelerate_configuration(
Bucket,
AccelerateConfiguration,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket for which the accelerate configuration is set. |
AccelerateConfiguration |
[required] Container for setting the transfer acceleration state. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_acl(
ACL = NULL,
AccessControlPolicy = NULL,
Bucket,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
GrantFullControl = NULL,
GrantRead = NULL,
GrantReadACP = NULL,
GrantWrite = NULL,
GrantWriteACP = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
ACL |
The canned ACL to apply to the bucket. |
AccessControlPolicy |
Contains the elements that set the ACL permissions for an object per grantee. |
Bucket |
[required] The bucket to which to apply the ACL. |
ContentMD5 |
The Base64 encoded 128-bit For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
GrantFullControl |
Allows grantee the read, write, read ACP, and write ACP permissions on the bucket. |
GrantRead |
Allows grantee to list the objects in the bucket. |
GrantReadACP |
Allows grantee to read the bucket ACL. |
GrantWrite |
Allows grantee to create new objects in the bucket. For the bucket and object owners of existing objects, also allows deletions and overwrites of those objects. |
GrantWriteACP |
Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable bucket. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_analytics_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_analytics_configuration(
Bucket,
Id,
AnalyticsConfiguration,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket to which an analytics configuration is stored. |
Id |
[required] The ID that identifies the analytics configuration. |
AnalyticsConfiguration |
[required] The configuration and any analyses for the analytics filter. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_cors/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_cors(
Bucket,
CORSConfiguration,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] Specifies the bucket impacted by the |
CORSConfiguration |
[required] Describes the cross-origin access configuration for objects in an Amazon S3 bucket. For more information, see Enabling Cross-Origin Resource Sharing in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
ContentMD5 |
The Base64 encoded 128-bit For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation configures default encryption and Amazon S3 Bucket Keys for an existing bucket
Description
This operation configures default encryption and Amazon S3 Bucket Keys for an existing bucket.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_encryption/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_encryption(
Bucket,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
ServerSideEncryptionConfiguration,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] Specifies default encryption for a bucket using server-side encryption with different key options. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use path-style requests in the format
|
ContentMD5 |
The Base64 encoded 128-bit For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
For directory buckets, when you use Amazon Web Services SDKs, |
ServerSideEncryptionConfiguration |
[required] |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code For directory buckets, this header is not supported in this API
operation. If you specify this header, the request fails with the HTTP
status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration(
Bucket,
Id,
IntelligentTieringConfiguration
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose configuration you want to modify or retrieve. |
Id |
[required] The ID used to identify the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration. |
IntelligentTieringConfiguration |
[required] Container for S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration. |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_inventory_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_inventory_configuration(
Bucket,
Id,
InventoryConfiguration,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket where the inventory configuration will be stored. |
Id |
[required] The ID used to identify the inventory configuration. |
InventoryConfiguration |
[required] Specifies the inventory configuration. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_lifecycle/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_lifecycle(
Bucket,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
LifecycleConfiguration = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] |
ContentMD5 |
For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
LifecycleConfiguration |
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
Creates a new lifecycle configuration for the bucket or replaces an existing lifecycle configuration
Description
Creates a new lifecycle configuration for the bucket or replaces an existing lifecycle configuration. Keep in mind that this will overwrite an existing lifecycle configuration, so if you want to retain any configuration details, they must be included in the new lifecycle configuration. For information about lifecycle configuration, see Managing your storage lifecycle.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_lifecycle_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_lifecycle_configuration(
Bucket,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
LifecycleConfiguration = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
TransitionDefaultMinimumObjectSize = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket for which to set the configuration. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
LifecycleConfiguration |
Container for lifecycle rules. You can add as many as 1,000 rules. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code This parameter applies to general purpose buckets only. It is not supported for directory bucket lifecycle configurations. |
TransitionDefaultMinimumObjectSize |
Indicates which default minimum object size behavior is applied to the lifecycle configuration. This parameter applies to general purpose buckets only. It is not supported for directory bucket lifecycle configurations.
To customize the minimum object size for any transition you can add a
filter that specifies a custom |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_logging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_logging(
Bucket,
BucketLoggingStatus,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket for which to set the logging parameters. |
BucketLoggingStatus |
[required] Container for logging status information. |
ContentMD5 |
The MD5 hash of the For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_metrics_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_metrics_configuration(
Bucket,
Id,
MetricsConfiguration,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket for which the metrics configuration is set. |
Id |
[required] The ID used to identify the metrics configuration. The ID has a 64 character limit and can only contain letters, numbers, periods, dashes, and underscores. |
MetricsConfiguration |
[required] Specifies the metrics configuration. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_notification/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_notification(
Bucket,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
NotificationConfiguration,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket. |
ContentMD5 |
The MD5 hash of the
For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
NotificationConfiguration |
[required] The container for the configuration. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_notification_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_notification_configuration(
Bucket,
NotificationConfiguration,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
SkipDestinationValidation = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket. |
NotificationConfiguration |
[required] |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
SkipDestinationValidation |
Skips validation of Amazon SQS, Amazon SNS, and Lambda destinations. True or false value. |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_ownership_controls/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_ownership_controls(
Bucket,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
OwnershipControls
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose |
ContentMD5 |
The MD5 hash of the For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
OwnershipControls |
[required] The |
Applies an Amazon S3 bucket policy to an Amazon S3 bucket
Description
Applies an Amazon S3 bucket policy to an Amazon S3 bucket.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_policy(
Bucket,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
ConfirmRemoveSelfBucketAccess = NULL,
Policy,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use path-style requests in the format
|
ContentMD5 |
The MD5 hash of the request body. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding For the
For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If the individual checksum value you provide through
For directory buckets, when you use Amazon Web Services SDKs, |
ConfirmRemoveSelfBucketAccess |
Set this parameter to true to confirm that you want to remove your permissions to change this bucket policy in the future. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
Policy |
[required] The bucket policy as a JSON document. For directory buckets, the only IAM action supported in the bucket
policy is |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code For directory buckets, this header is not supported in this API
operation. If you specify this header, the request fails with the HTTP
status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_replication/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_replication(
Bucket,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
ReplicationConfiguration,
Token = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket |
ContentMD5 |
The Base64 encoded 128-bit For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
ReplicationConfiguration |
[required] |
Token |
A token to allow Object Lock to be enabled for an existing bucket. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_request_payment/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_request_payment(
Bucket,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
RequestPaymentConfiguration,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name. |
ContentMD5 |
The Base64 encoded 128-bit For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
RequestPaymentConfiguration |
[required] Container for Payer. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_tagging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_tagging(
Bucket,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
Tagging,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name. |
ContentMD5 |
The Base64 encoded 128-bit For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
Tagging |
[required] Container for the |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_versioning/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_versioning(
Bucket,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
MFA = NULL,
VersioningConfiguration,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name. |
ContentMD5 |
\>The Base64 encoded 128-bit For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
MFA |
The concatenation of the authentication device's serial number, a space, and the value that is displayed on your authentication device. |
VersioningConfiguration |
[required] Container for setting the versioning state. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_website/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_bucket_website(
Bucket,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
WebsiteConfiguration,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name. |
ContentMD5 |
The Base64 encoded 128-bit For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
WebsiteConfiguration |
[required] Container for the request. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
Adds an object to a bucket
Description
Adds an object to a bucket.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_object/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_object(
ACL = NULL,
Body = NULL,
Bucket,
CacheControl = NULL,
ContentDisposition = NULL,
ContentEncoding = NULL,
ContentLanguage = NULL,
ContentLength = NULL,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ContentType = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
ChecksumCRC32 = NULL,
ChecksumCRC32C = NULL,
ChecksumCRC64NVME = NULL,
ChecksumSHA1 = NULL,
ChecksumSHA256 = NULL,
Expires = NULL,
IfMatch = NULL,
IfNoneMatch = NULL,
GrantFullControl = NULL,
GrantRead = NULL,
GrantReadACP = NULL,
GrantWriteACP = NULL,
Key,
WriteOffsetBytes = NULL,
Metadata = NULL,
ServerSideEncryption = NULL,
StorageClass = NULL,
WebsiteRedirectLocation = NULL,
SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
SSECustomerKey = NULL,
SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
SSEKMSKeyId = NULL,
SSEKMSEncryptionContext = NULL,
BucketKeyEnabled = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
Tagging = NULL,
ObjectLockMode = NULL,
ObjectLockRetainUntilDate = NULL,
ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
ACL |
The canned ACL to apply to the object. For more information, see Canned ACL in the Amazon S3 User Guide. When adding a new object, you can use headers to grant ACL-based permissions to individual Amazon Web Services accounts or to predefined groups defined by Amazon S3. These permissions are then added to the ACL on the object. By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview and Managing ACLs Using the REST API in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If the bucket that you're uploading objects to uses the bucket owner
enforced setting for S3 Object Ownership, ACLs are disabled and no
longer affect permissions. Buckets that use this setting only accept PUT
requests that don't specify an ACL or PUT requests that specify bucket
owner full control ACLs, such as the
|
Body |
Object data. |
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name to which the PUT action was initiated. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
CacheControl |
Can be used to specify caching behavior along the request/reply chain. For more information, see http://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec14.html#sec14.9. |
ContentDisposition |
Specifies presentational information for the object. For more information, see https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc6266#section-4. |
ContentEncoding |
Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the Content-Type header field. For more information, see https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc9110.html#field.content-encoding. |
ContentLanguage |
The language the content is in. |
ContentLength |
Size of the body in bytes. This parameter is useful when the size of the body cannot be determined automatically. For more information, see https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc9110.html#name-content-length. |
ContentMD5 |
The Base64 encoded 128-bit The This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ContentType |
A standard MIME type describing the format of the contents. For more information, see https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc9110.html#name-content-type. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding For the
For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide. If the individual checksum value you provide through
The For directory buckets, when you use Amazon Web Services SDKs, |
ChecksumCRC32 |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header
specifies the Base64 encoded, 32-bit |
ChecksumCRC32C |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header
specifies the Base64 encoded, 32-bit |
ChecksumCRC64NVME |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header
specifies the Base64 encoded, 64-bit |
ChecksumSHA1 |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header
specifies the Base64 encoded, 160-bit |
ChecksumSHA256 |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header
specifies the Base64 encoded, 256-bit |
Expires |
The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable. For more information, see https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc7234#section-5.3. |
IfMatch |
Uploads the object only if the ETag (entity tag) value provided during
the WRITE operation matches the ETag of the object in S3. If the ETag
values do not match, the operation returns a If a conflicting operation occurs during the upload S3 returns a
Expects the ETag value as a string. For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232, or Conditional requests in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
IfNoneMatch |
Uploads the object only if the object key name does not already exist in
the bucket specified. Otherwise, Amazon S3 returns a
If a conflicting operation occurs during the upload S3 returns a
Expects the '*' (asterisk) character. For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232, or Conditional requests in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
GrantFullControl |
Gives the grantee READ, READ_ACP, and WRITE_ACP permissions on the object.
|
GrantRead |
Allows grantee to read the object data and its metadata.
|
GrantReadACP |
Allows grantee to read the object ACL.
|
GrantWriteACP |
Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable object.
|
Key |
[required] Object key for which the PUT action was initiated. |
WriteOffsetBytes |
Specifies the offset for appending data to existing objects in bytes. The offset must be equal to the size of the existing object being appended to. If no object exists, setting this header to 0 will create a new object. This functionality is only supported for objects in the Amazon S3 Express One Zone storage class in directory buckets. |
Metadata |
A map of metadata to store with the object in S3. |
ServerSideEncryption |
The server-side encryption algorithm that was used when you store this
object in Amazon S3 (for example,
|
StorageClass |
By default, Amazon S3 uses the STANDARD Storage Class to store newly created objects. The STANDARD storage class provides high durability and high availability. Depending on performance needs, you can specify a different Storage Class. For more information, see Storage Classes in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
|
WebsiteRedirectLocation |
If the bucket is configured as a website, redirects requests for this object to another object in the same bucket or to an external URL. Amazon S3 stores the value of this header in the object metadata. For information about object metadata, see Object Key and Metadata in the Amazon S3 User Guide. In the following example, the request header sets the redirect to an object (anotherPage.html) in the same bucket:
In the following example, the request header sets the object redirect to another website:
For more information about website hosting in Amazon S3, see Hosting Websites on Amazon S3 and How to Configure Website Page Redirects in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerAlgorithm |
Specifies the algorithm to use when encrypting the object (for example,
This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerKey |
Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in
encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is
discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be
appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the
This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerKeyMD5 |
Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSEKMSKeyId |
Specifies the KMS key ID (Key ID, Key ARN, or Key Alias) to use for object encryption. If the KMS key doesn't exist in the same account that's issuing the command, you must use the full Key ARN not the Key ID. General purpose buckets - If you specify
Directory buckets - To encrypt data using SSE-KMS, it's recommended
to specify the |
SSEKMSEncryptionContext |
Specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context as an
additional encryption context to use for object encryption. The value of
this header is a Base64 encoded string of a UTF-8 encoded JSON, which
contains the encryption context as key-value pairs. This value is stored
as object metadata and automatically gets passed on to Amazon Web
Services KMS for future General purpose buckets - This value must be explicitly added during
Directory buckets - You can optionally provide an explicit encryption context value. The value must match the default encryption context - the bucket Amazon Resource Name (ARN). An additional encryption context value is not supported. |
BucketKeyEnabled |
Specifies whether Amazon S3 should use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with server-side encryption using Key Management Service (KMS) keys (SSE-KMS). General purpose buckets - Setting this header to Directory buckets - S3 Bucket Keys are always enabled for |
RequestPayer |
|
Tagging |
The tag-set for the object. The tag-set must be encoded as URL Query parameters. (For example, "Key1=Value1") This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ObjectLockMode |
The Object Lock mode that you want to apply to this object. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ObjectLockRetainUntilDate |
The date and time when you want this object's Object Lock to expire. Must be formatted as a timestamp parameter. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus |
Specifies whether a legal hold will be applied to this object. For more information about S3 Object Lock, see Object Lock in the Amazon S3 User Guide. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_object_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_object_acl(
ACL = NULL,
AccessControlPolicy = NULL,
Bucket,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
GrantFullControl = NULL,
GrantRead = NULL,
GrantReadACP = NULL,
GrantWrite = NULL,
GrantWriteACP = NULL,
Key,
RequestPayer = NULL,
VersionId = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
ACL |
The canned ACL to apply to the object. For more information, see Canned ACL. |
AccessControlPolicy |
Contains the elements that set the ACL permissions for an object per grantee. |
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name that contains the object to which you want to attach the ACL. Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
ContentMD5 |
The Base64 encoded 128-bit For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
GrantFullControl |
Allows grantee the read, write, read ACP, and write ACP permissions on the bucket. This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts. |
GrantRead |
Allows grantee to list the objects in the bucket. This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts. |
GrantReadACP |
Allows grantee to read the bucket ACL. This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts. |
GrantWrite |
Allows grantee to create new objects in the bucket. For the bucket and object owners of existing objects, also allows deletions and overwrites of those objects. |
GrantWriteACP |
Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable bucket. This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts. |
Key |
[required] Key for which the PUT action was initiated. |
RequestPayer |
|
VersionId |
Version ID used to reference a specific version of the object. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_object_legal_hold/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_object_legal_hold(
Bucket,
Key,
LegalHold = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
VersionId = NULL,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name containing the object that you want to place a legal hold on. Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
Key |
[required] The key name for the object that you want to place a legal hold on. |
LegalHold |
Container element for the legal hold configuration you want to apply to the specified object. |
RequestPayer |
|
VersionId |
The version ID of the object that you want to place a legal hold on. |
ContentMD5 |
The MD5 hash for the request body. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_object_lock_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_object_lock_configuration(
Bucket,
ObjectLockConfiguration = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
Token = NULL,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket whose Object Lock configuration you want to create or replace. |
ObjectLockConfiguration |
The Object Lock configuration that you want to apply to the specified bucket. |
RequestPayer |
|
Token |
A token to allow Object Lock to be enabled for an existing bucket. |
ContentMD5 |
The MD5 hash for the request body. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_object_retention/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_object_retention(
Bucket,
Key,
Retention = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
VersionId = NULL,
BypassGovernanceRetention = NULL,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name that contains the object you want to apply this Object Retention configuration to. Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
Key |
[required] The key name for the object that you want to apply this Object Retention configuration to. |
Retention |
The container element for the Object Retention configuration. |
RequestPayer |
|
VersionId |
The version ID for the object that you want to apply this Object Retention configuration to. |
BypassGovernanceRetention |
Indicates whether this action should bypass Governance-mode restrictions. |
ContentMD5 |
The MD5 hash for the request body. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_object_tagging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_object_tagging(
Bucket,
Key,
VersionId = NULL,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
Tagging,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name containing the object. Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
Key |
[required] Name of the object key. |
VersionId |
The versionId of the object that the tag-set will be added to. |
ContentMD5 |
The MD5 hash for the request body. For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
Tagging |
[required] Container for the |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
RequestPayer |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_public_access_block/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_put_public_access_block(
Bucket,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
PublicAccessBlockConfiguration,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose |
ContentMD5 |
The MD5 hash of the
For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
PublicAccessBlockConfiguration |
[required] The |
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_restore_object/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_restore_object(
Bucket,
Key,
VersionId = NULL,
RestoreRequest = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name containing the object to restore. Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
Key |
[required] Object key for which the action was initiated. |
VersionId |
VersionId used to reference a specific version of the object. |
RestoreRequest |
|
RequestPayer |
|
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_select_object_content/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_select_object_content(
Bucket,
Key,
SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
SSECustomerKey = NULL,
SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
Expression,
ExpressionType,
RequestProgress = NULL,
InputSerialization,
OutputSerialization,
ScanRange = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The S3 bucket. |
Key |
[required] The object key. |
SSECustomerAlgorithm |
The server-side encryption (SSE) algorithm used to encrypt the object. This parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
SSECustomerKey |
The server-side encryption (SSE) customer managed key. This parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
SSECustomerKeyMD5 |
The MD5 server-side encryption (SSE) customer managed key. This parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
Expression |
[required] The expression that is used to query the object. |
ExpressionType |
[required] The type of the provided expression (for example, SQL). |
RequestProgress |
Specifies if periodic request progress information should be enabled. |
InputSerialization |
[required] Describes the format of the data in the object that is being queried. |
OutputSerialization |
[required] Describes the format of the data that you want Amazon S3 to return in response. |
ScanRange |
Specifies the byte range of the object to get the records from. A record is processed when its first byte is contained by the range. This parameter is optional, but when specified, it must not be empty. See RFC 2616, Section 14.35.1 about how to specify the start and end of the range.
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
Uploads a part in a multipart upload
Description
Uploads a part in a multipart upload.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_upload_part/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_upload_part(
Body = NULL,
Bucket,
ContentLength = NULL,
ContentMD5 = NULL,
ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
ChecksumCRC32 = NULL,
ChecksumCRC32C = NULL,
ChecksumCRC64NVME = NULL,
ChecksumSHA1 = NULL,
ChecksumSHA256 = NULL,
Key,
PartNumber,
UploadId,
SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
SSECustomerKey = NULL,
SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Body |
Object data. |
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
ContentLength |
Size of the body in bytes. This parameter is useful when the size of the body cannot be determined automatically. |
ContentMD5 |
The Base64 encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the part data. This parameter is auto-populated when using the command from the CLI. This parameter is required if object lock parameters are specified. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
ChecksumAlgorithm |
Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when
you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional
functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there
must be a corresponding If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided
This checksum algorithm must be the same for all parts and it match the
checksum value supplied in the
|
ChecksumCRC32 |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header
specifies the Base64 encoded, 32-bit |
ChecksumCRC32C |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header
specifies the Base64 encoded, 32-bit |
ChecksumCRC64NVME |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header
specifies the Base64 encoded, 64-bit |
ChecksumSHA1 |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header
specifies the Base64 encoded, 160-bit |
ChecksumSHA256 |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header
specifies the Base64 encoded, 256-bit |
Key |
[required] Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated. |
PartNumber |
[required] Part number of part being uploaded. This is a positive integer between 1 and 10,000. |
UploadId |
[required] Upload ID identifying the multipart upload whose part is being uploaded. |
SSECustomerAlgorithm |
Specifies the algorithm to use when encrypting the object (for example, AES256). This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerKey |
Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in
encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is
discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be
appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the
This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
SSECustomerKeyMD5 |
Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error. This functionality is not supported for directory buckets. |
RequestPayer |
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you
provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails
with the HTTP status code |
Uploads a part by copying data from an existing object as data source
Description
Uploads a part by copying data from an existing object as data source. To specify the data source, you add the request header x-amz-copy-source
in your request. To specify a byte range, you add the request header x-amz-copy-source-range
in your request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_upload_part_copy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_upload_part_copy(
Bucket,
CopySource,
CopySourceIfMatch = NULL,
CopySourceIfModifiedSince = NULL,
CopySourceIfNoneMatch = NULL,
CopySourceIfUnmodifiedSince = NULL,
CopySourceRange = NULL,
Key,
PartNumber,
UploadId,
SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
SSECustomerKey = NULL,
SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
CopySourceSSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
CopySourceSSECustomerKey = NULL,
CopySourceSSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
RequestPayer = NULL,
ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
ExpectedSourceBucketOwner = NULL
)
Arguments
Bucket |
[required] The bucket name. Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory
bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format
Copying objects across different Amazon Web Services Regions isn't
supported when the source or destination bucket is in Amazon Web
Services Local Zones. The source and destination buckets must have the
same parent Amazon Web Services Region. Otherwise, you get an HTTP
Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets. S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you
must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts
hostname takes the form
|
CopySource |
[required] Specifies the source object for the copy operation. You specify the value in one of two formats, depending on whether you want to access the source object through an access point:
If your bucket has versioning enabled, you could have multiple versions
of the same object. By default, If the current version is a delete marker and you don't specify a
versionId in the Directory buckets - S3 Versioning isn't enabled and supported for directory buckets. |
CopySourceIfMatch |
Copies the object if its entity tag (ETag) matches the specified tag. If both of the
Amazon S3 returns |
CopySourceIfModifiedSince |
Copies the object if it has been modified since the specified time. If both of the
Amazon S3 returns |
CopySourceIfNoneMatch |
Copies the object if its entity tag (ETag) is different than the specified ETag. If both of the
Amazon S3 returns |
CopySourceIfUnmodifiedSince |
Copies the object if it hasn't been modified since the specified time. If both of the
Amazon S3 returns |
CopySourceRange |
The range of bytes to copy from the source object. The range value must use the form bytes=first-last, where the first and last are the zero-based byte offsets to copy. For example, bytes=0-9 indicates that you want to copy the first 10 bytes of the source. You can copy a range only if the source object is greater than 5 MB. |
Key |
[required] Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated. |
PartNumber |
[required] Part number of part being copied. This is a positive integer between 1 and 10,000. |
UploadId |
[required] Upload ID identifying the multipart upload whose part is being copied. |
SSECustomerAlgorithm |
Specifies the algorithm to use when encrypting the object (for example, AES256). This functionality is not supported when the destination bucket is a directory bucket. |
SSECustomerKey |
Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in
encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is
discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be
appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the
This functionality is not supported when the destination bucket is a directory bucket. |
SSECustomerKeyMD5 |
Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error. This functionality is not supported when the destination bucket is a directory bucket. |
CopySourceSSECustomerAlgorithm |
Specifies the algorithm to use when decrypting the source object (for
example, This functionality is not supported when the source object is in a directory bucket. |
CopySourceSSECustomerKey |
Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use to decrypt the source object. The encryption key provided in this header must be one that was used when the source object was created. This functionality is not supported when the source object is in a directory bucket. |
CopySourceSSECustomerKeyMD5 |
Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error. This functionality is not supported when the source object is in a directory bucket. |
RequestPayer |
|
ExpectedBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected destination bucket owner. If the account
ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the destination
bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code |
ExpectedSourceBucketOwner |
The account ID of the expected source bucket owner. If the account ID
that you provide does not match the actual owner of the source bucket,
the request fails with the HTTP status code |
This operation is not supported for directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported for directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_write_get_object_response/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3_write_get_object_response(
RequestRoute,
RequestToken,
Body = NULL,
StatusCode = NULL,
ErrorCode = NULL,
ErrorMessage = NULL,
AcceptRanges = NULL,
CacheControl = NULL,
ContentDisposition = NULL,
ContentEncoding = NULL,
ContentLanguage = NULL,
ContentLength = NULL,
ContentRange = NULL,
ContentType = NULL,
ChecksumCRC32 = NULL,
ChecksumCRC32C = NULL,
ChecksumCRC64NVME = NULL,
ChecksumSHA1 = NULL,
ChecksumSHA256 = NULL,
DeleteMarker = NULL,
ETag = NULL,
Expires = NULL,
Expiration = NULL,
LastModified = NULL,
MissingMeta = NULL,
Metadata = NULL,
ObjectLockMode = NULL,
ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus = NULL,
ObjectLockRetainUntilDate = NULL,
PartsCount = NULL,
ReplicationStatus = NULL,
RequestCharged = NULL,
Restore = NULL,
ServerSideEncryption = NULL,
SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
SSEKMSKeyId = NULL,
SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
StorageClass = NULL,
TagCount = NULL,
VersionId = NULL,
BucketKeyEnabled = NULL
)
Arguments
RequestRoute |
[required] Route prefix to the HTTP URL generated. |
RequestToken |
[required] A single use encrypted token that maps
|
Body |
The object data. |
StatusCode |
The integer status code for an HTTP response of a corresponding
|
ErrorCode |
A string that uniquely identifies an error condition. Returned in the
\<Code\> tag of the error XML response for a corresponding
|
ErrorMessage |
Contains a generic description of the error condition. Returned in the
\<Message\> tag of the error XML response for a corresponding
|
AcceptRanges |
Indicates that a range of bytes was specified. |
CacheControl |
Specifies caching behavior along the request/reply chain. |
ContentDisposition |
Specifies presentational information for the object. |
ContentEncoding |
Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the Content-Type header field. |
ContentLanguage |
The language the content is in. |
ContentLength |
The size of the content body in bytes. |
ContentRange |
The portion of the object returned in the response. |
ContentType |
A standard MIME type describing the format of the object data. |
ChecksumCRC32 |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This specifies
the Base64 encoded, 32-bit Only one checksum header can be specified at a time. If you supply multiple checksum headers, this request will fail. |
ChecksumCRC32C |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This specifies
the Base64 encoded, 32-bit Only one checksum header can be specified at a time. If you supply multiple checksum headers, this request will fail. |
ChecksumCRC64NVME |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header
specifies the Base64 encoded, 64-bit |
ChecksumSHA1 |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This specifies
the Base64 encoded, 160-bit Only one checksum header can be specified at a time. If you supply multiple checksum headers, this request will fail. |
ChecksumSHA256 |
This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the
data received is the same data that was originally sent. This specifies
the Base64 encoded, 256-bit Only one checksum header can be specified at a time. If you supply multiple checksum headers, this request will fail. |
DeleteMarker |
Specifies whether an object stored in Amazon S3 is ( |
ETag |
An opaque identifier assigned by a web server to a specific version of a resource found at a URL. |
Expires |
The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable. |
Expiration |
If the object expiration is configured (see PUT Bucket lifecycle), the
response includes this header. It includes the |
LastModified |
The date and time that the object was last modified. |
MissingMeta |
Set to the number of metadata entries not returned in |
Metadata |
A map of metadata to store with the object in S3. |
ObjectLockMode |
Indicates whether an object stored in Amazon S3 has Object Lock enabled. For more information about S3 Object Lock, see Object Lock. |
ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus |
Indicates whether an object stored in Amazon S3 has an active legal hold. |
ObjectLockRetainUntilDate |
The date and time when Object Lock is configured to expire. |
PartsCount |
The count of parts this object has. |
ReplicationStatus |
Indicates if request involves bucket that is either a source or destination in a Replication rule. For more information about S3 Replication, see Replication. |
RequestCharged |
|
Restore |
Provides information about object restoration operation and expiration time of the restored object copy. |
ServerSideEncryption |
The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing requested object
in Amazon S3 (for example, AES256, |
SSECustomerAlgorithm |
Encryption algorithm used if server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was specified for object stored in Amazon S3. |
SSEKMSKeyId |
If present, specifies the ID (Key ID, Key ARN, or Key Alias) of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric encryption customer managed key that was used for stored in Amazon S3 object. |
SSECustomerKeyMD5 |
128-bit MD5 digest of customer-provided encryption key used in Amazon S3 to encrypt data stored in S3. For more information, see Protecting data using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C). |
StorageClass |
Provides storage class information of the object. Amazon S3 returns this header for all objects except for S3 Standard storage class objects. For more information, see Storage Classes. |
TagCount |
The number of tags, if any, on the object. |
VersionId |
An ID used to reference a specific version of the object. |
BucketKeyEnabled |
Indicates whether the object stored in Amazon S3 uses an S3 bucket key for server-side encryption with Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS). |
AWS S3 Control
Description
Amazon Web Services S3 Control provides access to Amazon S3 control plane actions.
Usage
s3control(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- s3control( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
associate_access_grants_identity_center | Associate your S3 Access Grants instance with an Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance |
create_access_grant | Creates an access grant that gives a grantee access to your S3 data |
create_access_grants_instance | Creates an S3 Access Grants instance, which serves as a logical grouping for access grants |
create_access_grants_location | The S3 data location that you would like to register in your S3 Access Grants instance |
create_access_point | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
create_access_point_for_object_lambda | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
create_bucket | This action creates an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket |
create_job | This operation creates an S3 Batch Operations job |
create_multi_region_access_point | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
create_storage_lens_group | Creates a new S3 Storage Lens group and associates it with the specified Amazon Web Services account ID |
delete_access_grant | Deletes the access grant from the S3 Access Grants instance |
delete_access_grants_instance | Deletes your S3 Access Grants instance |
delete_access_grants_instance_resource_policy | Deletes the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance |
delete_access_grants_location | Deregisters a location from your S3 Access Grants instance |
delete_access_point | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
delete_access_point_for_object_lambda | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
delete_access_point_policy | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
delete_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
delete_bucket | This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket |
delete_bucket_lifecycle_configuration | This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's lifecycle configuration |
delete_bucket_policy | This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket policy |
delete_bucket_replication | This operation deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration |
delete_bucket_tagging | This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's tags |
delete_job_tagging | Removes the entire tag set from the specified S3 Batch Operations job |
delete_multi_region_access_point | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
delete_public_access_block | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
delete_storage_lens_configuration | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
delete_storage_lens_configuration_tagging | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
delete_storage_lens_group | Deletes an existing S3 Storage Lens group |
describe_job | Retrieves the configuration parameters and status for a Batch Operations job |
describe_multi_region_access_point_operation | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
dissociate_access_grants_identity_center | Dissociates the Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance from the S3 Access Grants instance |
get_access_grant | Get the details of an access grant from your S3 Access Grants instance |
get_access_grants_instance | Retrieves the S3 Access Grants instance for a Region in your account |
get_access_grants_instance_for_prefix | Retrieve the S3 Access Grants instance that contains a particular prefix |
get_access_grants_instance_resource_policy | Returns the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance |
get_access_grants_location | Retrieves the details of a particular location registered in your S3 Access Grants instance |
get_access_point | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
get_access_point_configuration_for_object_lambda | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
get_access_point_for_object_lambda | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
get_access_point_policy | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
get_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
get_access_point_policy_status | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
get_access_point_policy_status_for_object_lambda | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
get_bucket | Gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket |
get_bucket_lifecycle_configuration | This action gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's lifecycle configuration |
get_bucket_policy | This action gets a bucket policy for an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket |
get_bucket_replication | This operation gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration |
get_bucket_tagging | This action gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's tags |
get_bucket_versioning | This operation returns the versioning state for S3 on Outposts buckets only |
get_data_access | Returns a temporary access credential from S3 Access Grants to the grantee or client application |
get_job_tagging | Returns the tags on an S3 Batch Operations job |
get_multi_region_access_point | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
get_multi_region_access_point_policy | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
get_multi_region_access_point_policy_status | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
get_multi_region_access_point_routes | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
get_public_access_block | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
get_storage_lens_configuration | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
get_storage_lens_configuration_tagging | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
get_storage_lens_group | Retrieves the Storage Lens group configuration details |
list_access_grants | Returns the list of access grants in your S3 Access Grants instance |
list_access_grants_instances | Returns a list of S3 Access Grants instances |
list_access_grants_locations | Returns a list of the locations registered in your S3 Access Grants instance |
list_access_points | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
list_access_points_for_object_lambda | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
list_caller_access_grants | Use this API to list the access grants that grant the caller access to Amazon S3 data through S3 Access Grants |
list_jobs | Lists current S3 Batch Operations jobs as well as the jobs that have ended within the last 90 days for the Amazon Web Services account making the request |
list_multi_region_access_points | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
list_regional_buckets | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
list_storage_lens_configurations | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
list_storage_lens_groups | Lists all the Storage Lens groups in the specified home Region |
list_tags_for_resource | This operation allows you to list all the Amazon Web Services resource tags for a specified resource |
put_access_grants_instance_resource_policy | Updates the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance |
put_access_point_configuration_for_object_lambda | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
put_access_point_policy | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
put_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
put_bucket_lifecycle_configuration | This action puts a lifecycle configuration to an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket |
put_bucket_policy | This action puts a bucket policy to an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket |
put_bucket_replication | This action creates an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration |
put_bucket_tagging | This action puts tags on an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket |
put_bucket_versioning | This operation sets the versioning state for S3 on Outposts buckets only |
put_job_tagging | Sets the supplied tag-set on an S3 Batch Operations job |
put_multi_region_access_point_policy | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
put_public_access_block | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
put_storage_lens_configuration | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
put_storage_lens_configuration_tagging | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
submit_multi_region_access_point_routes | This operation is not supported by directory buckets |
tag_resource | Creates a new Amazon Web Services resource tag or updates an existing resource tag |
untag_resource | This operation removes the specified Amazon Web Services resource tags from an S3 resource |
update_access_grants_location | Updates the IAM role of a registered location in your S3 Access Grants instance |
update_job_priority | Updates an existing S3 Batch Operations job's priority |
update_job_status | Updates the status for the specified job |
update_storage_lens_group | Updates the existing Storage Lens group |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- s3control()
svc$associate_access_grants_identity_center(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Associate your S3 Access Grants instance with an Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance
Description
Associate your S3 Access Grants instance with an Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance. Use this action if you want to create access grants for users or groups from your corporate identity directory. First, you must add your corporate identity directory to Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center. Then, you can associate this IAM Identity Center instance with your S3 Access Grants instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_associate_access_grants_identity_center/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_associate_access_grants_identity_center(AccountId, IdentityCenterArn)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
IdentityCenterArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance that you are associating with your S3 Access Grants instance. An IAM Identity Center instance is your corporate identity directory that you added to the IAM Identity Center. You can use the ListInstances API operation to retrieve a list of your Identity Center instances and their ARNs. |
Creates an access grant that gives a grantee access to your S3 data
Description
Creates an access grant that gives a grantee access to your S3 data. The grantee can be an IAM user or role or a directory user, or group. Before you can create a grant, you must have an S3 Access Grants instance in the same Region as the S3 data. You can create an S3 Access Grants instance using the create_access_grants_instance
. You must also have registered at least one S3 data location in your S3 Access Grants instance using create_access_grants_location
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_access_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_create_access_grant(
AccountId,
AccessGrantsLocationId,
AccessGrantsLocationConfiguration = NULL,
Grantee,
Permission,
ApplicationArn = NULL,
S3PrefixType = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
AccessGrantsLocationId |
[required] The ID of the registered location to which you are granting access. S3
Access Grants assigns this ID when you register the location. S3 Access
Grants assigns the ID If you are passing the |
AccessGrantsLocationConfiguration |
The configuration options of the grant location. The grant location is
the S3 path to the data to which you are granting access. It contains
the |
Grantee |
[required] The user, group, or role to which you are granting access. You can grant access to an IAM user or role. If you have added your corporate directory to Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center and associated your Identity Center instance with your S3 Access Grants instance, the grantee can also be a corporate directory user or group. |
Permission |
[required] The type of access that you are granting to your S3 data, which can be set to one of the following values:
|
ApplicationArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center application associated with your Identity Center instance. If an application ARN is included in the request to create an access grant, the grantee can only access the S3 data through this application. |
S3PrefixType |
The type of |
Tags |
The Amazon Web Services resource tags that you are adding to the access grant. Each tag is a label consisting of a user-defined key and value. Tags can help you manage, identify, organize, search for, and filter resources. |
Creates an S3 Access Grants instance, which serves as a logical grouping for access grants
Description
Creates an S3 Access Grants instance, which serves as a logical grouping for access grants. You can create one S3 Access Grants instance per Region per account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_access_grants_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_create_access_grants_instance(
AccountId,
IdentityCenterArn = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
IdentityCenterArn |
If you would like to associate your S3 Access Grants instance with an Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance, use this field to pass the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance that you are associating with your S3 Access Grants instance. An IAM Identity Center instance is your corporate identity directory that you added to the IAM Identity Center. You can use the ListInstances API operation to retrieve a list of your Identity Center instances and their ARNs. |
Tags |
The Amazon Web Services resource tags that you are adding to the S3 Access Grants instance. Each tag is a label consisting of a user-defined key and value. Tags can help you manage, identify, organize, search for, and filter resources. |
The S3 data location that you would like to register in your S3 Access Grants instance
Description
The S3 data location that you would like to register in your S3 Access Grants instance. Your S3 data must be in the same Region as your S3 Access Grants instance. The location can be one of the following:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_access_grants_location/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_create_access_grants_location(
AccountId,
LocationScope,
IAMRoleArn,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
LocationScope |
[required] The S3 path to the location that you are registering. The location scope
can be the default S3 location |
IAMRoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role for the registered location. S3 Access Grants assumes this role to manage access to the registered location. |
Tags |
The Amazon Web Services resource tags that you are adding to the S3 Access Grants location. Each tag is a label consisting of a user-defined key and value. Tags can help you manage, identify, organize, search for, and filter resources. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_access_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_create_access_point(
AccountId,
Name,
Bucket,
VpcConfiguration = NULL,
PublicAccessBlockConfiguration = NULL,
BucketAccountId = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the account that owns the specified access point. |
Name |
[required] The name you want to assign to this access point. |
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket that you want to associate this access point with. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in
the format
|
VpcConfiguration |
If you include this field, Amazon S3 restricts access to this access point to requests from the specified virtual private cloud (VPC). This is required for creating an access point for Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets. |
PublicAccessBlockConfiguration |
The |
BucketAccountId |
The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the S3 bucket associated with this access point. For same account access point when your bucket and access point belong
to the same account owner, the |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_access_point_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_create_access_point_for_object_lambda(AccountId, Name, Configuration)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for owner of the specified Object Lambda Access Point. |
Name |
[required] The name you want to assign to this Object Lambda Access Point. |
Configuration |
[required] Object Lambda Access Point configuration as a JSON document. |
This action creates an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket
Description
This action creates an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket. To create an S3 bucket, see Create Bucket in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_bucket/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_create_bucket(
ACL = NULL,
Bucket,
CreateBucketConfiguration = NULL,
GrantFullControl = NULL,
GrantRead = NULL,
GrantReadACP = NULL,
GrantWrite = NULL,
GrantWriteACP = NULL,
ObjectLockEnabledForBucket = NULL,
OutpostId = NULL
)
Arguments
ACL |
The canned ACL to apply to the bucket. This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets. |
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket. |
CreateBucketConfiguration |
The configuration information for the bucket. This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets. |
GrantFullControl |
Allows grantee the read, write, read ACP, and write ACP permissions on the bucket. This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets. |
GrantRead |
Allows grantee to list the objects in the bucket. This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets. |
GrantReadACP |
Allows grantee to read the bucket ACL. This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets. |
GrantWrite |
Allows grantee to create, overwrite, and delete any object in the bucket. This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets. |
GrantWriteACP |
Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable bucket. This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets. |
ObjectLockEnabledForBucket |
Specifies whether you want S3 Object Lock to be enabled for the new bucket. This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets. |
OutpostId |
The ID of the Outposts where the bucket is being created. This ID is required by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets. |
This operation creates an S3 Batch Operations job
Description
This operation creates an S3 Batch Operations job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_create_job(
AccountId,
ConfirmationRequired = NULL,
Operation,
Report,
ClientRequestToken,
Manifest = NULL,
Description = NULL,
Priority,
RoleArn,
Tags = NULL,
ManifestGenerator = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that creates the job. |
ConfirmationRequired |
Indicates whether confirmation is required before Amazon S3 runs the job. Confirmation is only required for jobs created through the Amazon S3 console. |
Operation |
[required] The action that you want this job to perform on every object listed in the manifest. For more information about the available actions, see Operations in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
Report |
[required] Configuration parameters for the optional job-completion report. |
ClientRequestToken |
[required] An idempotency token to ensure that you don't accidentally submit the same request twice. You can use any string up to the maximum length. |
Manifest |
Configuration parameters for the manifest. |
Description |
A description for this job. You can use any string within the permitted length. Descriptions don't need to be unique and can be used for multiple jobs. |
Priority |
[required] The numerical priority for this job. Higher numbers indicate higher priority. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the Identity and Access Management (IAM) role that Batch Operations will use to run this job's action on every object in the manifest. |
Tags |
A set of tags to associate with the S3 Batch Operations job. This is an optional parameter. |
ManifestGenerator |
The attribute container for the ManifestGenerator details. Jobs must be created with either a manifest file or a ManifestGenerator, but not both. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_multi_region_access_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_create_multi_region_access_point(AccountId, ClientToken, Details)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point. The owner of the Multi-Region Access Point also must own the underlying buckets. |
ClientToken |
[required] An idempotency token used to identify the request and guarantee that requests are unique. |
Details |
[required] A container element containing details about the Multi-Region Access Point. |
Creates a new S3 Storage Lens group and associates it with the specified Amazon Web Services account ID
Description
Creates a new S3 Storage Lens group and associates it with the specified Amazon Web Services account ID. An S3 Storage Lens group is a custom grouping of objects based on prefix, suffix, object tags, object size, object age, or a combination of these filters. For each Storage Lens group that you’ve created, you can also optionally add Amazon Web Services resource tags. For more information about S3 Storage Lens groups, see Working with S3 Storage Lens groups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_storage_lens_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_create_storage_lens_group(AccountId, StorageLensGroup, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that the Storage Lens group is created from and associated with. |
StorageLensGroup |
[required] The Storage Lens group configuration. |
Tags |
The Amazon Web Services resource tags that you're adding to your Storage Lens group. This parameter is optional. |
Deletes the access grant from the S3 Access Grants instance
Description
Deletes the access grant from the S3 Access Grants instance. You cannot undo an access grant deletion and the grantee will no longer have access to the S3 data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_access_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_access_grant(AccountId, AccessGrantId)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
AccessGrantId |
[required] The ID of the access grant. S3 Access Grants auto-generates this ID when you create the access grant. |
Deletes your S3 Access Grants instance
Description
Deletes your S3 Access Grants instance. You must first delete the access grants and locations before S3 Access Grants can delete the instance. See delete_access_grant
and delete_access_grants_location
. If you have associated an IAM Identity Center instance with your S3 Access Grants instance, you must first dissassociate the Identity Center instance from the S3 Access Grants instance before you can delete the S3 Access Grants instance. See associate_access_grants_identity_center
and dissociate_access_grants_identity_center
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_access_grants_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_access_grants_instance(AccountId)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
Deletes the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance
Description
Deletes the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance. The resource policy is used to manage cross-account access to your S3 Access Grants instance. By deleting the resource policy, you delete any cross-account permissions to your S3 Access Grants instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_access_grants_instance_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_access_grants_instance_resource_policy(AccountId)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
Deregisters a location from your S3 Access Grants instance
Description
Deregisters a location from your S3 Access Grants instance. You can only delete a location registration from an S3 Access Grants instance if there are no grants associated with this location. See Delete a grant for information on how to delete grants. You need to have at least one registered location in your S3 Access Grants instance in order to create access grants.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_access_grants_location/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_access_grants_location(AccountId, AccessGrantsLocationId)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
AccessGrantsLocationId |
[required] The ID of the registered location that you are deregistering from your
S3 Access Grants instance. S3 Access Grants assigned this ID when you
registered the location. S3 Access Grants assigns the ID |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_access_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_access_point(AccountId, Name)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the account that owns the specified access point. |
Name |
[required] The name of the access point you want to delete. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the access point
accessed in the format
|
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_access_point_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_access_point_for_object_lambda(AccountId, Name)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point. |
Name |
[required] The name of the access point you want to delete. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_access_point_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_access_point_policy(AccountId, Name)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified access point. |
Name |
[required] The name of the access point whose policy you want to delete. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the access point
accessed in the format
|
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda(AccountId, Name)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point. |
Name |
[required] The name of the Object Lambda Access Point you want to delete the policy for. |
This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket
Description
This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket. To delete an S3 bucket, see delete_bucket
in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_bucket/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_bucket(AccountId, Bucket)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID that owns the Outposts bucket. |
Bucket |
[required] Specifies the bucket being deleted. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in
the format
|
This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's lifecycle configuration
Description
This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's lifecycle configuration. To delete an S3 bucket's lifecycle configuration, see DeleteBucketLifecycle in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_bucket_lifecycle_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_bucket_lifecycle_configuration(AccountId, Bucket)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID of the lifecycle configuration to delete. |
Bucket |
[required] Specifies the bucket. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in
the format
|
This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket policy
Description
This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket policy. To delete an S3 bucket policy, see delete_bucket_policy
in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_bucket_policy(AccountId, Bucket)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID of the Outposts bucket. |
Bucket |
[required] Specifies the bucket. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in
the format
|
This operation deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration
Description
This operation deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration. To delete an S3 bucket's replication configuration, see delete_bucket_replication
in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_bucket_replication/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_bucket_replication(AccountId, Bucket)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket to delete the replication configuration for. |
Bucket |
[required] Specifies the S3 on Outposts bucket to delete the replication configuration for. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in
the format
|
This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's tags
Description
This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's tags. To delete an S3 bucket tags, see delete_bucket_tagging
in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_bucket_tagging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_bucket_tagging(AccountId, Bucket)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket tag set to be removed. |
Bucket |
[required] The bucket ARN that has the tag set to be removed. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in
the format
|
Removes the entire tag set from the specified S3 Batch Operations job
Description
Removes the entire tag set from the specified S3 Batch Operations job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_job_tagging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_job_tagging(AccountId, JobId)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the S3 Batch Operations job. |
JobId |
[required] The ID for the S3 Batch Operations job whose tags you want to delete. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_multi_region_access_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_multi_region_access_point(AccountId, ClientToken, Details)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point. |
ClientToken |
[required] An idempotency token used to identify the request and guarantee that requests are unique. |
Details |
[required] A container element containing details about the Multi-Region Access Point. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_public_access_block/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_public_access_block(AccountId)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID for the Amazon Web Services account whose
|
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_storage_lens_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_storage_lens_configuration(ConfigId, AccountId)
Arguments
ConfigId |
[required] The ID of the S3 Storage Lens configuration. |
AccountId |
[required] The account ID of the requester. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_storage_lens_configuration_tagging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_storage_lens_configuration_tagging(ConfigId, AccountId)
Arguments
ConfigId |
[required] The ID of the S3 Storage Lens configuration. |
AccountId |
[required] The account ID of the requester. |
Deletes an existing S3 Storage Lens group
Description
Deletes an existing S3 Storage Lens group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_storage_lens_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_delete_storage_lens_group(Name, AccountId)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the Storage Lens group that you're trying to delete. |
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID used to create the Storage Lens group that you're trying to delete. |
Retrieves the configuration parameters and status for a Batch Operations job
Description
Retrieves the configuration parameters and status for a Batch Operations job. For more information, see S3 Batch Operations in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_describe_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_describe_job(AccountId, JobId)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the S3 Batch Operations job. |
JobId |
[required] The ID for the job whose information you want to retrieve. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_describe_multi_region_access_point_operation/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_describe_multi_region_access_point_operation(
AccountId,
RequestTokenARN
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point. |
RequestTokenARN |
[required] The request token associated with the request you want to know about. This request token is returned as part of the response when you make an asynchronous request. You provide this token to query about the status of the asynchronous action. |
Dissociates the Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance from the S3 Access Grants instance
Description
Dissociates the Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance from the S3 Access Grants instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_dissociate_access_grants_identity_center/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_dissociate_access_grants_identity_center(AccountId)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
Get the details of an access grant from your S3 Access Grants instance
Description
Get the details of an access grant from your S3 Access Grants instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_access_grant(AccountId, AccessGrantId)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
AccessGrantId |
[required] The ID of the access grant. S3 Access Grants auto-generates this ID when you create the access grant. |
Retrieves the S3 Access Grants instance for a Region in your account
Description
Retrieves the S3 Access Grants instance for a Region in your account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_grants_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_access_grants_instance(AccountId)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
Retrieve the S3 Access Grants instance that contains a particular prefix
Description
Retrieve the S3 Access Grants instance that contains a particular prefix.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_grants_instance_for_prefix/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_access_grants_instance_for_prefix(AccountId, S3Prefix)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that is making this request. |
S3Prefix |
[required] The S3 prefix of the access grants that you would like to retrieve. |
Returns the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance
Description
Returns the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_grants_instance_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_access_grants_instance_resource_policy(AccountId)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
Retrieves the details of a particular location registered in your S3 Access Grants instance
Description
Retrieves the details of a particular location registered in your S3 Access Grants instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_grants_location/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_access_grants_location(AccountId, AccessGrantsLocationId)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
AccessGrantsLocationId |
[required] The ID of the registered location that you are retrieving. S3 Access
Grants assigns this ID when you register the location. S3 Access Grants
assigns the ID |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_access_point(AccountId, Name)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the account that owns the specified access point. |
Name |
[required] The name of the access point whose configuration information you want to retrieve. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the access point
accessed in the format
|
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_point_configuration_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_access_point_configuration_for_object_lambda(AccountId, Name)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point. |
Name |
[required] The name of the Object Lambda Access Point you want to return the configuration for. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_point_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_access_point_for_object_lambda(AccountId, Name)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point. |
Name |
[required] The name of the Object Lambda Access Point. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_point_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_access_point_policy(AccountId, Name)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified access point. |
Name |
[required] The name of the access point whose policy you want to retrieve. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the access point
accessed in the format
|
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda(AccountId, Name)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point. |
Name |
[required] The name of the Object Lambda Access Point. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_point_policy_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_access_point_policy_status(AccountId, Name)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified access point. |
Name |
[required] The name of the access point whose policy status you want to retrieve. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_point_policy_status_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_access_point_policy_status_for_object_lambda(AccountId, Name)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point. |
Name |
[required] The name of the Object Lambda Access Point. |
Gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket
Description
Gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket. For more information, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_bucket/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_bucket(AccountId, Bucket)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket. |
Bucket |
[required] Specifies the bucket. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in
the format
|
This action gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's lifecycle configuration
Description
This action gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's lifecycle configuration. To get an S3 bucket's lifecycle configuration, see get_bucket_lifecycle_configuration
in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_bucket_lifecycle_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_bucket_lifecycle_configuration(AccountId, Bucket)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket. |
Bucket |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the bucket. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in
the format
|
This action gets a bucket policy for an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket
Description
This action gets a bucket policy for an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket. To get a policy for an S3 bucket, see get_bucket_policy
in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_bucket_policy(AccountId, Bucket)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket. |
Bucket |
[required] Specifies the bucket. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in
the format
|
This operation gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration
Description
This operation gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration. To get an S3 bucket's replication configuration, see get_bucket_replication
in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_bucket_replication/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_bucket_replication(AccountId, Bucket)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket. |
Bucket |
[required] Specifies the bucket to get the replication information for. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in
the format
|
This action gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's tags
Description
This action gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's tags. To get an S3 bucket tags, see get_bucket_tagging
in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_bucket_tagging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_bucket_tagging(AccountId, Bucket)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket. |
Bucket |
[required] Specifies the bucket. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in
the format
|
This operation returns the versioning state for S3 on Outposts buckets only
Description
This operation returns the versioning state for S3 on Outposts buckets only. To return the versioning state for an S3 bucket, see get_bucket_versioning
in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_bucket_versioning/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_bucket_versioning(AccountId, Bucket)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 on Outposts bucket. |
Bucket |
[required] The S3 on Outposts bucket to return the versioning state for. |
Returns a temporary access credential from S3 Access Grants to the grantee or client application
Description
Returns a temporary access credential from S3 Access Grants to the grantee or client application. The temporary credential is an Amazon Web Services STS token that grants them access to the S3 data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_data_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_data_access(
AccountId,
Target,
Permission,
DurationSeconds = NULL,
Privilege = NULL,
TargetType = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
Target |
[required] The S3 URI path of the data to which you are requesting temporary access credentials. If the requesting account has an access grant for this data, S3 Access Grants vends temporary access credentials in the response. |
Permission |
[required] The type of permission granted to your S3 data, which can be set to one of the following values:
|
DurationSeconds |
The session duration, in seconds, of the temporary access credential that S3 Access Grants vends to the grantee or client application. The default value is 1 hour, but the grantee can specify a range from 900 seconds (15 minutes) up to 43200 seconds (12 hours). If the grantee requests a value higher than this maximum, the operation fails. |
Privilege |
The scope of the temporary access credential that S3 Access Grants vends to the grantee or client application.
|
TargetType |
The type of |
Returns the tags on an S3 Batch Operations job
Description
Returns the tags on an S3 Batch Operations job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_job_tagging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_job_tagging(AccountId, JobId)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the S3 Batch Operations job. |
JobId |
[required] The ID for the S3 Batch Operations job whose tags you want to retrieve. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_multi_region_access_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_multi_region_access_point(AccountId, Name)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point. |
Name |
[required] The name of the Multi-Region Access Point whose configuration information you want to receive. The name of the Multi-Region Access Point is different from the alias. For more information about the distinction between the name and the alias of an Multi-Region Access Point, see Rules for naming Amazon S3 Multi-Region Access Points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_multi_region_access_point_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_multi_region_access_point_policy(AccountId, Name)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point. |
Name |
[required] Specifies the Multi-Region Access Point. The name of the Multi-Region Access Point is different from the alias. For more information about the distinction between the name and the alias of an Multi-Region Access Point, see Rules for naming Amazon S3 Multi-Region Access Points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_multi_region_access_point_policy_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_multi_region_access_point_policy_status(AccountId, Name)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point. |
Name |
[required] Specifies the Multi-Region Access Point. The name of the Multi-Region Access Point is different from the alias. For more information about the distinction between the name and the alias of an Multi-Region Access Point, see Rules for naming Amazon S3 Multi-Region Access Points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_multi_region_access_point_routes/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_multi_region_access_point_routes(AccountId, Mrap)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point. |
Mrap |
[required] The Multi-Region Access Point ARN. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_public_access_block/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_public_access_block(AccountId)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID for the Amazon Web Services account whose
|
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_storage_lens_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_storage_lens_configuration(ConfigId, AccountId)
Arguments
ConfigId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon S3 Storage Lens configuration. |
AccountId |
[required] The account ID of the requester. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_storage_lens_configuration_tagging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_storage_lens_configuration_tagging(ConfigId, AccountId)
Arguments
ConfigId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon S3 Storage Lens configuration. |
AccountId |
[required] The account ID of the requester. |
Retrieves the Storage Lens group configuration details
Description
Retrieves the Storage Lens group configuration details.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_storage_lens_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_get_storage_lens_group(Name, AccountId)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the Storage Lens group that you're trying to retrieve the configuration details for. |
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the Storage Lens group that you're trying to retrieve the details for. |
Returns the list of access grants in your S3 Access Grants instance
Description
Returns the list of access grants in your S3 Access Grants instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_access_grants/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_list_access_grants(
AccountId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
GranteeType = NULL,
GranteeIdentifier = NULL,
Permission = NULL,
GrantScope = NULL,
ApplicationArn = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
NextToken |
A pagination token to request the next page of results. Pass this value
into a subsequent |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of access grants that you would like returned in the
|
GranteeType |
The type of the grantee to which access has been granted. It can be one of the following values:
|
GranteeIdentifier |
The unique identifer of the |
Permission |
The type of permission granted to your S3 data, which can be set to one of the following values:
|
GrantScope |
The S3 path of the data to which you are granting access. It is the
result of appending the |
ApplicationArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center application associated with your Identity Center instance. If the grant includes an application ARN, the grantee can only access the S3 data through this application. |
Returns a list of S3 Access Grants instances
Description
Returns a list of S3 Access Grants instances. An S3 Access Grants instance serves as a logical grouping for your individual access grants. You can only have one S3 Access Grants instance per Region per account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_access_grants_instances/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_list_access_grants_instances(
AccountId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
NextToken |
A pagination token to request the next page of results. Pass this value
into a subsequent |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of access grants that you would like returned in the
|
Returns a list of the locations registered in your S3 Access Grants instance
Description
Returns a list of the locations registered in your S3 Access Grants instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_access_grants_locations/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_list_access_grants_locations(
AccountId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
LocationScope = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
NextToken |
A pagination token to request the next page of results. Pass this value
into a subsequent |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of access grants that you would like returned in the
|
LocationScope |
The S3 path to the location that you are registering. The location scope
can be the default S3 location |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_access_points/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_list_access_points(
AccountId,
Bucket = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the account that owns the specified access points. |
Bucket |
The name of the bucket whose associated access points you want to list. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in
the format
|
NextToken |
A continuation token. If a previous call to
|
MaxResults |
The maximum number of access points that you want to include in the
list. If the specified bucket has more than this number of access
points, then the response will include a continuation token in the
|
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_access_points_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_list_access_points_for_object_lambda(
AccountId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point. |
NextToken |
If the list has more access points than can be returned in one call to this API, this field contains a continuation token that you can provide in subsequent calls to this API to retrieve additional access points. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of access points that you want to include in the
list. The response may contain fewer access points but will never
contain more. If there are more than this number of access points, then
the response will include a continuation token in the |
Use this API to list the access grants that grant the caller access to Amazon S3 data through S3 Access Grants
Description
Use this API to list the access grants that grant the caller access to Amazon S3 data through S3 Access Grants. The caller (grantee) can be an Identity and Access Management (IAM) identity or Amazon Web Services Identity Center corporate directory identity. You must pass the Amazon Web Services account of the S3 data owner (grantor) in the request. You can, optionally, narrow the results by GrantScope
, using a fragment of the data's S3 path, and S3 Access Grants will return only the grants with a path that contains the path fragment. You can also pass the AllowedByApplication
filter in the request, which returns only the grants authorized for applications, whether the application is the caller's Identity Center application or any other application (ALL
). For more information, see List the caller's access grants in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_caller_access_grants/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_list_caller_access_grants(
AccountId,
GrantScope = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
AllowedByApplication = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
GrantScope |
The S3 path of the data that you would like to access. Must start with
|
NextToken |
A pagination token to request the next page of results. Pass this value
into a subsequent |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of access grants that you would like returned in the
|
AllowedByApplication |
If this optional parameter is passed in the request, a filter is applied
to the results. The results will include only the access grants for the
caller's Identity Center application or for any other applications
( |
Lists current S3 Batch Operations jobs as well as the jobs that have ended within the last 90 days for the Amazon Web Services account making the request
Description
Lists current S3 Batch Operations jobs as well as the jobs that have ended within the last 90 days for the Amazon Web Services account making the request. For more information, see S3 Batch Operations in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_list_jobs(
AccountId,
JobStatuses = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the S3 Batch Operations job. |
JobStatuses |
The |
NextToken |
A pagination token to request the next page of results. Use the token
that Amazon S3 returned in the |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of jobs that Amazon S3 will include in the
|
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_multi_region_access_points/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_list_multi_region_access_points(
AccountId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point. |
NextToken |
Not currently used. Do not use this parameter. |
MaxResults |
Not currently used. Do not use this parameter. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_regional_buckets/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_list_regional_buckets(
AccountId,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
OutpostId = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket. |
NextToken |
|
MaxResults |
|
OutpostId |
The ID of the Outposts resource. This ID is required by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_storage_lens_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_list_storage_lens_configurations(AccountId, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID of the requester. |
NextToken |
A pagination token to request the next page of results. |
Lists all the Storage Lens groups in the specified home Region
Description
Lists all the Storage Lens groups in the specified home Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_storage_lens_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_list_storage_lens_groups(AccountId, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that owns the Storage Lens groups. |
NextToken |
The token for the next set of results, or |
This operation allows you to list all the Amazon Web Services resource tags for a specified resource
Description
This operation allows you to list all the Amazon Web Services resource tags for a specified resource. Each tag is a label consisting of a user-defined key and value. Tags can help you manage, identify, organize, search for, and filter resources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_list_tags_for_resource(AccountId, ResourceArn)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the resource owner. |
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the S3 resource that you want to list the tags for. The tagged resource can be an S3 Storage Lens group or S3 Access Grants instance, registered location, or grant. |
Updates the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance
Description
Updates the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_access_grants_instance_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_put_access_grants_instance_resource_policy(
AccountId,
Policy,
Organization = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
Policy |
[required] The resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance that you are updating. |
Organization |
The Organization of the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_access_point_configuration_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_put_access_point_configuration_for_object_lambda(
AccountId,
Name,
Configuration
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point. |
Name |
[required] The name of the Object Lambda Access Point. |
Configuration |
[required] Object Lambda Access Point configuration document. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_access_point_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_put_access_point_policy(AccountId, Name, Policy)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for owner of the bucket associated with the specified access point. |
Name |
[required] The name of the access point that you want to associate with the specified policy. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the access point
accessed in the format
|
Policy |
[required] The policy that you want to apply to the specified access point. For more information about access point policies, see Managing data access with Amazon S3 access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_put_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda(AccountId, Name, Policy)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point. |
Name |
[required] The name of the Object Lambda Access Point. |
Policy |
[required] Object Lambda Access Point resource policy document. |
This action puts a lifecycle configuration to an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket
Description
This action puts a lifecycle configuration to an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket. To put a lifecycle configuration to an S3 bucket, see put_bucket_lifecycle_configuration
in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_bucket_lifecycle_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_put_bucket_lifecycle_configuration(
AccountId,
Bucket,
LifecycleConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket. |
Bucket |
[required] The name of the bucket for which to set the configuration. |
LifecycleConfiguration |
Container for lifecycle rules. You can add as many as 1,000 rules. |
This action puts a bucket policy to an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket
Description
This action puts a bucket policy to an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket. To put a policy on an S3 bucket, see put_bucket_policy
in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_put_bucket_policy(
AccountId,
Bucket,
ConfirmRemoveSelfBucketAccess = NULL,
Policy
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket. |
Bucket |
[required] Specifies the bucket. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in
the format
|
ConfirmRemoveSelfBucketAccess |
Set this parameter to true to confirm that you want to remove your permissions to change this bucket policy in the future. This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets. |
Policy |
[required] The bucket policy as a JSON document. |
This action creates an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration
Description
This action creates an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration. To create an S3 bucket's replication configuration, see put_bucket_replication
in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_bucket_replication/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_put_bucket_replication(AccountId, Bucket, ReplicationConfiguration)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket. |
Bucket |
[required] Specifies the S3 on Outposts bucket to set the configuration for. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in
the format
|
ReplicationConfiguration |
[required] |
This action puts tags on an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket
Description
This action puts tags on an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket. To put tags on an S3 bucket, see put_bucket_tagging
in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_bucket_tagging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_put_bucket_tagging(AccountId, Bucket, Tagging)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket. |
Bucket |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the bucket. For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well. For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web
Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in
the format
|
Tagging |
[required] |
This operation sets the versioning state for S3 on Outposts buckets only
Description
This operation sets the versioning state for S3 on Outposts buckets only. To set the versioning state for an S3 bucket, see put_bucket_versioning
in the Amazon S3 API Reference.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_bucket_versioning/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_put_bucket_versioning(
AccountId,
Bucket,
MFA = NULL,
VersioningConfiguration
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 on Outposts bucket. |
Bucket |
[required] The S3 on Outposts bucket to set the versioning state for. |
MFA |
The concatenation of the authentication device's serial number, a space, and the value that is displayed on your authentication device. |
VersioningConfiguration |
[required] The root-level tag for the |
Sets the supplied tag-set on an S3 Batch Operations job
Description
Sets the supplied tag-set on an S3 Batch Operations job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_job_tagging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_put_job_tagging(AccountId, JobId, Tags)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the S3 Batch Operations job. |
JobId |
[required] The ID for the S3 Batch Operations job whose tags you want to replace. |
Tags |
[required] The set of tags to associate with the S3 Batch Operations job. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_multi_region_access_point_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_put_multi_region_access_point_policy(AccountId, ClientToken, Details)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point. |
ClientToken |
[required] An idempotency token used to identify the request and guarantee that requests are unique. |
Details |
[required] A container element containing the details of the policy for the Multi-Region Access Point. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_public_access_block/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_put_public_access_block(PublicAccessBlockConfiguration, AccountId)
Arguments
PublicAccessBlockConfiguration |
[required] The |
AccountId |
[required] The account ID for the Amazon Web Services account whose
|
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_storage_lens_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_put_storage_lens_configuration(
ConfigId,
AccountId,
StorageLensConfiguration,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ConfigId |
[required] The ID of the S3 Storage Lens configuration. |
AccountId |
[required] The account ID of the requester. |
StorageLensConfiguration |
[required] The S3 Storage Lens configuration. |
Tags |
The tag set of the S3 Storage Lens configuration. You can set up to a maximum of 50 tags. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_storage_lens_configuration_tagging/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_put_storage_lens_configuration_tagging(ConfigId, AccountId, Tags)
Arguments
ConfigId |
[required] The ID of the S3 Storage Lens configuration. |
AccountId |
[required] The account ID of the requester. |
Tags |
[required] The tag set of the S3 Storage Lens configuration. You can set up to a maximum of 50 tags. |
This operation is not supported by directory buckets
Description
This operation is not supported by directory buckets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_submit_multi_region_access_point_routes/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_submit_multi_region_access_point_routes(
AccountId,
Mrap,
RouteUpdates
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point. |
Mrap |
[required] The Multi-Region Access Point ARN. |
RouteUpdates |
[required] The different routes that make up the new route configuration. Active
routes return a value of |
Creates a new Amazon Web Services resource tag or updates an existing resource tag
Description
Creates a new Amazon Web Services resource tag or updates an existing resource tag. Each tag is a label consisting of a user-defined key and value. Tags can help you manage, identify, organize, search for, and filter resources. You can add up to 50 Amazon Web Services resource tags for each S3 resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_tag_resource(AccountId, ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that created the S3 resource that you're trying to add tags to or the requester's account ID. |
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the S3 resource that you're trying to add tags to. The tagged resource can be an S3 Storage Lens group or S3 Access Grants instance, registered location, or grant. |
Tags |
[required] The Amazon Web Services resource tags that you want to add to the specified S3 resource. |
This operation removes the specified Amazon Web Services resource tags from an S3 resource
Description
This operation removes the specified Amazon Web Services resource tags from an S3 resource. Each tag is a label consisting of a user-defined key and value. Tags can help you manage, identify, organize, search for, and filter resources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_untag_resource(AccountId, ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that owns the resource that you're trying to remove the tags from. |
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the S3 resource that you're trying to remove the tags from. |
TagKeys |
[required] The array of tag key-value pairs that you're trying to remove from of the S3 resource. |
Updates the IAM role of a registered location in your S3 Access Grants instance
Description
Updates the IAM role of a registered location in your S3 Access Grants instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_update_access_grants_location/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_update_access_grants_location(
AccountId,
AccessGrantsLocationId,
IAMRoleArn
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance. |
AccessGrantsLocationId |
[required] The ID of the registered location that you are updating. S3 Access
Grants assigns this ID when you register the location. S3 Access Grants
assigns the ID The ID of the registered location to which you are granting access. S3
Access Grants assigned this ID when you registered the location. S3
Access Grants assigns the ID If you are passing the |
IAMRoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role for the registered location. S3 Access Grants assumes this role to manage access to the registered location. |
Updates an existing S3 Batch Operations job's priority
Description
Updates an existing S3 Batch Operations job's priority. For more information, see S3 Batch Operations in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_update_job_priority/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_update_job_priority(AccountId, JobId, Priority)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the S3 Batch Operations job. |
JobId |
[required] The ID for the job whose priority you want to update. |
Priority |
[required] The priority you want to assign to this job. |
Updates the status for the specified job
Description
Updates the status for the specified job. Use this operation to confirm that you want to run a job or to cancel an existing job. For more information, see S3 Batch Operations in the Amazon S3 User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_update_job_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_update_job_status(
AccountId,
JobId,
RequestedJobStatus,
StatusUpdateReason = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the S3 Batch Operations job. |
JobId |
[required] The ID of the job whose status you want to update. |
RequestedJobStatus |
[required] The status that you want to move the specified job to. |
StatusUpdateReason |
A description of the reason why you want to change the specified job's status. This field can be any string up to the maximum length. |
Updates the existing Storage Lens group
Description
Updates the existing Storage Lens group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_update_storage_lens_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3control_update_storage_lens_group(Name, AccountId, StorageLensGroup)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the Storage Lens group that you want to update. |
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Storage Lens group owner. |
StorageLensGroup |
[required] The JSON file that contains the Storage Lens group configuration. |
Amazon S3 on Outposts
Description
Amazon S3 on Outposts provides access to S3 on Outposts operations.
Usage
s3outposts(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- s3outposts( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_endpoint | Creates an endpoint and associates it with the specified Outpost |
delete_endpoint | Deletes an endpoint |
list_endpoints | Lists endpoints associated with the specified Outpost |
list_outposts_with_s3 | Lists the Outposts with S3 on Outposts capacity for your Amazon Web Services account |
list_shared_endpoints | Lists all endpoints associated with an Outpost that has been shared by Amazon Web Services Resource Access Manager (RAM) |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- s3outposts()
svc$create_endpoint(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates an endpoint and associates it with the specified Outpost
Description
Creates an endpoint and associates it with the specified Outpost.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3outposts_create_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3outposts_create_endpoint(
OutpostId,
SubnetId,
SecurityGroupId,
AccessType = NULL,
CustomerOwnedIpv4Pool = NULL
)
Arguments
OutpostId |
[required] The ID of the Outposts. |
SubnetId |
[required] The ID of the subnet in the selected VPC. The endpoint subnet must belong to the Outpost that has Amazon S3 on Outposts provisioned. |
SecurityGroupId |
[required] The ID of the security group to use with the endpoint. |
AccessType |
The type of access for the network connectivity for the Amazon S3 on
Outposts endpoint. To use the Amazon Web Services VPC, choose
|
CustomerOwnedIpv4Pool |
The ID of the customer-owned IPv4 address pool (CoIP pool) for the endpoint. IP addresses are allocated from this pool for the endpoint. |
Deletes an endpoint
Description
Deletes an endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3outposts_delete_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3outposts_delete_endpoint(EndpointId, OutpostId)
Arguments
EndpointId |
[required] The ID of the endpoint. |
OutpostId |
[required] The ID of the Outposts. |
Lists endpoints associated with the specified Outpost
Description
Lists endpoints associated with the specified Outpost.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3outposts_list_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3outposts_list_endpoints(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
If a previous response from this operation included a |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of endpoints that will be returned in the response. |
Lists the Outposts with S3 on Outposts capacity for your Amazon Web Services account
Description
Lists the Outposts with S3 on Outposts capacity for your Amazon Web Services account. Includes S3 on Outposts that you have access to as the Outposts owner, or as a shared user from Resource Access Manager (RAM).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3outposts_list_outposts_with_s3/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3outposts_list_outposts_with_s3(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
When you can get additional results from the
|
MaxResults |
The maximum number of Outposts to return. The limit is 100. |
Lists all endpoints associated with an Outpost that has been shared by Amazon Web Services Resource Access Manager (RAM)
Description
Lists all endpoints associated with an Outpost that has been shared by Amazon Web Services Resource Access Manager (RAM).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3outposts_list_shared_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3outposts_list_shared_endpoints(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
OutpostId
)
Arguments
NextToken |
If a previous response from this operation included a |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of endpoints that will be returned in the response. |
OutpostId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services Outpost. |
Amazon S3 Tables
Description
An Amazon S3 table represents a structured dataset consisting of tabular data in Apache Parquet format and related metadata. This data is stored inside an S3 table as a subresource. All tables in a table bucket are stored in the Apache Iceberg table format. Through integration with the AWS Glue Data Catalog you can interact with your tables using AWS analytics services, such as Amazon Athena and Amazon Redshift. Amazon S3 manages maintenance of your tables through automatic file compaction and snapshot management. For more information, see Amazon S3 table buckets.
Usage
s3tables(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- s3tables( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_namespace | Creates a namespace |
create_table | Creates a new table associated with the given namespace in a table bucket |
create_table_bucket | Creates a table bucket |
delete_namespace | Deletes a namespace |
delete_table | Deletes a table |
delete_table_bucket | Deletes a table bucket |
delete_table_bucket_policy | Deletes a table bucket policy |
delete_table_policy | Deletes a table policy |
get_namespace | Gets details about a namespace |
get_table | Gets details about a table |
get_table_bucket | Gets details on a table bucket |
get_table_bucket_maintenance_configuration | Gets details about a maintenance configuration for a given table bucket |
get_table_bucket_policy | Gets details about a table bucket policy |
get_table_maintenance_configuration | Gets details about the maintenance configuration of a table |
get_table_maintenance_job_status | Gets the status of a maintenance job for a table |
get_table_metadata_location | Gets the location of the table metadata |
get_table_policy | Gets details about a table policy |
list_namespaces | Lists the namespaces within a table bucket |
list_table_buckets | Lists table buckets for your account |
list_tables | List tables in the given table bucket |
put_table_bucket_maintenance_configuration | Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing maintenance configuration for a table bucket |
put_table_bucket_policy | Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing table bucket policy for a table bucket |
put_table_maintenance_configuration | Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing maintenance configuration for a table |
put_table_policy | Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing table policy for a table |
rename_table | Renames a table or a namespace |
update_table_metadata_location | Updates the metadata location for a table |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- s3tables()
svc$create_namespace(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates a namespace
Description
Creates a namespace. A namespace is a logical grouping of tables within your table bucket, which you can use to organize tables. For more information, see Create a namespace in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_create_namespace/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_create_namespace(tableBucketARN, namespace)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket to create the namespace in. |
namespace |
[required] A name for the namespace. |
Creates a new table associated with the given namespace in a table bucket
Description
Creates a new table associated with the given namespace in a table bucket. For more information, see Creating an Amazon S3 table in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_create_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_create_table(tableBucketARN, namespace, name, format, metadata = NULL)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket to create the table in. |
namespace |
[required] The namespace to associated with the table. |
name |
[required] The name for the table. |
format |
[required] The format for the table. |
metadata |
The metadata for the table. |
Creates a table bucket
Description
Creates a table bucket. For more information, see Creating a table bucket in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_create_table_bucket/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_create_table_bucket(name)
Arguments
name |
[required] The name for the table bucket. |
Deletes a namespace
Description
Deletes a namespace. For more information, see Delete a namespace in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_delete_namespace/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_delete_namespace(tableBucketARN, namespace)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket associated with the namespace. |
namespace |
[required] The name of the namespace. |
Deletes a table
Description
Deletes a table. For more information, see Deleting an Amazon S3 table in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_delete_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_delete_table(tableBucketARN, namespace, name, versionToken = NULL)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket that contains the table. |
namespace |
[required] The namespace associated with the table. |
name |
[required] The name of the table. |
versionToken |
The version token of the table. |
Deletes a table bucket
Description
Deletes a table bucket. For more information, see Deleting a table bucket in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_delete_table_bucket/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_delete_table_bucket(tableBucketARN)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket. |
Deletes a table bucket policy
Description
Deletes a table bucket policy. For more information, see Deleting a table bucket policy in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_delete_table_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_delete_table_bucket_policy(tableBucketARN)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket. |
Deletes a table policy
Description
Deletes a table policy. For more information, see Deleting a table policy in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_delete_table_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_delete_table_policy(tableBucketARN, namespace, name)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket that contains the table. |
namespace |
[required] The namespace associated with the table. |
name |
[required] The table name. |
Gets details about a namespace
Description
Gets details about a namespace. For more information, see Table namespaces in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_namespace/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_get_namespace(tableBucketARN, namespace)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket. |
namespace |
[required] The name of the namespace. |
Gets details about a table
Description
Gets details about a table. For more information, see S3 Tables in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_get_table(tableBucketARN, namespace, name)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket associated with the table. |
namespace |
[required] The name of the namespace the table is associated with. |
name |
[required] The name of the table. |
Gets details on a table bucket
Description
Gets details on a table bucket. For more information, see Viewing details about an Amazon S3 table bucket in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_table_bucket/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_get_table_bucket(tableBucketARN)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket. |
Gets details about a maintenance configuration for a given table bucket
Description
Gets details about a maintenance configuration for a given table bucket. For more information, see Amazon S3 table bucket maintenance in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_table_bucket_maintenance_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_get_table_bucket_maintenance_configuration(tableBucketARN)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket associated with the maintenance configuration. |
Gets details about a table bucket policy
Description
Gets details about a table bucket policy. For more information, see Viewing a table bucket policy in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_table_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_get_table_bucket_policy(tableBucketARN)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket. |
Gets details about the maintenance configuration of a table
Description
Gets details about the maintenance configuration of a table. For more information, see S3 Tables maintenance in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_table_maintenance_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_get_table_maintenance_configuration(tableBucketARN, namespace, name)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket. |
namespace |
[required] The namespace associated with the table. |
name |
[required] The name of the table. |
Gets the status of a maintenance job for a table
Description
Gets the status of a maintenance job for a table. For more information, see S3 Tables maintenance in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_table_maintenance_job_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_get_table_maintenance_job_status(tableBucketARN, namespace, name)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket. |
namespace |
[required] The name of the namespace the table is associated with. </p> |
name |
[required] The name of the maintenance job. |
Gets the location of the table metadata
Description
Gets the location of the table metadata.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_table_metadata_location/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_get_table_metadata_location(tableBucketARN, namespace, name)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket. |
namespace |
[required] The namespace of the table. |
name |
[required] The name of the table. |
Gets details about a table policy
Description
Gets details about a table policy. For more information, see Viewing a table policy in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_table_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_get_table_policy(tableBucketARN, namespace, name)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket that contains the table. |
namespace |
[required] The namespace associated with the table. |
name |
[required] The name of the table. |
Lists the namespaces within a table bucket
Description
Lists the namespaces within a table bucket. For more information, see Table namespaces in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_list_namespaces/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_list_namespaces(
tableBucketARN,
prefix = NULL,
continuationToken = NULL,
maxNamespaces = NULL
)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket. |
prefix |
The prefix of the namespaces. |
continuationToken |
|
maxNamespaces |
The maximum number of namespaces to return in the list. |
Lists table buckets for your account
Description
Lists table buckets for your account. For more information, see S3 Table buckets in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_list_table_buckets/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_list_table_buckets(
prefix = NULL,
continuationToken = NULL,
maxBuckets = NULL
)
Arguments
prefix |
The prefix of the table buckets. |
continuationToken |
|
maxBuckets |
The maximum number of table buckets to return in the list. |
List tables in the given table bucket
Description
List tables in the given table bucket. For more information, see S3 Tables in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_list_tables/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_list_tables(
tableBucketARN,
namespace = NULL,
prefix = NULL,
continuationToken = NULL,
maxTables = NULL
)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket. |
namespace |
The namespace of the tables. |
prefix |
The prefix of the tables. |
continuationToken |
|
maxTables |
The maximum number of tables to return. |
Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing maintenance configuration for a table bucket
Description
Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing maintenance configuration for a table bucket. For more information, see Amazon S3 table bucket maintenance in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_put_table_bucket_maintenance_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_put_table_bucket_maintenance_configuration(
tableBucketARN,
type,
value
)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket associated with the maintenance configuration. |
type |
[required] The type of the maintenance configuration. |
value |
[required] Defines the values of the maintenance configuration for the table bucket. |
Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing table bucket policy for a table bucket
Description
Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing table bucket policy for a table bucket. For more information, see Adding a table bucket policy in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_put_table_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_put_table_bucket_policy(tableBucketARN, resourcePolicy)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket. |
resourcePolicy |
[required] The |
Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing maintenance configuration for a table
Description
Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing maintenance configuration for a table. For more information, see S3 Tables maintenance in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_put_table_maintenance_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_put_table_maintenance_configuration(
tableBucketARN,
namespace,
name,
type,
value
)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table associated with the maintenance configuration. |
namespace |
[required] The namespace of the table. |
name |
[required] The name of the maintenance configuration. |
type |
[required] The type of the maintenance configuration. |
value |
[required] Defines the values of the maintenance configuration for the table. |
Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing table policy for a table
Description
Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing table policy for a table. For more information, see Adding a table policy in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_put_table_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_put_table_policy(tableBucketARN, namespace, name, resourcePolicy)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket that contains the table. |
namespace |
[required] The namespace associated with the table. |
name |
[required] The name of the table. |
resourcePolicy |
[required] The |
Renames a table or a namespace
Description
Renames a table or a namespace. For more information, see S3 Tables in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_rename_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_rename_table(
tableBucketARN,
namespace,
name,
newNamespaceName = NULL,
newName = NULL,
versionToken = NULL
)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket. |
namespace |
[required] The namespace associated with the table. |
name |
[required] The current name of the table. |
newNamespaceName |
The new name for the namespace. |
newName |
The new name for the table. |
versionToken |
The version token of the table. |
Updates the metadata location for a table
Description
Updates the metadata location for a table. The metadata location of a table must be an S3 URI that begins with the table's warehouse location. The metadata location for an Apache Iceberg table must end with .metadata.json
, or if the metadata file is Gzip-compressed, .metadata.json.gz
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_update_table_metadata_location/ for full documentation.
Usage
s3tables_update_table_metadata_location(
tableBucketARN,
namespace,
name,
versionToken,
metadataLocation
)
Arguments
tableBucketARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket. |
namespace |
[required] The namespace of the table. |
name |
[required] The name of the table. |
versionToken |
[required] The version token of the table. |
metadataLocation |
[required] The new metadata location for the table. |
AWS Storage Gateway
Description
Storage Gateway Service
Amazon FSx File Gateway is no longer available to new customers. Existing customers of FSx File Gateway can continue to use the service normally. For capabilities similar to FSx File Gateway, visit this blog post.
Storage Gateway is the service that connects an on-premises software appliance with cloud-based storage to provide seamless and secure integration between an organization's on-premises IT environment and the Amazon Web Services storage infrastructure. The service enables you to securely upload data to the Amazon Web Services Cloud for cost effective backup and rapid disaster recovery.
Use the following links to get started using the Storage Gateway Service API Reference:
-
Storage Gateway required request headers: Describes the required headers that you must send with every POST request to Storage Gateway.
-
Signing requests: Storage Gateway requires that you authenticate every request you send; this topic describes how sign such a request.
-
Error responses: Provides reference information about Storage Gateway errors.
-
Operations in Storage Gateway: Contains detailed descriptions of all Storage Gateway operations, their request parameters, response elements, possible errors, and examples of requests and responses.
-
Storage Gateway endpoints and quotas: Provides a list of each Amazon Web Services Region and the endpoints available for use with Storage Gateway.
Storage Gateway resource IDs are in uppercase. When you use these
resource IDs with the Amazon EC2 API, EC2 expects resource IDs in
lowercase. You must change your resource ID to lowercase to use it with
the EC2 API. For example, in Storage Gateway the ID for a volume might
be vol-AA22BB012345DAF670
. When you use this ID with the EC2 API, you
must change it to vol-aa22bb012345daf670
. Otherwise, the EC2 API might
not behave as expected.
IDs for Storage Gateway volumes and Amazon EBS snapshots created from gateway volumes are changing to a longer format. Starting in December 2016, all new volumes and snapshots will be created with a 17-character string. Starting in April 2016, you will be able to use these longer IDs so you can test your systems with the new format. For more information, see Longer EC2 and EBS resource IDs.
For example, a volume Amazon Resource Name (ARN) with the longer volume ID format looks like the following:
arn:aws:storagegateway:us-west-2:111122223333:gateway/sgw-12A3456B/volume/vol-1122AABBCCDDEEFFG
.
A snapshot ID with the longer ID format looks like the following:
snap-78e226633445566ee
.
For more information, see Announcement: Heads-up – Longer Storage Gateway volume and snapshot IDs coming in 2016.
Usage
storagegateway(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- storagegateway( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
activate_gateway | Activates the gateway you previously deployed on your host |
add_cache | Configures one or more gateway local disks as cache for a gateway |
add_tags_to_resource | Adds one or more tags to the specified resource |
add_upload_buffer | Configures one or more gateway local disks as upload buffer for a specified gateway |
add_working_storage | Configures one or more gateway local disks as working storage for a gateway |
assign_tape_pool | Assigns a tape to a tape pool for archiving |
associate_file_system | Associate an Amazon FSx file system with the FSx File Gateway |
attach_volume | Connects a volume to an iSCSI connection and then attaches the volume to the specified gateway |
cancel_archival | Cancels archiving of a virtual tape to the virtual tape shelf (VTS) after the archiving process is initiated |
cancel_cache_report | Cancels generation of a specified cache report |
cancel_retrieval | Cancels retrieval of a virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS) to a gateway after the retrieval process is initiated |
create_cachedi_scsi_volume | Creates a cached volume on a specified cached volume gateway |
create_nfs_file_share | Creates a Network File System (NFS) file share on an existing S3 File Gateway |
create_smb_file_share | Creates a Server Message Block (SMB) file share on an existing S3 File Gateway |
create_snapshot | Initiates a snapshot of a volume |
create_snapshot_from_volume_recovery_point | Initiates a snapshot of a gateway from a volume recovery point |
create_storedi_scsi_volume | Creates a volume on a specified gateway |
create_tape_pool | Creates a new custom tape pool |
create_tapes | Creates one or more virtual tapes |
create_tape_with_barcode | Creates a virtual tape by using your own barcode |
delete_automatic_tape_creation_policy | Deletes the automatic tape creation policy of a gateway |
delete_bandwidth_rate_limit | Deletes the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway |
delete_cache_report | Deletes the specified cache report and any associated tags from the Storage Gateway database |
delete_chap_credentials | Deletes Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials for a specified iSCSI target and initiator pair |
delete_file_share | Deletes a file share from an S3 File Gateway |
delete_gateway | Deletes a gateway |
delete_snapshot_schedule | Deletes a snapshot of a volume |
delete_tape | Deletes the specified virtual tape |
delete_tape_archive | Deletes the specified virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS) |
delete_tape_pool | Delete a custom tape pool |
delete_volume | Deletes the specified storage volume that you previously created using the CreateCachediSCSIVolume or CreateStorediSCSIVolume API |
describe_availability_monitor_test | Returns information about the most recent high availability monitoring test that was performed on the host in a cluster |
describe_bandwidth_rate_limit | Returns the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway |
describe_bandwidth_rate_limit_schedule | Returns information about the bandwidth rate limit schedule of a gateway |
describe_cache | Returns information about the cache of a gateway |
describe_cachedi_scsi_volumes | Returns a description of the gateway volumes specified in the request |
describe_cache_report | Returns information about the specified cache report, including completion status and generation progress |
describe_chap_credentials | Returns an array of Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials information for a specified iSCSI target, one for each target-initiator pair |
describe_file_system_associations | Gets the file system association information |
describe_gateway_information | Returns metadata about a gateway such as its name, network interfaces, time zone, status, and software version |
describe_maintenance_start_time | Returns your gateway's maintenance window schedule information, with values for monthly or weekly cadence, specific day and time to begin maintenance, and which types of updates to apply |
describe_nfs_file_shares | Gets a description for one or more Network File System (NFS) file shares from an S3 File Gateway |
describe_smb_file_shares | Gets a description for one or more Server Message Block (SMB) file shares from a S3 File Gateway |
describe_smb_settings | Gets a description of a Server Message Block (SMB) file share settings from a file gateway |
describe_snapshot_schedule | Describes the snapshot schedule for the specified gateway volume |
describe_storedi_scsi_volumes | Returns the description of the gateway volumes specified in the request |
describe_tape_archives | Returns a description of specified virtual tapes in the virtual tape shelf (VTS) |
describe_tape_recovery_points | Returns a list of virtual tape recovery points that are available for the specified tape gateway |
describe_tapes | Returns a description of virtual tapes that correspond to the specified Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) |
describe_upload_buffer | Returns information about the upload buffer of a gateway |
describe_vtl_devices | Returns a description of virtual tape library (VTL) devices for the specified tape gateway |
describe_working_storage | Returns information about the working storage of a gateway |
detach_volume | Disconnects a volume from an iSCSI connection and then detaches the volume from the specified gateway |
disable_gateway | Disables a tape gateway when the gateway is no longer functioning |
disassociate_file_system | Disassociates an Amazon FSx file system from the specified gateway |
join_domain | Adds a file gateway to an Active Directory domain |
list_automatic_tape_creation_policies | Lists the automatic tape creation policies for a gateway |
list_cache_reports | Returns a list of existing cache reports for all file shares associated with your Amazon Web Services account |
list_file_shares | Gets a list of the file shares for a specific S3 File Gateway, or the list of file shares that belong to the calling Amazon Web Services account |
list_file_system_associations | Gets a list of FileSystemAssociationSummary objects |
list_gateways | Lists gateways owned by an Amazon Web Services account in an Amazon Web Services Region specified in the request |
list_local_disks | Returns a list of the gateway's local disks |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists the tags that have been added to the specified resource |
list_tape_pools | Lists custom tape pools |
list_tapes | Lists virtual tapes in your virtual tape library (VTL) and your virtual tape shelf (VTS) |
list_volume_initiators | Lists iSCSI initiators that are connected to a volume |
list_volume_recovery_points | Lists the recovery points for a specified gateway |
list_volumes | Lists the iSCSI stored volumes of a gateway |
notify_when_uploaded | Sends you notification through Amazon EventBridge when all files written to your file share have been uploaded to Amazon S3 |
refresh_cache | Refreshes the cached inventory of objects for the specified file share |
remove_tags_from_resource | Removes one or more tags from the specified resource |
reset_cache | Resets all cache disks that have encountered an error and makes the disks available for reconfiguration as cache storage |
retrieve_tape_archive | Retrieves an archived virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS) to a tape gateway |
retrieve_tape_recovery_point | Retrieves the recovery point for the specified virtual tape |
set_local_console_password | Sets the password for your VM local console |
set_smb_guest_password | Sets the password for the guest user smbguest |
shutdown_gateway | Shuts down a Tape Gateway or Volume Gateway |
start_availability_monitor_test | Start a test that verifies that the specified gateway is configured for High Availability monitoring in your host environment |
start_cache_report | Starts generating a report of the file metadata currently cached by an S3 File Gateway for a specific file share |
start_gateway | Starts a gateway that you previously shut down (see ShutdownGateway) |
update_automatic_tape_creation_policy | Updates the automatic tape creation policy of a gateway |
update_bandwidth_rate_limit | Updates the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway |
update_bandwidth_rate_limit_schedule | Updates the bandwidth rate limit schedule for a specified gateway |
update_chap_credentials | Updates the Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials for a specified iSCSI target |
update_file_system_association | Updates a file system association |
update_gateway_information | Updates a gateway's metadata, which includes the gateway's name, time zone, and metadata cache size |
update_gateway_software_now | Updates the gateway virtual machine (VM) software |
update_maintenance_start_time | Updates a gateway's maintenance window schedule, with settings for monthly or weekly cadence, specific day and time to begin maintenance, and which types of updates to apply |
update_nfs_file_share | Updates a Network File System (NFS) file share |
update_smb_file_share | Updates a Server Message Block (SMB) file share |
update_smb_file_share_visibility | Controls whether the shares on an S3 File Gateway are visible in a net view or browse list |
update_smb_local_groups | Updates the list of Active Directory users and groups that have special permissions for SMB file shares on the gateway |
update_smb_security_strategy | Updates the SMB security strategy level for an Amazon S3 file gateway |
update_snapshot_schedule | Updates a snapshot schedule configured for a gateway volume |
update_vtl_device_type | Updates the type of medium changer in a tape gateway |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- storagegateway()
# Activates the gateway you previously deployed on your host.
svc$activate_gateway(
ActivationKey = "29AV1-3OFV9-VVIUB-NKT0I-LRO6V",
GatewayName = "My_Gateway",
GatewayRegion = "us-east-1",
GatewayTimezone = "GMT-12:00",
GatewayType = "STORED",
MediumChangerType = "AWS-Gateway-VTL",
TapeDriveType = "IBM-ULT3580-TD5"
)
## End(Not run)
Activates the gateway you previously deployed on your host
Description
Activates the gateway you previously deployed on your host. In the activation process, you specify information such as the Amazon Web Services Region that you want to use for storing snapshots or tapes, the time zone for scheduled snapshots the gateway snapshot schedule window, an activation key, and a name for your gateway. The activation process also associates your gateway with your account. For more information, see update_gateway_information
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_activate_gateway/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_activate_gateway(
ActivationKey,
GatewayName,
GatewayTimezone,
GatewayRegion,
GatewayType = NULL,
TapeDriveType = NULL,
MediumChangerType = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ActivationKey |
[required] Your gateway activation key. You can obtain the activation key by
sending an HTTP GET request with redirects enabled to the gateway IP
address (port 80). The redirect URL returned in the response provides
you the activation key for your gateway in the query string parameter
For more information, see Getting activation key in the Storage Gateway User Guide. |
GatewayName |
[required] The name you configured for your gateway. |
GatewayTimezone |
[required] A value that indicates the time zone you want to set for the gateway. The time zone is of the format "GMT", "GMT-hr:mm", or "GMT+hr:mm". For example, GMT indicates Greenwich Mean Time without any offset. GMT-4:00 indicates the time is 4 hours behind GMT. GMT+2:00 indicates the time is 2 hours ahead of GMT. The time zone is used, for example, for scheduling snapshots and your gateway's maintenance schedule. |
GatewayRegion |
[required] A value that indicates the Amazon Web Services Region where you want to
store your data. The gateway Amazon Web Services Region specified must
be the same Amazon Web Services Region as the Amazon Web Services Region
in your Valid Values: See Storage Gateway endpoints and quotas in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
GatewayType |
A value that defines the type of gateway to activate. The type specified
is critical to all later functions of the gateway and cannot be changed
after activation. The default value is Amazon FSx File Gateway is no longer available to new customers. Existing customers of FSx File Gateway can continue to use the service normally. For capabilities similar to FSx File Gateway, visit this blog post. Valid Values: |
TapeDriveType |
The value that indicates the type of tape drive to use for tape gateway. This field is optional. Valid Values: |
MediumChangerType |
The value that indicates the type of medium changer to use for tape gateway. This field is optional. Valid Values: |
Tags |
A list of up to 50 tags that you can assign to the gateway. Each tag is a key-value pair. Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers that can be represented in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256 characters. |
Configures one or more gateway local disks as cache for a gateway
Description
Configures one or more gateway local disks as cache for a gateway. This operation is only supported in the cached volume, tape, and file gateway type (see How Storage Gateway works (architecture).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_add_cache/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_add_cache(GatewayARN, DiskIds)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
DiskIds |
[required] An array of strings that identify disks that are to be configured as
working storage. Each string has a minimum length of 1 and maximum
length of 300. You can get the disk IDs from the
|
Adds one or more tags to the specified resource
Description
Adds one or more tags to the specified resource. You use tags to add metadata to resources, which you can use to categorize these resources. For example, you can categorize resources by purpose, owner, environment, or team. Each tag consists of a key and a value, which you define. You can add tags to the following Storage Gateway resources:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_add_tags_to_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_add_tags_to_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource you want to add tags to. |
Tags |
[required] The key-value pair that represents the tag you want to add to the resource. The value can be an empty string. Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256. |
Configures one or more gateway local disks as upload buffer for a specified gateway
Description
Configures one or more gateway local disks as upload buffer for a specified gateway. This operation is supported for the stored volume, cached volume, and tape gateway types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_add_upload_buffer/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_add_upload_buffer(GatewayARN, DiskIds)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
DiskIds |
[required] An array of strings that identify disks that are to be configured as
working storage. Each string has a minimum length of 1 and maximum
length of 300. You can get the disk IDs from the
|
Configures one or more gateway local disks as working storage for a gateway
Description
Configures one or more gateway local disks as working storage for a gateway. This operation is only supported in the stored volume gateway type. This operation is deprecated in cached volume API version 20120630. Use add_upload_buffer
instead.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_add_working_storage/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_add_working_storage(GatewayARN, DiskIds)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
DiskIds |
[required] An array of strings that identify disks that are to be configured as
working storage. Each string has a minimum length of 1 and maximum
length of 300. You can get the disk IDs from the
|
Assigns a tape to a tape pool for archiving
Description
Assigns a tape to a tape pool for archiving. The tape assigned to a pool is archived in the S3 storage class that is associated with the pool. When you use your backup application to eject the tape, the tape is archived directly into the S3 storage class (S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive) that corresponds to the pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_assign_tape_pool/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_assign_tape_pool(
TapeARN,
PoolId,
BypassGovernanceRetention = NULL
)
Arguments
TapeARN |
[required] The unique Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the virtual tape that you want to add to the tape pool. |
PoolId |
[required] The ID of the pool that you want to add your tape to for archiving. The tape in this pool is archived in the S3 storage class that is associated with the pool. When you use your backup application to eject the tape, the tape is archived directly into the storage class (S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive) that corresponds to the pool. |
BypassGovernanceRetention |
Set permissions to bypass governance retention. If the lock type of the
archived tape is Valid values: |
Associate an Amazon FSx file system with the FSx File Gateway
Description
Associate an Amazon FSx file system with the FSx File Gateway. After the association process is complete, the file shares on the Amazon FSx file system are available for access through the gateway. This operation only supports the FSx File Gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_associate_file_system/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_associate_file_system(
UserName,
Password,
ClientToken,
GatewayARN,
LocationARN,
Tags = NULL,
AuditDestinationARN = NULL,
CacheAttributes = NULL,
EndpointNetworkConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The user name of the user credential that has permission to access the root share D$ of the Amazon FSx file system. The user account must belong to the Amazon FSx delegated admin user group. |
Password |
[required] The password of the user credential. |
ClientToken |
[required] A unique string value that you supply that is used by the FSx File Gateway to ensure idempotent file system association creation. |
GatewayARN |
[required] |
LocationARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon FSx file system to associate with the FSx File Gateway. |
Tags |
A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to the file system association. Each tag is a key-value pair. |
AuditDestinationARN |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the storage used for the audit logs. |
CacheAttributes |
|
EndpointNetworkConfiguration |
Specifies the network configuration information for the gateway associated with the Amazon FSx file system. If multiple file systems are associated with this gateway, this
parameter's |
Connects a volume to an iSCSI connection and then attaches the volume to the specified gateway
Description
Connects a volume to an iSCSI connection and then attaches the volume to the specified gateway. Detaching and attaching a volume enables you to recover your data from one gateway to a different gateway without creating a snapshot. It also makes it easier to move your volumes from an on-premises gateway to a gateway hosted on an Amazon EC2 instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_attach_volume/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_attach_volume(
GatewayARN,
TargetName = NULL,
VolumeARN,
NetworkInterfaceId,
DiskId = NULL
)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway that you want to attach the volume to. |
TargetName |
The name of the iSCSI target used by an initiator to connect to a volume
and used as a suffix for the target ARN. For example, specifying
If you don't specify a value, Storage Gateway uses the value that was previously used for this volume as the new target name. |
VolumeARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the volume to attach to the specified gateway. |
NetworkInterfaceId |
[required] The network interface of the gateway on which to expose the iSCSI
target. Only IPv4 addresses are accepted. Use
Valid Values: A valid IP address. |
DiskId |
The unique device ID or other distinguishing data that identifies the local disk used to create the volume. This value is only required when you are attaching a stored volume. |
Cancels archiving of a virtual tape to the virtual tape shelf (VTS) after the archiving process is initiated
Description
Cancels archiving of a virtual tape to the virtual tape shelf (VTS) after the archiving process is initiated. This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_cancel_archival/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_cancel_archival(GatewayARN, TapeARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
TapeARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the virtual tape you want to cancel archiving for. |
Cancels generation of a specified cache report
Description
Cancels generation of a specified cache report. You can use this operation to manually cancel an IN-PROGRESS report for any reason. This action changes the report status from IN-PROGRESS to CANCELLED. You can only cancel in-progress reports. If the the report you attempt to cancel is in FAILED, ERROR, or COMPLETED state, the cancel operation returns an error.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_cancel_cache_report/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_cancel_cache_report(CacheReportARN)
Arguments
CacheReportARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cache report you want to cancel. |
Cancels retrieval of a virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS) to a gateway after the retrieval process is initiated
Description
Cancels retrieval of a virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS) to a gateway after the retrieval process is initiated. The virtual tape is returned to the VTS. This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_cancel_retrieval/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_cancel_retrieval(GatewayARN, TapeARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
TapeARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the virtual tape you want to cancel retrieval for. |
Creates a cached volume on a specified cached volume gateway
Description
Creates a cached volume on a specified cached volume gateway. This operation is only supported in the cached volume gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_cachedi_scsi_volume/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_create_cachedi_scsi_volume(
GatewayARN,
VolumeSizeInBytes,
SnapshotId = NULL,
TargetName,
SourceVolumeARN = NULL,
NetworkInterfaceId,
ClientToken,
KMSEncrypted = NULL,
KMSKey = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
VolumeSizeInBytes |
[required] The size of the volume in bytes. |
SnapshotId |
The snapshot ID (e.g. "snap-1122aabb") of the snapshot to restore as the new cached volume. Specify this field if you want to create the iSCSI storage volume from a snapshot; otherwise, do not include this field. To list snapshots for your account use DescribeSnapshots in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud API Reference. |
TargetName |
[required] The name of the iSCSI target used by an initiator to connect to a volume
and used as a suffix for the target ARN. For example, specifying
If you don't specify a value, Storage Gateway uses the value that was previously used for this volume as the new target name. |
SourceVolumeARN |
The ARN for an existing volume. Specifying this ARN makes the new volume
into an exact copy of the specified existing volume's latest recovery
point. The |
NetworkInterfaceId |
[required] The network interface of the gateway on which to expose the iSCSI
target. Only IPv4 addresses are accepted. Use
Valid Values: A valid IP address. |
ClientToken |
[required] A unique identifier that you use to retry a request. If you retry a
request, use the same |
KMSEncrypted |
Set to Valid Values: |
KMSKey |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a symmetric customer master key (CMK)
used for Amazon S3 server-side encryption. Storage Gateway does not
support asymmetric CMKs. This value can only be set when |
Tags |
A list of up to 50 tags that you can assign to a cached volume. Each tag is a key-value pair. Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers that you can represent in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256 characters. |
Creates a Network File System (NFS) file share on an existing S3 File Gateway
Description
Creates a Network File System (NFS) file share on an existing S3 File Gateway. In Storage Gateway, a file share is a file system mount point backed by Amazon S3 cloud storage. Storage Gateway exposes file shares using an NFS interface. This operation is only supported for S3 File Gateways.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_nfs_file_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_create_nfs_file_share(
ClientToken,
NFSFileShareDefaults = NULL,
GatewayARN,
EncryptionType = NULL,
KMSEncrypted = NULL,
KMSKey = NULL,
Role,
LocationARN,
DefaultStorageClass = NULL,
ObjectACL = NULL,
ClientList = NULL,
Squash = NULL,
ReadOnly = NULL,
GuessMIMETypeEnabled = NULL,
RequesterPays = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
FileShareName = NULL,
CacheAttributes = NULL,
NotificationPolicy = NULL,
VPCEndpointDNSName = NULL,
BucketRegion = NULL,
AuditDestinationARN = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientToken |
[required] A unique string value that you supply that is used by S3 File Gateway to ensure idempotent file share creation. |
NFSFileShareDefaults |
File share default values. Optional. |
GatewayARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the S3 File Gateway on which you want to create a file share. |
EncryptionType |
A value that specifies the type of server-side encryption that the file share will use for the data that it stores in Amazon S3. We recommend using If values for both parameters exist in the same request, then the
specified encryption methods must not conflict. For example, if
|
KMSEncrypted |
Optional. Set to We recommend using If values for both parameters exist in the same request, then the
specified encryption methods must not conflict. For example, if
Valid Values: |
KMSKey |
Optional. The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a symmetric customer master
key (CMK) used for Amazon S3 server-side encryption. Storage Gateway
does not support asymmetric CMKs. This value must be set if
|
Role |
[required] The ARN of the Identity and Access Management (IAM) role that an S3 File Gateway assumes when it accesses the underlying storage. |
LocationARN |
[required] A custom ARN for the backend storage used for storing data for file shares. It includes a resource ARN with an optional prefix concatenation. The prefix must end with a forward slash (/). You can specify LocationARN as a bucket ARN, access point ARN or access point alias, as shown in the following examples. Bucket ARN:
Access point ARN:
If you specify an access point, the bucket policy must be configured to delegate access control to the access point. For information, see Delegating access control to access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access point alias:
|
DefaultStorageClass |
The default storage class for objects put into an Amazon S3 bucket by
the S3 File Gateway. The default value is Valid Values: |
ObjectACL |
A value that sets the access control list (ACL) permission for objects
in the S3 bucket that a S3 File Gateway puts objects into. The default
value is |
ClientList |
The list of clients that are allowed to access the S3 File Gateway. The list must contain either valid IP addresses or valid CIDR blocks. |
Squash |
A value that maps a user to anonymous user. Valid values are the following:
|
ReadOnly |
A value that sets the write status of a file share. Set this value to
Valid Values: |
GuessMIMETypeEnabled |
A value that enables guessing of the MIME type for uploaded objects
based on file extensions. Set this value to Valid Values: |
RequesterPays |
A value that sets who pays the cost of the request and the cost
associated with data download from the S3 bucket. If this value is set
to
Valid Values: |
Tags |
A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to the NFS file share. Each tag is a key-value pair. Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256. |
FileShareName |
The name of the file share. Optional.
A valid NFS file share name can only contain the following characters:
|
CacheAttributes |
Specifies refresh cache information for the file share. |
NotificationPolicy |
The notification policy of the file share.
This setting is not meant to specify an exact time at which the notification will be sent. In some cases, the gateway might require more than the specified delay time to generate and send notifications. The following example sets
The following example sets
|
VPCEndpointDNSName |
Specifies the DNS name for the VPC endpoint that the NFS file share uses to connect to Amazon S3. This parameter is required for NFS file shares that connect to Amazon S3 through a VPC endpoint, a VPC access point, or an access point alias that points to a VPC access point. |
BucketRegion |
Specifies the Region of the S3 bucket where the NFS file share stores files. This parameter is required for NFS file shares that connect to Amazon S3 through a VPC endpoint, a VPC access point, or an access point alias that points to a VPC access point. |
AuditDestinationARN |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the storage used for audit logs. |
Creates a Server Message Block (SMB) file share on an existing S3 File Gateway
Description
Creates a Server Message Block (SMB) file share on an existing S3 File Gateway. In Storage Gateway, a file share is a file system mount point backed by Amazon S3 cloud storage. Storage Gateway exposes file shares using an SMB interface. This operation is only supported for S3 File Gateways.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_smb_file_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_create_smb_file_share(
ClientToken,
GatewayARN,
EncryptionType = NULL,
KMSEncrypted = NULL,
KMSKey = NULL,
Role,
LocationARN,
DefaultStorageClass = NULL,
ObjectACL = NULL,
ReadOnly = NULL,
GuessMIMETypeEnabled = NULL,
RequesterPays = NULL,
SMBACLEnabled = NULL,
AccessBasedEnumeration = NULL,
AdminUserList = NULL,
ValidUserList = NULL,
InvalidUserList = NULL,
AuditDestinationARN = NULL,
Authentication = NULL,
CaseSensitivity = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
FileShareName = NULL,
CacheAttributes = NULL,
NotificationPolicy = NULL,
VPCEndpointDNSName = NULL,
BucketRegion = NULL,
OplocksEnabled = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientToken |
[required] A unique string value that you supply that is used by S3 File Gateway to ensure idempotent file share creation. |
GatewayARN |
[required] The ARN of the S3 File Gateway on which you want to create a file share. |
EncryptionType |
A value that specifies the type of server-side encryption that the file share will use for the data that it stores in Amazon S3. We recommend using If values for both parameters exist in the same request, then the
specified encryption methods must not conflict. For example, if
|
KMSEncrypted |
Optional. Set to We recommend using If values for both parameters exist in the same request, then the
specified encryption methods must not conflict. For example, if
Valid Values: |
KMSKey |
Optional. The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a symmetric customer master
key (CMK) used for Amazon S3 server-side encryption. Storage Gateway
does not support asymmetric CMKs. This value must be set if
|
Role |
[required] The ARN of the Identity and Access Management (IAM) role that an S3 File Gateway assumes when it accesses the underlying storage. |
LocationARN |
[required] A custom ARN for the backend storage used for storing data for file shares. It includes a resource ARN with an optional prefix concatenation. The prefix must end with a forward slash (/). You can specify LocationARN as a bucket ARN, access point ARN or access point alias, as shown in the following examples. Bucket ARN:
Access point ARN:
If you specify an access point, the bucket policy must be configured to delegate access control to the access point. For information, see Delegating access control to access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide. Access point alias:
|
DefaultStorageClass |
The default storage class for objects put into an Amazon S3 bucket by
the S3 File Gateway. The default value is Valid Values: |
ObjectACL |
A value that sets the access control list (ACL) permission for objects
in the S3 bucket that a S3 File Gateway puts objects into. The default
value is |
ReadOnly |
A value that sets the write status of a file share. Set this value to
Valid Values: |
GuessMIMETypeEnabled |
A value that enables guessing of the MIME type for uploaded objects
based on file extensions. Set this value to Valid Values: |
RequesterPays |
A value that sets who pays the cost of the request and the cost
associated with data download from the S3 bucket. If this value is set
to
Valid Values: |
SMBACLEnabled |
Set this value to For more information, see Using Windows ACLs to limit SMB file share access in the Amazon S3 File Gateway User Guide. Valid Values: |
AccessBasedEnumeration |
The files and folders on this share will only be visible to users with read access. |
AdminUserList |
A list of users or groups in the Active Directory that will be granted
administrator privileges on the file share. These users can do all file
operations as the super-user. Acceptable formats include:
Use this option very carefully, because any user in this list can do anything they like on the file share, regardless of file permissions. |
ValidUserList |
A list of users or groups in the Active Directory that are allowed to
access the file share. A group must be prefixed with the @ character.
Acceptable formats include: |
InvalidUserList |
A list of users or groups in the Active Directory that are not allowed
to access the file share. A group must be prefixed with the @ character.
Acceptable formats include: |
AuditDestinationARN |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the storage used for audit logs. |
Authentication |
The authentication method that users use to access the file share. The
default is Valid Values: |
CaseSensitivity |
The case of an object name in an Amazon S3 bucket. For
|
Tags |
A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to the NFS file share. Each tag is a key-value pair. Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256. |
FileShareName |
The name of the file share. Optional.
A valid SMB file share name cannot contain the following characters:
|
CacheAttributes |
Specifies refresh cache information for the file share. |
NotificationPolicy |
The notification policy of the file share.
This setting is not meant to specify an exact time at which the notification will be sent. In some cases, the gateway might require more than the specified delay time to generate and send notifications. The following example sets
The following example sets
|
VPCEndpointDNSName |
Specifies the DNS name for the VPC endpoint that the SMB file share uses to connect to Amazon S3. This parameter is required for SMB file shares that connect to Amazon S3 through a VPC endpoint, a VPC access point, or an access point alias that points to a VPC access point. |
BucketRegion |
Specifies the Region of the S3 bucket where the SMB file share stores files. This parameter is required for SMB file shares that connect to Amazon S3 through a VPC endpoint, a VPC access point, or an access point alias that points to a VPC access point. |
OplocksEnabled |
Specifies whether opportunistic locking is enabled for the SMB file share. Enabling opportunistic locking on case-sensitive shares is not recommended for workloads that involve access to files with the same name in different case. Valid Values: |
Initiates a snapshot of a volume
Description
Initiates a snapshot of a volume.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_create_snapshot(VolumeARN, SnapshotDescription, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
VolumeARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the volume. Use the
|
SnapshotDescription |
[required] Textual description of the snapshot that appears in the Amazon EC2 console, Elastic Block Store snapshots panel in the Description field, and in the Storage Gateway snapshot Details pane, Description field. |
Tags |
A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to a snapshot. Each tag is a key-value pair. Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256. |
Initiates a snapshot of a gateway from a volume recovery point
Description
Initiates a snapshot of a gateway from a volume recovery point. This operation is only supported in the cached volume gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_snapshot_from_volume_recovery_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_create_snapshot_from_volume_recovery_point(
VolumeARN,
SnapshotDescription,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
VolumeARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the iSCSI volume target. Use the
|
SnapshotDescription |
[required] Textual description of the snapshot that appears in the Amazon EC2 console, Elastic Block Store snapshots panel in the Description field, and in the Storage Gateway snapshot Details pane, Description field. |
Tags |
A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to a snapshot. Each tag is a key-value pair. Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256. |
Creates a volume on a specified gateway
Description
Creates a volume on a specified gateway. This operation is only supported in the stored volume gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_storedi_scsi_volume/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_create_storedi_scsi_volume(
GatewayARN,
DiskId,
SnapshotId = NULL,
PreserveExistingData,
TargetName,
NetworkInterfaceId,
KMSEncrypted = NULL,
KMSKey = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
DiskId |
[required] The unique identifier for the gateway local disk that is configured as a
stored volume. Use |
SnapshotId |
The snapshot ID (e.g., "snap-1122aabb") of the snapshot to restore as the new stored volume. Specify this field if you want to create the iSCSI storage volume from a snapshot; otherwise, do not include this field. To list snapshots for your account use DescribeSnapshots in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud API Reference. |
PreserveExistingData |
[required] Set to Valid Values: |
TargetName |
[required] The name of the iSCSI target used by an initiator to connect to a volume
and used as a suffix for the target ARN. For example, specifying
If you don't specify a value, Storage Gateway uses the value that was previously used for this volume as the new target name. |
NetworkInterfaceId |
[required] The network interface of the gateway on which to expose the iSCSI
target. Only IPv4 addresses are accepted. Use
Valid Values: A valid IP address. |
KMSEncrypted |
Set to Valid Values: |
KMSKey |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a symmetric customer master key (CMK)
used for Amazon S3 server-side encryption. Storage Gateway does not
support asymmetric CMKs. This value can only be set when |
Tags |
A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to a stored volume. Each tag is a key-value pair. Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256. |
Creates a new custom tape pool
Description
Creates a new custom tape pool. You can use custom tape pool to enable tape retention lock on tapes that are archived in the custom pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_tape_pool/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_create_tape_pool(
PoolName,
StorageClass,
RetentionLockType = NULL,
RetentionLockTimeInDays = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
PoolName |
[required] The name of the new custom tape pool. |
StorageClass |
[required] The storage class that is associated with the new custom pool. When you use your backup application to eject the tape, the tape is archived directly into the storage class (S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive) that corresponds to the pool. |
RetentionLockType |
Tape retention lock can be configured in two modes. When configured in governance mode, Amazon Web Services accounts with specific IAM permissions are authorized to remove the tape retention lock from archived virtual tapes. When configured in compliance mode, the tape retention lock cannot be removed by any user, including the root Amazon Web Services account. |
RetentionLockTimeInDays |
Tape retention lock time is set in days. Tape retention lock can be enabled for up to 100 years (36,500 days). |
Tags |
A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to tape pool. Each tag is a key-value pair. Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256. |
Creates a virtual tape by using your own barcode
Description
Creates a virtual tape by using your own barcode. You write data to the virtual tape and then archive the tape. A barcode is unique and cannot be reused if it has already been used on a tape. This applies to barcodes used on deleted tapes. This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_tape_with_barcode/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_create_tape_with_barcode(
GatewayARN,
TapeSizeInBytes,
TapeBarcode,
KMSEncrypted = NULL,
KMSKey = NULL,
PoolId = NULL,
Worm = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] The unique Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that represents the gateway to
associate the virtual tape with. Use the
|
TapeSizeInBytes |
[required] The size, in bytes, of the virtual tape that you want to create. The size must be aligned by gigabyte (102410241024 bytes). |
TapeBarcode |
[required] The barcode that you want to assign to the tape. Barcodes cannot be reused. This includes barcodes used for tapes that have been deleted. |
KMSEncrypted |
Set to Valid Values: |
KMSKey |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a symmetric customer master key (CMK)
used for Amazon S3 server-side encryption. Storage Gateway does not
support asymmetric CMKs. This value can only be set when |
PoolId |
The ID of the pool that you want to add your tape to for archiving. The tape in this pool is archived in the S3 storage class that is associated with the pool. When you use your backup application to eject the tape, the tape is archived directly into the storage class (S3 Glacier or S3 Deep Archive) that corresponds to the pool. |
Worm |
Set to |
Tags |
A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to a virtual tape that has a barcode. Each tag is a key-value pair. Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256. |
Creates one or more virtual tapes
Description
Creates one or more virtual tapes. You write data to the virtual tapes and then archive the tapes. This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_tapes/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_create_tapes(
GatewayARN,
TapeSizeInBytes,
ClientToken,
NumTapesToCreate,
TapeBarcodePrefix,
KMSEncrypted = NULL,
KMSKey = NULL,
PoolId = NULL,
Worm = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] The unique Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that represents the gateway to
associate the virtual tapes with. Use the
|
TapeSizeInBytes |
[required] The size, in bytes, of the virtual tapes that you want to create. The size must be aligned by gigabyte (102410241024 bytes). |
ClientToken |
[required] A unique identifier that you use to retry a request. If you retry a
request, use the same Using the same |
NumTapesToCreate |
[required] The number of virtual tapes that you want to create. |
TapeBarcodePrefix |
[required] A prefix that you append to the barcode of the virtual tape you are creating. This prefix makes the barcode unique. The prefix must be 1-4 characters in length and must be one of the uppercase letters from A to Z. |
KMSEncrypted |
Set to Valid Values: |
KMSKey |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a symmetric customer master key (CMK)
used for Amazon S3 server-side encryption. Storage Gateway does not
support asymmetric CMKs. This value can only be set when |
PoolId |
The ID of the pool that you want to add your tape to for archiving. The tape in this pool is archived in the S3 storage class that is associated with the pool. When you use your backup application to eject the tape, the tape is archived directly into the storage class (S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive) that corresponds to the pool. |
Worm |
Set to |
Tags |
A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to a virtual tape. Each tag is a key-value pair. Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256. |
Deletes the automatic tape creation policy of a gateway
Description
Deletes the automatic tape creation policy of a gateway. If you delete this policy, new virtual tapes must be created manually. Use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway in your request to remove the policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_automatic_tape_creation_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_delete_automatic_tape_creation_policy(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Deletes the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway
Description
Deletes the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway. You can delete either the upload and download bandwidth rate limit, or you can delete both. If you delete only one of the limits, the other limit remains unchanged. To specify which gateway to work with, use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway in your request. This operation is supported only for the stored volume, cached volume, and tape gateway types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_bandwidth_rate_limit/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_delete_bandwidth_rate_limit(GatewayARN, BandwidthType)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
BandwidthType |
[required] One of the BandwidthType values that indicates the gateway bandwidth rate limit to delete. Valid Values: |
Deletes the specified cache report and any associated tags from the Storage Gateway database
Description
Deletes the specified cache report and any associated tags from the Storage Gateway database. You can only delete completed reports. If the status of the report you attempt to delete still IN-PROGRESS, the delete operation returns an error. You can use cancel_cache_report
to cancel an IN-PROGRESS report.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_cache_report/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_delete_cache_report(CacheReportARN)
Arguments
CacheReportARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cache report you want to delete. |
Deletes Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials for a specified iSCSI target and initiator pair
Description
Deletes Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials for a specified iSCSI target and initiator pair. This operation is supported in volume and tape gateway types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_chap_credentials/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_delete_chap_credentials(TargetARN, InitiatorName)
Arguments
TargetARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the iSCSI volume target. Use the
|
InitiatorName |
[required] The iSCSI initiator that connects to the target. |
Deletes a file share from an S3 File Gateway
Description
Deletes a file share from an S3 File Gateway. This operation is only supported for S3 File Gateways.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_file_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_delete_file_share(FileShareARN, ForceDelete = NULL)
Arguments
FileShareARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the file share to be deleted. |
ForceDelete |
If this value is set to Valid Values: |
Deletes a gateway
Description
Deletes a gateway. To specify which gateway to delete, use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway in your request. The operation deletes the gateway; however, it does not delete the gateway virtual machine (VM) from your host computer.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_gateway/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_delete_gateway(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Deletes a snapshot of a volume
Description
Deletes a snapshot of a volume.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_snapshot_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_delete_snapshot_schedule(VolumeARN)
Arguments
VolumeARN |
[required] The volume which snapshot schedule to delete. |
Deletes the specified virtual tape
Description
Deletes the specified virtual tape. This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_tape/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_delete_tape(
GatewayARN,
TapeARN,
BypassGovernanceRetention = NULL
)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] The unique Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway that the virtual
tape to delete is associated with. Use the
|
TapeARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the virtual tape to delete. |
BypassGovernanceRetention |
Set to |
Deletes the specified virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS)
Description
Deletes the specified virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS). This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_tape_archive/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_delete_tape_archive(TapeARN, BypassGovernanceRetention = NULL)
Arguments
TapeARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the virtual tape to delete from the virtual tape shelf (VTS). |
BypassGovernanceRetention |
Set to |
Delete a custom tape pool
Description
Delete a custom tape pool. A custom tape pool can only be deleted if there are no tapes in the pool and if there are no automatic tape creation policies that reference the custom tape pool.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_tape_pool/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_delete_tape_pool(PoolARN)
Arguments
PoolARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the custom tape pool to delete. |
Deletes the specified storage volume that you previously created using the CreateCachediSCSIVolume or CreateStorediSCSIVolume API
Description
Deletes the specified storage volume that you previously created using the create_cachedi_scsi_volume
or create_storedi_scsi_volume
API. This operation is only supported in the cached volume and stored volume types. For stored volume gateways, the local disk that was configured as the storage volume is not deleted. You can reuse the local disk to create another storage volume.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_volume/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_delete_volume(VolumeARN)
Arguments
VolumeARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the volume. Use the
|
Returns information about the most recent high availability monitoring test that was performed on the host in a cluster
Description
Returns information about the most recent high availability monitoring test that was performed on the host in a cluster. If a test isn't performed, the status and start time in the response would be null.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_availability_monitor_test/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_availability_monitor_test(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Returns the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway
Description
Returns the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway. By default, these limits are not set, which means no bandwidth rate limiting is in effect. This operation is supported only for the stored volume, cached volume, and tape gateway types. To describe bandwidth rate limits for S3 file gateways, use describe_bandwidth_rate_limit_schedule
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_bandwidth_rate_limit/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_bandwidth_rate_limit(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Returns information about the bandwidth rate limit schedule of a gateway
Description
Returns information about the bandwidth rate limit schedule of a gateway. By default, gateways do not have bandwidth rate limit schedules, which means no bandwidth rate limiting is in effect. This operation is supported only for volume, tape and S3 file gateways. FSx file gateways do not support bandwidth rate limits.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_bandwidth_rate_limit_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_bandwidth_rate_limit_schedule(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Returns information about the cache of a gateway
Description
Returns information about the cache of a gateway. This operation is only supported in the cached volume, tape, and file gateway types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_cache/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_cache(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Returns information about the specified cache report, including completion status and generation progress
Description
Returns information about the specified cache report, including completion status and generation progress.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_cache_report/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_cache_report(CacheReportARN)
Arguments
CacheReportARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cache report you want to describe. |
Returns a description of the gateway volumes specified in the request
Description
Returns a description of the gateway volumes specified in the request. This operation is only supported in the cached volume gateway types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_cachedi_scsi_volumes/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_cachedi_scsi_volumes(VolumeARNs)
Arguments
VolumeARNs |
[required] An array of strings where each string represents the Amazon Resource
Name (ARN) of a cached volume. All of the specified cached volumes must
be from the same gateway. Use
|
Returns an array of Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials information for a specified iSCSI target, one for each target-initiator pair
Description
Returns an array of Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials information for a specified iSCSI target, one for each target-initiator pair. This operation is supported in the volume and tape gateway types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_chap_credentials/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_chap_credentials(TargetARN)
Arguments
TargetARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the iSCSI volume target. Use the
|
Gets the file system association information
Description
Gets the file system association information. This operation is only supported for FSx File Gateways.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_file_system_associations/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_file_system_associations(FileSystemAssociationARNList)
Arguments
FileSystemAssociationARNList |
[required] An array containing the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of each file system association to be described. |
Returns metadata about a gateway such as its name, network interfaces, time zone, status, and software version
Description
Returns metadata about a gateway such as its name, network interfaces, time zone, status, and software version. To specify which gateway to describe, use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway in your request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_gateway_information/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_gateway_information(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Returns your gateway's maintenance window schedule information, with values for monthly or weekly cadence, specific day and time to begin maintenance, and which types of updates to apply
Description
Returns your gateway's maintenance window schedule information, with values for monthly or weekly cadence, specific day and time to begin maintenance, and which types of updates to apply. Time values returned are for the gateway's time zone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_maintenance_start_time/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_maintenance_start_time(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Gets a description for one or more Network File System (NFS) file shares from an S3 File Gateway
Description
Gets a description for one or more Network File System (NFS) file shares from an S3 File Gateway. This operation is only supported for S3 File Gateways.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_nfs_file_shares/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_nfs_file_shares(FileShareARNList)
Arguments
FileShareARNList |
[required] An array containing the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of each file share to be described. |
Gets a description for one or more Server Message Block (SMB) file shares from a S3 File Gateway
Description
Gets a description for one or more Server Message Block (SMB) file shares from a S3 File Gateway. This operation is only supported for S3 File Gateways.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_smb_file_shares/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_smb_file_shares(FileShareARNList)
Arguments
FileShareARNList |
[required] An array containing the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of each file share to be described. |
Gets a description of a Server Message Block (SMB) file share settings from a file gateway
Description
Gets a description of a Server Message Block (SMB) file share settings from a file gateway. This operation is only supported for file gateways.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_smb_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_smb_settings(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Describes the snapshot schedule for the specified gateway volume
Description
Describes the snapshot schedule for the specified gateway volume. The snapshot schedule information includes intervals at which snapshots are automatically initiated on the volume. This operation is only supported in the cached volume and stored volume types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_snapshot_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_snapshot_schedule(VolumeARN)
Arguments
VolumeARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the volume. Use the
|
Returns the description of the gateway volumes specified in the request
Description
Returns the description of the gateway volumes specified in the request. The list of gateway volumes in the request must be from one gateway. In the response, Storage Gateway returns volume information sorted by volume ARNs. This operation is only supported in stored volume gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_storedi_scsi_volumes/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_storedi_scsi_volumes(VolumeARNs)
Arguments
VolumeARNs |
[required] An array of strings where each string represents the Amazon Resource
Name (ARN) of a stored volume. All of the specified stored volumes must
be from the same gateway. Use
|
Returns a description of specified virtual tapes in the virtual tape shelf (VTS)
Description
Returns a description of specified virtual tapes in the virtual tape shelf (VTS). This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_tape_archives/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_tape_archives(
TapeARNs = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
TapeARNs |
Specifies one or more unique Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) that represent the virtual tapes you want to describe. |
Marker |
An opaque string that indicates the position at which to begin describing virtual tapes. |
Limit |
Specifies that the number of virtual tapes described be limited to the specified number. |
Returns a list of virtual tape recovery points that are available for the specified tape gateway
Description
Returns a list of virtual tape recovery points that are available for the specified tape gateway.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_tape_recovery_points/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_tape_recovery_points(
GatewayARN,
Marker = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Marker |
An opaque string that indicates the position at which to begin describing the virtual tape recovery points. |
Limit |
Specifies that the number of virtual tape recovery points that are described be limited to the specified number. |
Returns a description of virtual tapes that correspond to the specified Amazon Resource Names (ARNs)
Description
Returns a description of virtual tapes that correspond to the specified Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). If TapeARN
is not specified, returns a description of the virtual tapes associated with the specified gateway. This operation is only supported for the tape gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_tapes/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_tapes(
GatewayARN,
TapeARNs = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
TapeARNs |
Specifies one or more unique Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) that represent the virtual tapes you want to describe. If this parameter is not specified, Tape gateway returns a description of all virtual tapes associated with the specified gateway. |
Marker |
A marker value, obtained in a previous call to
If not specified, the first page of results is retrieved. |
Limit |
Specifies that the number of virtual tapes described be limited to the specified number. Amazon Web Services may impose its own limit, if this field is not set. |
Returns information about the upload buffer of a gateway
Description
Returns information about the upload buffer of a gateway. This operation is supported for the stored volume, cached volume, and tape gateway types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_upload_buffer/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_upload_buffer(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Returns a description of virtual tape library (VTL) devices for the specified tape gateway
Description
Returns a description of virtual tape library (VTL) devices for the specified tape gateway. In the response, Storage Gateway returns VTL device information.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_vtl_devices/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_vtl_devices(
GatewayARN,
VTLDeviceARNs = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
Limit = NULL
)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
VTLDeviceARNs |
An array of strings, where each string represents the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a VTL device. All of the specified VTL devices must be from the same gateway. If no VTL devices are specified, the result will contain all devices on the specified gateway. |
Marker |
An opaque string that indicates the position at which to begin describing the VTL devices. |
Limit |
Specifies that the number of VTL devices described be limited to the specified number. |
Returns information about the working storage of a gateway
Description
Returns information about the working storage of a gateway. This operation is only supported in the stored volumes gateway type. This operation is deprecated in cached volumes API version (20120630). Use DescribeUploadBuffer instead.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_working_storage/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_describe_working_storage(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Disconnects a volume from an iSCSI connection and then detaches the volume from the specified gateway
Description
Disconnects a volume from an iSCSI connection and then detaches the volume from the specified gateway. Detaching and attaching a volume enables you to recover your data from one gateway to a different gateway without creating a snapshot. It also makes it easier to move your volumes from an on-premises gateway to a gateway hosted on an Amazon EC2 instance. This operation is only supported in the volume gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_detach_volume/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_detach_volume(VolumeARN, ForceDetach = NULL)
Arguments
VolumeARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the volume to detach from the gateway. |
ForceDetach |
Set to Valid Values: |
Disables a tape gateway when the gateway is no longer functioning
Description
Disables a tape gateway when the gateway is no longer functioning. For example, if your gateway VM is damaged, you can disable the gateway so you can recover virtual tapes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_disable_gateway/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_disable_gateway(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Disassociates an Amazon FSx file system from the specified gateway
Description
Disassociates an Amazon FSx file system from the specified gateway. After the disassociation process finishes, the gateway can no longer access the Amazon FSx file system. This operation is only supported in the FSx File Gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_disassociate_file_system/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_disassociate_file_system(
FileSystemAssociationARN,
ForceDelete = NULL
)
Arguments
FileSystemAssociationARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the file system association to be deleted. |
ForceDelete |
If this value is set to true, the operation disassociates an Amazon FSx
file system immediately. It ends all data uploads to the file system,
and the file system association enters the |
Adds a file gateway to an Active Directory domain
Description
Adds a file gateway to an Active Directory domain. This operation is only supported for file gateways that support the SMB file protocol.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_join_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_join_domain(
GatewayARN,
DomainName,
OrganizationalUnit = NULL,
DomainControllers = NULL,
TimeoutInSeconds = NULL,
UserName,
Password
)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway. Use the
|
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain that you want the gateway to join. |
OrganizationalUnit |
The organizational unit (OU) is a container in an Active Directory that can hold users, groups, computers, and other OUs and this parameter specifies the OU that the gateway will join within the AD domain. |
DomainControllers |
List of IPv4 addresses, NetBIOS names, or host names of your domain
server. If you need to specify the port number include it after the
colon (“:”). For example, |
TimeoutInSeconds |
Specifies the time in seconds, in which the
|
UserName |
[required] Sets the user name of user who has permission to add the gateway to the Active Directory domain. The domain user account should be enabled to join computers to the domain. For example, you can use the domain administrator account or an account with delegated permissions to join computers to the domain. |
Password |
[required] Sets the password of the user who has permission to add the gateway to the Active Directory domain. |
Lists the automatic tape creation policies for a gateway
Description
Lists the automatic tape creation policies for a gateway. If there are no automatic tape creation policies for the gateway, it returns an empty list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_automatic_tape_creation_policies/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_list_automatic_tape_creation_policies(GatewayARN = NULL)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
Returns a list of existing cache reports for all file shares associated with your Amazon Web Services account
Description
Returns a list of existing cache reports for all file shares associated with your Amazon Web Services account. This list includes all information provided by the describe_cache_report
action, such as report name, status, completion progress, start time, end time, filters, and tags.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_cache_reports/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_list_cache_reports(Marker = NULL)
Arguments
Marker |
Opaque pagination token returned from a previous
|
Gets a list of the file shares for a specific S3 File Gateway, or the list of file shares that belong to the calling Amazon Web Services account
Description
Gets a list of the file shares for a specific S3 File Gateway, or the list of file shares that belong to the calling Amazon Web Services account. This operation is only supported for S3 File Gateways.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_file_shares/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_list_file_shares(GatewayARN = NULL, Limit = NULL, Marker = NULL)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway whose file shares you want to list. If this field is not present, all file shares under your account are listed. |
Limit |
The maximum number of file shares to return in the response. The value must be an integer with a value greater than zero. Optional. |
Marker |
Opaque pagination token returned from a previous ListFileShares
operation. If present, |
Gets a list of FileSystemAssociationSummary objects
Description
Gets a list of FileSystemAssociationSummary
objects. Each object contains a summary of a file system association. This operation is only supported for FSx File Gateways.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_file_system_associations/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_list_file_system_associations(
GatewayARN = NULL,
Limit = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
|
Limit |
The maximum number of file system associations to return in the
response. If present, |
Marker |
Opaque pagination token returned from a previous
|
Lists gateways owned by an Amazon Web Services account in an Amazon Web Services Region specified in the request
Description
Lists gateways owned by an Amazon Web Services account in an Amazon Web Services Region specified in the request. The returned list is ordered by gateway Amazon Resource Name (ARN).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_gateways/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_list_gateways(Marker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
Marker |
An opaque string that indicates the position at which to begin the returned list of gateways. |
Limit |
Specifies that the list of gateways returned be limited to the specified number of items. |
Returns a list of the gateway's local disks
Description
Returns a list of the gateway's local disks. To specify which gateway to describe, you use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway in the body of the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_local_disks/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_list_local_disks(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Lists the tags that have been added to the specified resource
Description
Lists the tags that have been added to the specified resource. This operation is supported in storage gateways of all types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceARN, Marker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource for which you want to list tags. |
Marker |
An opaque string that indicates the position at which to begin returning the list of tags. |
Limit |
Specifies that the list of tags returned be limited to the specified number of items. |
Lists custom tape pools
Description
Lists custom tape pools. You specify custom tape pools to list by specifying one or more custom tape pool Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). If you don't specify a custom tape pool ARN, the operation lists all custom tape pools.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_tape_pools/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_list_tape_pools(PoolARNs = NULL, Marker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
PoolARNs |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of each of the custom tape pools you want to list. If you don't specify a custom tape pool ARN, the response lists all custom tape pools. |
Marker |
A string that indicates the position at which to begin the returned list of tape pools. |
Limit |
An optional number limit for the tape pools in the list returned by this call. |
Lists virtual tapes in your virtual tape library (VTL) and your virtual tape shelf (VTS)
Description
Lists virtual tapes in your virtual tape library (VTL) and your virtual tape shelf (VTS). You specify the tapes to list by specifying one or more tape Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). If you don't specify a tape ARN, the operation lists all virtual tapes in both your VTL and VTS.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_tapes/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_list_tapes(TapeARNs = NULL, Marker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
TapeARNs |
|
Marker |
A string that indicates the position at which to begin the returned list of tapes. |
Limit |
An optional number limit for the tapes in the list returned by this call. |
Lists iSCSI initiators that are connected to a volume
Description
Lists iSCSI initiators that are connected to a volume. You can use this operation to determine whether a volume is being used or not. This operation is only supported in the cached volume and stored volume gateway types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_volume_initiators/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_list_volume_initiators(VolumeARN)
Arguments
VolumeARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the volume. Use the
|
Lists the recovery points for a specified gateway
Description
Lists the recovery points for a specified gateway. This operation is only supported in the cached volume gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_volume_recovery_points/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_list_volume_recovery_points(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Lists the iSCSI stored volumes of a gateway
Description
Lists the iSCSI stored volumes of a gateway. Results are sorted by volume ARN. The response includes only the volume ARNs. If you want additional volume information, use the describe_storedi_scsi_volumes
or the describe_cachedi_scsi_volumes
API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_volumes/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_list_volumes(GatewayARN = NULL, Marker = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
|
Marker |
A string that indicates the position at which to begin the returned list of volumes. Obtain the marker from the response of a previous List iSCSI Volumes request. |
Limit |
Specifies that the list of volumes returned be limited to the specified number of items. |
Sends you notification through Amazon EventBridge when all files written to your file share have been uploaded to Amazon S3
Description
Sends you notification through Amazon EventBridge when all files written to your file share have been uploaded to Amazon S3.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_notify_when_uploaded/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_notify_when_uploaded(FileShareARN)
Arguments
FileShareARN |
[required] |
Refreshes the cached inventory of objects for the specified file share
Description
Refreshes the cached inventory of objects for the specified file share. This operation finds objects in the Amazon S3 bucket that were added, removed, or replaced since the gateway last listed the bucket's contents and cached the results. This operation does not import files into the S3 File Gateway cache storage. It only updates the cached inventory to reflect changes in the inventory of the objects in the S3 bucket. This operation is only supported in the S3 File Gateway types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_refresh_cache/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_refresh_cache(FileShareARN, FolderList = NULL, Recursive = NULL)
Arguments
FileShareARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the file share you want to refresh. |
FolderList |
A comma-separated list of the paths of folders to refresh in the cache.
The default is [ Do not include |
Recursive |
A value that specifies whether to recursively refresh folders in the
cache. The refresh includes folders that were in the cache the last time
the gateway listed the folder's contents. If this value set to Valid Values: |
Removes one or more tags from the specified resource
Description
Removes one or more tags from the specified resource. This operation is supported in storage gateways of all types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_remove_tags_from_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_remove_tags_from_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource you want to remove the tags from. |
TagKeys |
[required] The keys of the tags you want to remove from the specified resource. A tag is composed of a key-value pair. |
Resets all cache disks that have encountered an error and makes the disks available for reconfiguration as cache storage
Description
Resets all cache disks that have encountered an error and makes the disks available for reconfiguration as cache storage. If your cache disk encounters an error, the gateway prevents read and write operations on virtual tapes in the gateway. For example, an error can occur when a disk is corrupted or removed from the gateway. When a cache is reset, the gateway loses its cache storage. At this point, you can reconfigure the disks as cache disks. This operation is only supported in the cached volume and tape types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_reset_cache/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_reset_cache(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Retrieves an archived virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS) to a tape gateway
Description
Retrieves an archived virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS) to a tape gateway. Virtual tapes archived in the VTS are not associated with any gateway. However after a tape is retrieved, it is associated with a gateway, even though it is also listed in the VTS, that is, archive. This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_retrieve_tape_archive/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_retrieve_tape_archive(TapeARN, GatewayARN)
Arguments
TapeARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the virtual tape you want to retrieve from the virtual tape shelf (VTS). |
GatewayARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway you want to retrieve the
virtual tape to. Use the You retrieve archived virtual tapes to only one gateway and the gateway must be a tape gateway. |
Retrieves the recovery point for the specified virtual tape
Description
Retrieves the recovery point for the specified virtual tape. This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_retrieve_tape_recovery_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_retrieve_tape_recovery_point(TapeARN, GatewayARN)
Arguments
TapeARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the virtual tape for which you want to retrieve the recovery point. |
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Sets the password for your VM local console
Description
Sets the password for your VM local console. When you log in to the local console for the first time, you log in to the VM with the default credentials. We recommend that you set a new password. You don't need to know the default password to set a new password.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_set_local_console_password/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_set_local_console_password(GatewayARN, LocalConsolePassword)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
LocalConsolePassword |
[required] The password you want to set for your VM local console. |
Sets the password for the guest user smbguest
Description
Sets the password for the guest user smbguest
. The smbguest
user is the user when the authentication method for the file share is set to GuestAccess
. This operation only supported for S3 File Gateways
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_set_smb_guest_password/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_set_smb_guest_password(GatewayARN, Password)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the S3 File Gateway the SMB file share is associated with. |
Password |
[required] The password that you want to set for your SMB server. |
Shuts down a Tape Gateway or Volume Gateway
Description
Shuts down a Tape Gateway or Volume Gateway. To specify which gateway to shut down, use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway in the body of your request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_shutdown_gateway/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_shutdown_gateway(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Start a test that verifies that the specified gateway is configured for High Availability monitoring in your host environment
Description
Start a test that verifies that the specified gateway is configured for High Availability monitoring in your host environment. This request only initiates the test and that a successful response only indicates that the test was started. It doesn't indicate that the test passed. For the status of the test, invoke the describe_availability_monitor_test
API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_start_availability_monitor_test/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_start_availability_monitor_test(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Starts generating a report of the file metadata currently cached by an S3 File Gateway for a specific file share
Description
Starts generating a report of the file metadata currently cached by an S3 File Gateway for a specific file share. You can use this report to identify and resolve issues if you have files failing upload from your gateway to Amazon S3. The report is a CSV file containing a list of files which match the set of filter parameters you specify in the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_start_cache_report/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_start_cache_report(
FileShareARN,
Role,
LocationARN,
BucketRegion,
VPCEndpointDNSName = NULL,
InclusionFilters = NULL,
ExclusionFilters = NULL,
ClientToken,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
FileShareARN |
[required] |
Role |
[required] The ARN of the IAM role used when saving the cache report to Amazon S3. |
LocationARN |
[required] The ARN of the Amazon S3 bucket where the cache report will be saved. We do not recommend saving the cache report to the same Amazon S3 bucket for which you are generating the report. This field does not accept access point ARNs. |
BucketRegion |
[required] The Amazon Web Services Region of the Amazon S3 bucket associated with the file share for which you want to generate the cache report. |
VPCEndpointDNSName |
The DNS name of the VPC endpoint associated with the Amazon S3 where you want to save the cache report. Optional. |
InclusionFilters |
The list of filters and parameters that determine which files are
included in the report. You must specify at least one value for
|
ExclusionFilters |
The list of filters and parameters that determine which files are
excluded from the report. You must specify at least one value for
|
ClientToken |
[required] A unique identifier that you use to ensure idempotent report generation
if you need to retry an unsuccessful
|
Tags |
A list of up to 50 key/value tags that you can assign to the cache report. Using tags can help you categorize your reports and more easily locate them in search results. |
Starts a gateway that you previously shut down (see ShutdownGateway)
Description
Starts a gateway that you previously shut down (see shutdown_gateway
). After the gateway starts, you can then make other API calls, your applications can read from or write to the gateway's storage volumes and you will be able to take snapshot backups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_start_gateway/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_start_gateway(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Updates the automatic tape creation policy of a gateway
Description
Updates the automatic tape creation policy of a gateway. Use this to update the policy with a new set of automatic tape creation rules. This is only supported for tape gateways.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_automatic_tape_creation_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_update_automatic_tape_creation_policy(
AutomaticTapeCreationRules,
GatewayARN
)
Arguments
AutomaticTapeCreationRules |
[required] An automatic tape creation policy consists of a list of automatic tape creation rules. The rules determine when and how to automatically create new tapes. |
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Updates the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway
Description
Updates the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway. You can update both the upload and download bandwidth rate limit or specify only one of the two. If you don't set a bandwidth rate limit, the existing rate limit remains. This operation is supported only for the stored volume, cached volume, and tape gateway types. To update bandwidth rate limits for S3 file gateways, use update_bandwidth_rate_limit_schedule
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_bandwidth_rate_limit/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_update_bandwidth_rate_limit(
GatewayARN,
AverageUploadRateLimitInBitsPerSec = NULL,
AverageDownloadRateLimitInBitsPerSec = NULL
)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
AverageUploadRateLimitInBitsPerSec |
The average upload bandwidth rate limit in bits per second. |
AverageDownloadRateLimitInBitsPerSec |
The average download bandwidth rate limit in bits per second. |
Updates the bandwidth rate limit schedule for a specified gateway
Description
Updates the bandwidth rate limit schedule for a specified gateway. By default, gateways do not have bandwidth rate limit schedules, which means no bandwidth rate limiting is in effect. Use this to initiate or update a gateway's bandwidth rate limit schedule. This operation is supported for volume, tape, and S3 file gateways. S3 file gateways support bandwidth rate limits for upload only. FSx file gateways do not support bandwidth rate limits.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_bandwidth_rate_limit_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_update_bandwidth_rate_limit_schedule(
GatewayARN,
BandwidthRateLimitIntervals
)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
BandwidthRateLimitIntervals |
[required] An array containing bandwidth rate limit schedule intervals for a gateway. When no bandwidth rate limit intervals have been scheduled, the array is empty. |
Updates the Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials for a specified iSCSI target
Description
Updates the Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials for a specified iSCSI target. By default, a gateway does not have CHAP enabled; however, for added security, you might use it. This operation is supported in the volume and tape gateway types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_chap_credentials/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_update_chap_credentials(
TargetARN,
SecretToAuthenticateInitiator,
InitiatorName,
SecretToAuthenticateTarget = NULL
)
Arguments
TargetARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the iSCSI volume target. Use the
|
SecretToAuthenticateInitiator |
[required] The secret key that the initiator (for example, the Windows client) must provide to participate in mutual CHAP with the target. The secret key must be between 12 and 16 bytes when encoded in UTF-8. |
InitiatorName |
[required] The iSCSI initiator that connects to the target. |
SecretToAuthenticateTarget |
The secret key that the target must provide to participate in mutual CHAP with the initiator (e.g. Windows client). Byte constraints: Minimum bytes of 12. Maximum bytes of 16. The secret key must be between 12 and 16 bytes when encoded in UTF-8. |
Updates a file system association
Description
Updates a file system association. This operation is only supported in the FSx File Gateways.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_file_system_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_update_file_system_association(
FileSystemAssociationARN,
UserName = NULL,
Password = NULL,
AuditDestinationARN = NULL,
CacheAttributes = NULL
)
Arguments
FileSystemAssociationARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the file system association that you want to update. |
UserName |
The user name of the user credential that has permission to access the root share D$ of the Amazon FSx file system. The user account must belong to the Amazon FSx delegated admin user group. |
Password |
The password of the user credential. |
AuditDestinationARN |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the storage used for the audit logs. |
CacheAttributes |
Updates a gateway's metadata, which includes the gateway's name, time zone, and metadata cache size
Description
Updates a gateway's metadata, which includes the gateway's name, time zone, and metadata cache size. To specify which gateway to update, use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway in your request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_gateway_information/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_update_gateway_information(
GatewayARN,
GatewayName = NULL,
GatewayTimezone = NULL,
CloudWatchLogGroupARN = NULL,
GatewayCapacity = NULL
)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
GatewayName |
|
GatewayTimezone |
A value that indicates the time zone of the gateway. |
CloudWatchLogGroupARN |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon CloudWatch log group that you want to use to monitor and log events in the gateway. For more information, see What is Amazon CloudWatch Logs? |
GatewayCapacity |
Specifies the size of the gateway's metadata cache. This setting impacts gateway performance and hardware recommendations. For more information, see Performance guidance for gateways with multiple file shares in the Amazon S3 File Gateway User Guide. |
Updates the gateway virtual machine (VM) software
Description
Updates the gateway virtual machine (VM) software. The request immediately triggers the software update.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_gateway_software_now/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_update_gateway_software_now(GatewayARN)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
Updates a gateway's maintenance window schedule, with settings for monthly or weekly cadence, specific day and time to begin maintenance, and which types of updates to apply
Description
Updates a gateway's maintenance window schedule, with settings for monthly or weekly cadence, specific day and time to begin maintenance, and which types of updates to apply. Time configuration uses the gateway's time zone. You can pass values for a complete maintenance schedule, or update policy, or both. Previous values will persist for whichever setting you choose not to modify. If an incomplete or invalid maintenance schedule is passed, the entire request will be rejected with an error and no changes will occur.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_maintenance_start_time/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_update_maintenance_start_time(
GatewayARN,
HourOfDay = NULL,
MinuteOfHour = NULL,
DayOfWeek = NULL,
DayOfMonth = NULL,
SoftwareUpdatePreferences = NULL
)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
HourOfDay |
The hour component of the maintenance start time represented as hh, where hh is the hour (00 to 23). The hour of the day is in the time zone of the gateway. |
MinuteOfHour |
The minute component of the maintenance start time represented as mm, where mm is the minute (00 to 59). The minute of the hour is in the time zone of the gateway. |
DayOfWeek |
The day of the week component of the maintenance start time week represented as an ordinal number from 0 to 6, where 0 represents Sunday and 6 represents Saturday. |
DayOfMonth |
The day of the month component of the maintenance start time represented as an ordinal number from 1 to 28, where 1 represents the first day of the month. It is not possible to set the maintenance schedule to start on days 29 through 31. |
SoftwareUpdatePreferences |
A set of variables indicating the software update preferences for the gateway. Includes
|
Updates a Network File System (NFS) file share
Description
Updates a Network File System (NFS) file share. This operation is only supported in S3 File Gateways.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_nfs_file_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_update_nfs_file_share(
FileShareARN,
EncryptionType = NULL,
KMSEncrypted = NULL,
KMSKey = NULL,
NFSFileShareDefaults = NULL,
DefaultStorageClass = NULL,
ObjectACL = NULL,
ClientList = NULL,
Squash = NULL,
ReadOnly = NULL,
GuessMIMETypeEnabled = NULL,
RequesterPays = NULL,
FileShareName = NULL,
CacheAttributes = NULL,
NotificationPolicy = NULL,
AuditDestinationARN = NULL
)
Arguments
FileShareARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the file share to be updated. |
EncryptionType |
A value that specifies the type of server-side encryption that the file share will use for the data that it stores in Amazon S3. We recommend using If values for both parameters exist in the same request, then the
specified encryption methods must not conflict. For example, if
|
KMSEncrypted |
Optional. Set to We recommend using If values for both parameters exist in the same request, then the
specified encryption methods must not conflict. For example, if
Valid Values: |
KMSKey |
Optional. The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a symmetric customer master
key (CMK) used for Amazon S3 server-side encryption. Storage Gateway
does not support asymmetric CMKs. This value must be set if
|
NFSFileShareDefaults |
The default values for the file share. Optional. |
DefaultStorageClass |
The default storage class for objects put into an Amazon S3 bucket by
the S3 File Gateway. The default value is Valid Values: |
ObjectACL |
A value that sets the access control list (ACL) permission for objects
in the S3 bucket that a S3 File Gateway puts objects into. The default
value is |
ClientList |
The list of clients that are allowed to access the S3 File Gateway. The list must contain either valid IP addresses or valid CIDR blocks. |
Squash |
The user mapped to anonymous user. Valid values are the following:
|
ReadOnly |
A value that sets the write status of a file share. Set this value to
Valid Values: |
GuessMIMETypeEnabled |
A value that enables guessing of the MIME type for uploaded objects
based on file extensions. Set this value to Valid Values: |
RequesterPays |
A value that sets who pays the cost of the request and the cost
associated with data download from the S3 bucket. If this value is set
to
Valid Values: |
FileShareName |
The name of the file share. Optional.
A valid NFS file share name can only contain the following characters:
|
CacheAttributes |
Specifies refresh cache information for the file share. |
NotificationPolicy |
The notification policy of the file share.
This setting is not meant to specify an exact time at which the notification will be sent. In some cases, the gateway might require more than the specified delay time to generate and send notifications. The following example sets
The following example sets
|
AuditDestinationARN |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the storage used for audit logs. |
Updates a Server Message Block (SMB) file share
Description
Updates a Server Message Block (SMB) file share. This operation is only supported for S3 File Gateways.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_smb_file_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_update_smb_file_share(
FileShareARN,
EncryptionType = NULL,
KMSEncrypted = NULL,
KMSKey = NULL,
DefaultStorageClass = NULL,
ObjectACL = NULL,
ReadOnly = NULL,
GuessMIMETypeEnabled = NULL,
RequesterPays = NULL,
SMBACLEnabled = NULL,
AccessBasedEnumeration = NULL,
AdminUserList = NULL,
ValidUserList = NULL,
InvalidUserList = NULL,
AuditDestinationARN = NULL,
CaseSensitivity = NULL,
FileShareName = NULL,
CacheAttributes = NULL,
NotificationPolicy = NULL,
OplocksEnabled = NULL
)
Arguments
FileShareARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SMB file share that you want to update. |
EncryptionType |
A value that specifies the type of server-side encryption that the file share will use for the data that it stores in Amazon S3. We recommend using If values for both parameters exist in the same request, then the
specified encryption methods must not conflict. For example, if
|
KMSEncrypted |
Optional. Set to We recommend using If values for both parameters exist in the same request, then the
specified encryption methods must not conflict. For example, if
Valid Values: |
KMSKey |
Optional. The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a symmetric customer master
key (CMK) used for Amazon S3 server-side encryption. Storage Gateway
does not support asymmetric CMKs. This value must be set if
|
DefaultStorageClass |
The default storage class for objects put into an Amazon S3 bucket by
the S3 File Gateway. The default value is Valid Values: |
ObjectACL |
A value that sets the access control list (ACL) permission for objects
in the S3 bucket that a S3 File Gateway puts objects into. The default
value is |
ReadOnly |
A value that sets the write status of a file share. Set this value to
Valid Values: |
GuessMIMETypeEnabled |
A value that enables guessing of the MIME type for uploaded objects
based on file extensions. Set this value to Valid Values: |
RequesterPays |
A value that sets who pays the cost of the request and the cost
associated with data download from the S3 bucket. If this value is set
to
Valid Values: |
SMBACLEnabled |
Set this value to For more information, see Using Windows ACLs to limit SMB file share access in the Amazon S3 File Gateway User Guide. Valid Values: |
AccessBasedEnumeration |
The files and folders on this share will only be visible to users with read access. |
AdminUserList |
A list of users or groups in the Active Directory that have
administrator rights to the file share. A group must be prefixed with
the @ character. Acceptable formats include: |
ValidUserList |
A list of users or groups in the Active Directory that are allowed to
access the file share. A group must be prefixed with the @ character.
Acceptable formats include: |
InvalidUserList |
A list of users or groups in the Active Directory that are not allowed
to access the file share. A group must be prefixed with the @ character.
Acceptable formats include: |
AuditDestinationARN |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the storage used for audit logs. |
CaseSensitivity |
The case of an object name in an Amazon S3 bucket. For
|
FileShareName |
The name of the file share. Optional.
A valid SMB file share name cannot contain the following characters:
|
CacheAttributes |
Specifies refresh cache information for the file share. |
NotificationPolicy |
The notification policy of the file share.
This setting is not meant to specify an exact time at which the notification will be sent. In some cases, the gateway might require more than the specified delay time to generate and send notifications. The following example sets
The following example sets
|
OplocksEnabled |
Specifies whether opportunistic locking is enabled for the SMB file share. Enabling opportunistic locking on case-sensitive shares is not recommended for workloads that involve access to files with the same name in different case. Valid Values: |
Controls whether the shares on an S3 File Gateway are visible in a net view or browse list
Description
Controls whether the shares on an S3 File Gateway are visible in a net view or browse list. The operation is only supported for S3 File Gateways.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_smb_file_share_visibility/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_update_smb_file_share_visibility(GatewayARN, FileSharesVisible)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
FileSharesVisible |
[required] The shares on this gateway appear when listing shares. |
Updates the list of Active Directory users and groups that have special permissions for SMB file shares on the gateway
Description
Updates the list of Active Directory users and groups that have special permissions for SMB file shares on the gateway.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_smb_local_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_update_smb_local_groups(GatewayARN, SMBLocalGroups)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
SMBLocalGroups |
[required] A list of Active Directory users and groups that you want to grant special permissions for SMB file shares on the gateway. |
Updates the SMB security strategy level for an Amazon S3 file gateway
Description
Updates the SMB security strategy level for an Amazon S3 file gateway. This action is only supported for Amazon S3 file gateways.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_smb_security_strategy/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_update_smb_security_strategy(GatewayARN, SMBSecurityStrategy)
Arguments
GatewayARN |
[required] |
SMBSecurityStrategy |
[required] Specifies the type of security strategy.
|
Updates a snapshot schedule configured for a gateway volume
Description
Updates a snapshot schedule configured for a gateway volume. This operation is only supported in the cached volume and stored volume gateway types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_snapshot_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_update_snapshot_schedule(
VolumeARN,
StartAt,
RecurrenceInHours,
Description = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
VolumeARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the volume. Use the
|
StartAt |
[required] The hour of the day at which the snapshot schedule begins represented as hh, where hh is the hour (0 to 23). The hour of the day is in the time zone of the gateway. |
RecurrenceInHours |
[required] Frequency of snapshots. Specify the number of hours between snapshots. |
Description |
Optional description of the snapshot that overwrites the existing description. |
Tags |
A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to a snapshot. Each tag is a key-value pair. Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256. |
Updates the type of medium changer in a tape gateway
Description
Updates the type of medium changer in a tape gateway. When you activate a tape gateway, you select a medium changer type for the tape gateway. This operation enables you to select a different type of medium changer after a tape gateway is activated. This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_vtl_device_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
storagegateway_update_vtl_device_type(VTLDeviceARN, DeviceType)
Arguments
VTLDeviceARN |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the medium changer you want to select. |
DeviceType |
[required] The type of medium changer you want to select. Valid Values: |